Home

Operating Instructions

1. 8 OD 1 O QO Q 2 O O O P rr qe 2 o of f S TEC 2 A 6 a z jE ean 7 j is Eye m fi ao L Be ea Te 4 Se 8 4 J s P g E P gge Hr i enka lo a CFO Fig 11 3 Replacing the power block type GX 3 SINAMICS G150 11 8 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps Removal Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply Allow unimpeded access to the power block Remove the protective cover The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 3 1 Unscrew the connection to the outgoing motor section 3 screws 2 Unscrew the connection to the mains supply 3 screws 3 Remove the retaining screws at the top 2 screws 4 5 Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables
2. Table 3 Parameter macro p0700 S G150 terminal block Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0840 0 ON OFF 1 Vector r4022 0 TM31 DIO TM31 OFF2_1 enable signal p0844 0 missing Vector 1 OFF2_2 enable signal p0845 0 missing Vector r0722 3 CU DI3 CU OFF3_1 enable signal p0848 0 missing Vector 1 OFF3_2 enable signal p0849 0 missing Vector r0722 2 CU DI2 CU p0806 LOCAL mode disable Vector 0 Command data set p0810 selection CDS bit 0 Vector 0 p0852 Enable operation Vector r4022 4 TM31 D14 TM31 p0854 Control from the PLC Vector 1 PROFIBUS PZD telegram Customizable message p0922 selection Vector 999 frame configuration Fixed setpoint selection bit p1020 0 Vector r4022 1 TM31 DI4 TM31 Fixed setpoint selection bit p1021 1 Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1035 MOP raise Vector r4022 1 TM31 DI1 TM31 p1036 MOP lower Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1055 Jog bit 0 Vector 0 p1056 Jog bit 1 Vector 0 p1113 Direction reversal Vector 0 p1140 Enable RFG Vector 1 p1141 Start RFG Vector 1 p1142 Enable speed setpoint Vector 1 p2103 1 acknowledge faults Vector 0 p2104 a acknowledge faults Vector r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p2106 External fault 1 Vector r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p2107 External fault 2 Vector 1 p2112 External alarm 1 Vector r0722 0 CU DIO CU p2116 External alarm 2 Vector 1 p0738 DI DO8 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 C
3. Parameter Name Setting p0233 Power Module motor reactor Filter inductance p0234 Power Module sinusoidal filter Filter capacity capacity p0290 Power Module overload response Disable pulse frequency reduction p1082 Maximum speed Fmax filter number of pole pairs p1800 Pulse frequency Nominal pulse frequency of the filter see Table 4 19 p1802 Modulator modes Space vector modulation without overmodulation NOTE When the factory setting is applied parameter p0230 is reset If commissioning is carried out again the parameter must be reset SINAMICS G150 4 32 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 3 Connection for External Auxiliary Equipment Option L19 Description This option includes an outgoing circuit fused at max 10 A for external auxiliary equipment e g separately driven fan for motor The voltage is tapped at the converter input upstream of the main contactor circuit breaker and therefore has the same level as the supply voltage The outgoing circuit can be switched within the converter or externally Connection Table 4 21 Terminal block X155 connection for external auxiliary equipment Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 Li 3AC 380 480 V 2 L2 3AC 500 600 V 3 L3 3AC 660 690 V 11 3 Contactor control 230 V AC 13 Checkback from AC 230V 0 5A 14 circuit breaker DC 24V 2A 15 Checkback from 24
4. 06 05 Parameter Macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0741 DI DO11 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 1 1 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 11 Set DI DO11 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0742 DI DO12 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0743 DI DO13 CU r0899 6 Power up inhibit Vector p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 1 inverted p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0745 DI DO15 CU 12138 7 Ack fault Vector p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU 1 Output CU p2103 Acknowledge fault 1 TM31 p2104 Acknowledge fault 2 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 p4031 DO1 TM31 p4038 DO8 TM31 Factory setting p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4039 DO9 TM31 Factory setting p4028 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4040 DO10 TM31 Factory setting p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4041 DO11 TM31 Factory setting p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 Factory setting p2103 Acknowledge fault 1 A_INF O p2104 Acknowledge fault 2 A_INF r4022 3 TM31 DI3 T
5. Fig 9 7 Example star delta changeover SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 19 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 Table 9 2 Settings for the examples star delta changeover Parameter Settings Comment p0130 2 Configure 2 MDS p0180 2 Configure 2 DDS p0186 0 3 0 1 The MDS are assigned the DDS p0820 p2197 2 Change over to the delta circuit configuration after p0821 to p0s24 0 the speed in p2155 has been exceeded p0827 0 1 0 1 The bits from p0830 are assigned to the MDS If e g p0827 0 0 then when selecting MDSO bit p0830 0 is set via DDSO p0830 0 and Digital outputs auxiliary The digital outputs for the auxiliary contactors are p0830 1 contactors assigned bits p0831 0 1 Digital inputs auxiliary The digital inputs for the feedback signal of the motor switches contactors are assigned p0833 0 1 0 0 The drive controls the contactors and the pulse cancellation p2155 Changeover speed Sets the speed where the delta circuit configuration should be selected Star delta changeover sequence 1 9 20 Pulse cancellation After selecting a new drive data set using p0820 the pulses are cancelled Open the motor contactor Motor contactor 1 is opened r0830 0 and the status bit Motor changeover active r0835 0 is set Change over the drive data set The requested data set is activated p0051 req
6. ae e JE TO OC lIooo00 lIoooo Oo OMON 8 a Se Gg 7 OG Oo z d 1 18 Of 18 oF ale D 3 U Fig 11 7 Replacing the power block type JX right hand power block SINAMICS G150 11 16 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 7 Remove the busbar 8 screws Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 2 plugs oa fF W N Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection 1 plug 7 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the installation device for the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwe
7. CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 27 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 11 Replacing the Fan Type GX Replacing the Fan Ce Fig 11 13 Replacing the fan type GX 11 28 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables including ambient temperature and the degree of cabinet protection and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Open the cabinet door e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 13 1 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 2 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order
8. CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 29 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 12 Replacing the Fan Type HX Replacing the Fan Left Hand Power Block 50 OG GO O606 S O 0 8 Fig 11 14 Replacing the fan type HX left hand power block SINAMICS G150 11 30 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables including ambient temperature and the degree of cabinet protection and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Open the cabinet door e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 14 1 Remove the copper bars 6 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan
9. lt Back Cancel Help Fig 5 19 Calculating the motor controller data 21 In Calculate the motor controller data choose the appropriate settings for your device configuration NOTE If the equivalent circuit diagram data was entered manually see Fig 5 18 the motor controller data should be calculated without calculating the equivalent circuit diagram data SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 19 Commissioning 06 05 Configuring the Motor Holding Brake Configuration Drive_unit_0 Motor holding brake MControl structure MDrive setting No motor holding brake being used v P Extended brake control Defaults of the setp Drive functions PROFIBUS process Important paramete Fig 5 20 Configuring the motor holding brake 22 In Holding brake configuration select the appropriate setting for your device configuration SINAMICS G150 5 20 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Entering the Encoder Data Option K50 NOTE If you have specified option K50 SMC30 sensor module the following screen is displayed in which you can enter the encoder data Configuration Drive_unit_0 Encoder Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 W Drive unit Options Which encoder do you want to use M Encoder 7 Encoder 1 Encoder Name E ncoder_1 Select standard encoder from list C Enter data Encoder data Dri
10. 11 3 1 Installation Device Description The installation device is used for installing and removing the power blocks It is used as an installation aid which is placed in front of and secured to the module The telescopic guide support allows the withdrawable device to be adjusted according to the height at which the power blocks are installed Once the mechanical and electrical connections have been removed the power block can be removed from the module whereby the power block is guided and supported by the guide rails on the withdrawable devices Fig 11 1 Installation device Order Number Order number for the installation device 6SL3766 1FA00 OAAO SINAMICS G150 11 4 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing 11 4 Replacing Components WARNING AN The following must be taken into account when the devices are transported e Some of the devices are heavy or top heavy e Due to their weight the devices must be handled with care by trained personnel e Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are not lifted or transported properly WARNING AN The cabinet units are operated with high voltages All connection procedures must be carried out with the cabinet de energized All work on the units must be carried out by trained personnel only Death serious injury or substantial material damage can result if these warnings are not taken into account Work
11. SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 3 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 2 1 1 Standstill Measurement Description Motor identification with p1910 is used for determining the motor parameters at standstill see also p1960 speed controller optimization e Equivalent circuit diagram data p1910 1 For control engineering reasons you are strongly advised to carry out motor identification because the equivalent circuit diagram data motor cable resistance IGBT on state voltage and compensation for the IGBT lockout time can only be estimated if the data on the type plate is used For this reason the stator resistance for the stability of sensorless vector control or for the voltage boost with the V f characteristic is very important Motor identification is essential if long supply cables or third party motors are used When motor data identification is started for the first time the following data is determined with p1910 1 on the basis of the data on the type plate rated data e Equivalent circuit diagram data e Total resistance of Power cable resistor Rcable Stator resistance Rs e IGBT on state voltage and compensation for the IGBT lockout times Since the type plate data contains the initialization values for identification you must ensure that it is entered correctly and consistently to enable the above data to be determined Power Module Cable Motor p1825 p1828 p0352 M
12. O Oo f or n comparison value not reached BO r2199 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 43 Operation 06 05 Bit Meaning Explanation BICO Note The message is parameterized as follows p2141 Threshold value p2142 Hysteresis imi 1 1 MorP limit not reached 11 l M or P limit not reached BO r1407 7 l M or P limit reached 0 1 M or P limit reached 12 Reserved a Alarm motor 1_ Motor overtemperature alarm active BO overtemperature 0 Motor overtemperature alarm not active r2135 14 1 Motor rotates forwards 14 Motor rotates forwards BO r2197 3 n_act gt 0 0 Motor not rotating forwards 15 Reserved NAMUR signaling bit bar Table 6 14 NAMUR signaling bit bar Bit Meaning 0 signal 1 signal 00 Fault drive converter data electronics SW error No Yes 01 Line supply fault No Yes 02 DC link overvoltage No Yes 03 Fault drive converter power electronics No Yes 04 Overtemperature drive converter No Yes 05 Ground fault No Yes 06 Motor overload No Yes 07 Bus error No Yes 08 External safety trip No Yes 09 Fault motor encoder No Yes 10 Error internal communications No Yes 11 Fault infeed No Yes 15 Other faults errors No Yes SINAMICS G150 6 44 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation Actual Speed Value N_Act N_Act_GLATT e Actual speed value with 16
13. with the specified current values the cabinet unit can operate continuously under 100 load Cooling method AF A coolant air F circulation method forced cooling drive unit fan in the device Weight Weight of the cabinet unit Explanation of the Option Short Codes Table 2 3 Explanation of the option codes Version A Cc Input options LOO Line filter for use in environment 1 to EN 61800 3 category C2 E TN TT networks L13 Main contactor for currents lt 800 A e S L22 Without line reactor in power range P lt 500 kW available soon L23 Line reactor uk 2 may be required for P gt 500 kW L26 Main circuit breaker incl fuses circuit breakers id gi Output options L08 Motor reactor B L15 Sinusoidal filter only for the voltage range 380 480 V max 200 kW Input and output options M70 EMC shield bar cable connection from below M75 PE busbar cable connection from below SINAMICS G150 2 14 Operating Instructions 06 05 Device Overview Version A Cc Motor protection and safety functions L45 EMERGENCY OFF button in the cabinet unit door e L57 EMERGENCY OFF category 0 230 V AC or 24 V DC uncontrolled stop L59 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 230 V AC controlled stop e L60 EMERGENCY OFF cat
14. 1 Flying restart is always active start in the setpoint direction 2 Flying restart is active after power on fault OFF2 start in the setpoint direction 3 Flying restart is active after fault OFF2 start in the setpoint direction 4 Flying restart is always active start only in the setpoint direction 5 Flying restart is active after power on fault OFF2 start only in the setpoint direction 6 Flying restart is active after fault OFF2 start only in the setpoint direction p1202 FlyRest srch curr p1203 Flying restart search rate factor r1204 Flying restart V F control status r1205 Flying restart vector control status SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 5 Motor changeover 9 2 5 1 Description The motor data set changeover is for example used for Changing over between different motors Changing over between different windings in a motor e g star delta changeover Motor data adaptation 9 2 5 2 Example of changing over between two motors Requirements The drive has been commissioned for the first time 2 motor data sets MDS p0130 2 2 drive data sets DDS p0180 2 2 digital outputs to control the auxiliary contactors 2 digital inputs to monitor the auxiliary contactors 1 digital input to select the data set 2 auxiliary contactors with auxiliary switches 1 NO contact 2 motor contactors wit
15. Adjusting the fan voltage and the internal power supply to local conditions supply voltage The customer terminal block and its interfaces The interfaces for additional options Operating Instructions 4 1 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 2 Electrical Installation Checklist Use the following checklist to guide you through the electrical installation procedure for the cabinet unit Read the safety notes at the start of this operating manual before you start working on the device NOTE Check the boxes accordingly in the right hand column if the activity applies to the cabinet unit in your scope of supply In the same way check the boxes once you have finished the installation procedure to confirm that the activities are complete Item Activity Fulfilled Complete Power Connections For transport units that have been separately shipped the electrical connections of the two sub cabinets must be established refer to Chapter 4 6 E E The line side and motor side power cables must be dimensioned and routed in accordance with the ambient and routing conditions The maximum permissible cable lengths between the converter and motor must be observed depending on the type of cable used see Section 4 7 1 The motor ground must be fed back directly to the cabinet unit The cables must be properly connected with a torque of 50 Nm to the cabinet unit terminals The cables for the motor and low v
16. Features The friction characteristic is used to compensate for the frictional torque of the motor and driven load A friction characteristic allows the speed controller to be pre controlled and improves the control behavior 10 points along the characteristic are used for the friction characteristic The coordinates of every point along the characteristic are defined by a speed parameter p382x and a torque parameter p383x point 1 p3820 and p3830 e There are 10 points along the characteristic to represent the friction characteristic e An automatic function supports the friction characteristic plot e A connector output r3841 can be interconnected as friction torque p1569 e The friction characteristic can be activated and de activated p3842 Commissioning 9 22 Speeds for making measurements as a function of the maximum speed p1082 are pre assigned in p382x when commissioning the drive system for the first time These can be appropriately changed corresponding to the actual requirements The automatic friction characteristic plot can be activated using p3845 The characteristic is then plotted the next time that it is enabled The following settings are possible e p3845 0 Friction characteristic plot de activated e p3845 1 Friction characteristic plot activated all directions of rotation The friction characteristic is plotted in both directions of rotation The result of the positive and negative measurement is
17. OMotor holding brake Defaults of the setpoint B03 External auxiliaries outlet uncontrolled Drive func G61 User terminal block extension module CJPROFIBUS process de M K50 SMC30 encoder module LOO Line filter for use in the first environment in accordance wit LOS Motor choke L15 Sinusoidal filter L13 Main contactor for currents lt 800 A L19 Connection for external auxiliaries controlled max 10 4 L22 Without line choke in the power range P lt 500 kw L26 Mains switch incl fuses or circuit breaker jL45 EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton in the cabinet door Cabinet lighting with service socket d b f The options and the selection of the driving unit can no longer be changed after the Assistent page has been exited with Next Cancel Help Fig 5 13 Choosing the options 6 In the Option selection combination field choose the options that belong to your drive unit by clicking the corresponding checkboxes see type plate CAUTION If a sinusoidal filter option L15 is connected it must be activated when the options are selected to prevent the filter from being destroyed NOTE Check your options carefully against the options specified on the type plate The Wizard makes internal connections on the basis of the options you have selected which means that you can no longer change
18. Selecting a telegram via CU parameter p0922 determines which process data is transferred between the master and slave From the perspective of the slave SINAMICS G150 the received process data comprises the receive words and the process data to be sent the send words The receive and send words comprise the following elements e Receive words Control words and setpoints e Send words Status words and actual values Profibus Default Settings When the Profibus default setting is chosen for command and setpoint selection see 6 4 1 Free telegram p0922 999 is selected The receive telegram is parameterized as follows as a result of the default setting plan 622 CTW 1 N_SETP The send telegram is parameterized as follows factory setting plan 623 STW 1 N_ACT _ACT M_ACT P_ACT Fault You do not have to make any further settings in order to use these telegrams SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 35 Operation 06 05 User Defined Telegram Selection a Standard telegrams Standard telegrams are structured in accordance with PROF ldrive profile V3 or internal company specifications The internal process data links are established automatically in accordance with the telegram number setting in CU parameter p0922 The following standard telegrams can be set via parameter p0922 p0g922 1 p0922 20 gt NAMUR telegram p0922 352 gt
19. m Network Configuration F Include network configuration below Master fi Default Fig 5 6 Setting the interface properties Cancel Help IMPORTANT You must activate PG PC is the only master on bus if no other master PC S7 etc is available on the bus NOTE Projects can be created and PROFIBUS addresses for the drive objects assigned even if a PROFIBUS interface has not been installed on the PC To prevent bus addresses from being assigned more than once only the bus addresses available in the project are proposed 6 Once you have done this click OK to confirm the settings and return to the project Wizard SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Project Wizard Starter k xj ib i 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drives Summary new project interface Specify the online connection to the drive unit y p Set i interface CP5511 PROFIBUS Change and test Cancel Fig 5 7 Setting the interface 7 Click Continue gt to set up a drive unit in the project Wizard as shown below Project Wizard Starter i al 3 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drives Summary new project interface Please enter the drive unit data Preview m Drive unit amp Project Device Sinamics Type G150 Version v2 3 Bus addr 33 cs Name jD rive_unit_0 S
20. A60 and the mounting plates have cut out sections which are used to snap the enclosed shield springs into place The shields of incoming and outgoing cables must be applied directly to these shield connections It is important here to establish the greatest possible area of contact and a good conductive connection NOTE These shield springs can be used for all control cables in the cabinet unit because all the shield connections are identical in design Fig 4 5 Shield connection SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 23 Electrical Installation 06 05 X520 X530 Digital inputs S5 Switch current voltage of analog gt inputs X521 Analog inputs X522 Analog outputs temperature sensor Shield connection Protective conductor connection M4 Fig 4 6 4 24 Customer terminal block TM31 al X540 Auxiliary voltage supply P24 V JH X541 NH 4 Digital outputs o DE gt H a o B H H SE X542 4 8 Relay 1 ol H lt Relay 2 o TE h SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation M VY ty My Customer terminal block i X524 1
21. NOTE An open input is interpreted as low When externally generated 24 V DC signals are connected the ground must also be connected X542 2 Relay Outputs Two Way Contacts Table 4 17 Terminal block X542 Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 DO 0 NC Max load current 8 A 2 DO 0 COM Max switching voltage 3 DO 0 NO 250 V AC 30 V DC 5 DO 1 COM bei DC 30 V 240 W ohmic load 6 DO 1 NO Required minimum load 20 mA NO normally open contact NC normally closed contact COM mid position contact Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 NOTE If 230 V AC is applied to the relay outputs the customer terminal block must also be grounded via a 6 mm protective conductor SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 29 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 10 4 10 1 Other Connections Depending on the options installed further connections have to be established for example sinusoidal filter main contactor connection for external auxiliary equipment main circuit breaker including fuses or circuit breaker EMERGENCY OFF button cabinet illumination with service socket anti condensation heating for cabinet contactor combination EMERGENCY OFF thermistor motor protection unit PT100 evaluation unit insulation monitor encoder evaluator and NAMUR option Detailed information on connecting these options with interfaces can be found in Additional
22. The device is connected to terminal X522 7 8 on the customer terminal block TM31 The threshold for switching to an alarm or fault is 1650 Q If the threshold is exceeded the system switches internally from an artificially generated temperature value of 50 C to 250 C and makes it available for further evaluation e Set the KTY temperature sensor type p4100 1 e Activate motor temperature measurement via the external sensor p0600 10 e Alarm A7910 is triggered once the PTC responds e Fault F7011 is triggered once the waiting time defined in p0606 has elapsed Sensor Monitoring for Cable Breakage Short Circuit If the temperature of the motor temperature monitor is outside the range 50 C to 250 C the sensor cable is broken or has short circuited Alarm A07915 Alarm temperature sensor fault is triggered Fault F07016 Fault temperature sensor fault is triggered once the waiting time defined in p0607 has elapsed Fault F07016 can be suppressed by p0607 0 If an induction motor is connected the drive continues operating with the data calculated in the thermal motor model If the system detects that the motor temperature sensor set in p0600 is not connected alarm A07820 Temperature sensor not connected is triggered Function Diagram FP 8016 9576 9577 Parameters e p0600 Motor temperature sensor for monitoring e p0604 Motor overtemperature fault threshold e p0605 Motor overtemperature alarm thres
23. remove the nut washer and screw 2 At the lefthand side of the right sub cabinet release 1 x M12 nut of the PE rail remove the nut washer and screw 3 Locate the connecting jumper at the PE rails of the sub cabinets to be connected 4 Insert the bolts from the front into the grounding lugs of the PE buses 5 Re locate the washers and nuts 6 Tighten the nuts tightening torque 50 Nm 4 6 2 Connecting the DC link connections Pre fabricated cables are used to connect the DC link connections of the two sub cabinets WARNING AN Under no circumstances may the connections be interchanged or short circuited The cabinet unit will be destroyed if the DC link connections are either interchanged or short circuited Establishing the connection 1 Establish the connection Cable number W001 from connection DCPS cabinet field H A49 to the disconnect switch Q98 cabinet field H A25 2 Establish the connection Cable number W002 from connection DCNS cabinet field H A49 to the disconnect switch Q99 cabinet field H A25 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 11 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 6 3 4 6 4 4 12 Connecting up the power supply and the signal cables The connecting cables for 24 V DC and 230 V AC to supply the lefthand sub cabinet with power and for the signal cables must be connected This involves 3 connecting cables that must be connected starting from the righthand sub c
24. 03 4022 11 Switch external fault 3 to DI 11 on the TM31 p1240 0 Disabling the Vdc max controller When the brake chopper is used the Vdc max controller must be switched off Fig 4 11 Activating the connection for External Fault 3 SINAMICS G150 4 42 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation Diagnostics If the thermostat is opened due to a thermal overload on the braking resistor fault F7862 External Fault 3 is triggered and the drive is switched off with OFF2 The braking chopper is not monitored using the software because it has a self protection function It can be monitored using the status bit for digital input 4 parameter r0721 4 e 10721 4 1 Chopper is functioning properly e 0721 4 0 Chopper is malfunctioning You can acknowledge malfunctions in the braking unit by pressing the Acknowledge button on the operator panel when the DC link voltage is present Duty Cycles Ppp Continuous braking power P15 5 x P Power permissible every 90s for 15s P20 4 x P Power permissible every 90s for 20s P40 2 x P Power permissible every 90s for 40s 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 ts Fig 4 12 Duty cycles for the braking resistors Threshold Switch The response threshold at which the braking unit is activated and the DC link voltage generated during braking are specified in the following table WARNING AN The threshold switch must only be used when the cabi
25. 1 Remove the copper bars 6 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 35 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 Replacing the Fan Right Hand Power Block oa n JE e ea RRN Iooo00 lIoooo0 20 z d 1 18 Of 18 oF als D 3 U Fig 11 17 Replacing the fan type JX right hand power block SINAMICS G150 11 36 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables including ambient temperature and the degree of cabinet protection and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power s
26. 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 280 353 436 Rated output current A 260 330 410 Base load current 7 A 250 320 400 Base load current In A 233 280 367 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 5 0 6 1 8 1 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 69 73 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2x 120 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 4 0 2 x 300 2 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 4x 240 4x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x70 2x95 2x120 AWG MCM 2 x 000 2 x 4 0 2 x 300 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2 x 240 4x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 390 390 860 Power block type GX GX HX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 800 x 2000 x600 800 x 2000 x 600 1200 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 354 6 3NA3 365 6 3NA3 365 6 Rated current A 355 500 500 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 3 Cond semi cond protection without option L26 3NE1 331 2 3NE1 334 2 3NE1 334 2 Rated current A 350 500 500 Size to DIN 43 620 1 2 2 2 1 L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cyc
27. 17 Option K50 The SMC30 sensor module is used for determining the O SMC30 sensor actual motor speed module The following encoders are supported by the SMC30 sensor module e TTL encoder e HTL encoder In the factory setting an HTL encoder is bipolar with 1024 pulse per revolution see Section 4 10 15 Connecting protection and monitoring devices 18 Option L45 The contacts for the EMERGENCY OFF button are O connected to terminal X120 and can be picked off so eS aaa that they can be integrated in a higher level installation protection concept see Section 4 10 5 19 Option L57 EMERGENCY OFF category 0 stops the drive in an O O EMERGENCY uncontrolled manner No additional wiring is necessary OFF category 0 when implemented in conjunction with option L45 230 V AC If the cabinet unit is integrated in an external safety 24 V DC circuit however the contact must be looped in via terminal block X120 see Section 4 10 8 20 Option L59 EMERGENCY OFF category 1 stops the drive ina 0O O EMERGENCY controlled manner With this option it may be necessary OFF category 1 to implement braking units brake chopper and external 230 V AC braking resistors due to the load characteristic and to achieve the required shutdown times No additional wiring is necessary when implemented in conjunction with option L45 If the cabinet unit is integrated in an external safety circuit however the contact must be looped in via terminal block X120
28. 60 1GH31 2_A0O 110 120 88 60 1GH31 5 AO 132 150 84 55 1GH31 8 AO 160 175 87 60 1GH32 2_A0O 200 215 87 60 1GH32 6_A0O 250 260 88 60 1GH33 3_A0 315 330 82 55 1GH34 1_A0O 400 410 82 55 1GH34 7_A0O 450 465 87 55 1GH35 8 AO 560 575 85 55 1GH37 4_A0O 710 735 79 55 1GH38 1_AO 800 810 72 55 2GH41 1AA0 1000 1070 85 55 2GH41 4AA0 1350 1360 79 55 2GH41 5AA0 1500 1500 72 55 SINAMICS G150 12 6 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data 12 2 2 Overload Capability The drive converter cabinets are equipped with an overload reserve to deal with breakaway torques for example In drives with overload requirements the appropriate base load current must therefore be used as a basis for the required load The criterion for overload is that the drive is operated with its base load current before and after the overload occurs a load duration of 300 s is used as a basis here Low overload The base load current for low overload l1 is based on a load duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s Drive converter current A 15 14 Short time current 110 Rated current continuous Base load current I for low overload a A Screen barca eina ee s dee i Fig 12 1 Low overload High Overload The base load current for a high overload I is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s Converter current t A 10s Limiting s
29. After the drive unit has been commissioned the feedback signal monitoring function must be activated This is realized using parameter p0860 Vector 722 7 Control_Unit DANGER If you do not activate the monitoring function of the feedback signal of the main contactors or the circuit breaker then the drive can be powered up even if the main contactor or circuit breaker fails In this case the incoming rectifier of a cabinet unit or the DC link connections could be damaged NOTICE When resetting restoring the parameterization to the factory setting this setting must be again made after the drive unit has been re commissioned Settings for a 12 pulse infeed and connected to a motor with a one winding system 5 28 During commissioning a motor with several winding systems is automatically defined The setting for a single winding system is made after commissioning has been completed by setting parameter p7003 to 0 NOTICE If the motor with a one winding system is not set using p7003 0 then the drive is powered down tripped during motor identification routine with an overcurrent fault message NOTICE When resetting restoring the parameterization to the factory setting this setting must be again made after the drive unit has been re commissioned SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning 5 3 4 Starting the Drive Project You have created a project and saved it to
30. Change over the drive data set The requested data set is activated p0051 requested data set Energize the motor contactor After the feedback signal motor contactor opened for motor contactor 1 the appropriate bit of r0830 is set and motor contactor 2 is energized Enable the pulses After the feedback signal motor contactor closed for motor contactor 2 the bit motor data set changeover active r0835 0 is reset and the pulses are enabled The motor has been changed over SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 5 3 Example of a star delta changeover Motors with star delta changeover allow a wide constant power range to be achieved At lower speeds the motor is operated in the star circuit configuration high torque and at higher speeds in the delta circuit configuration high stall torque Changeover is also possible during operation Requirements The drive has been commissioned for the first time 2 motor data sets MDS p0130 2 2 drive data sets DDS p0180 2 2 digital outputs to control the auxiliary contactors 2 digital inputs to monitor the auxiliary contactors 1 free speed monitoring p2155 2 auxiliary contactors with auxiliary switches 1 NO contact 2 motor contactors with positively driven auxiliary switches 1 NC contact 1INO contact K1 p0831 0 i Te p0831 1
31. Configuration without option G61 with option G61 Node Number Number Power Module U1 2 2 TM31 A60 3 3 24 TM31 A61 4 SMC30 option K50 5 6 Starting the firmware update The process takes a few minutes and is successfully complete when p7829 automatically switches to 0 p7829 1 The process must be carried out consecutively for each DRIVE CLiQ node Switching the power on To activate the firmware update switch the device off and then back on POWER ON I Fault during update Fault F1005 with a fault value indicates that the firmware update was not successful Fig 11 19 Upgrading the firmware for the cabinet unit components NOTE Once the firmware has been upgraded the firmware for the operator panel must also be upgraded For the following cabinet units the numbers of the DRIVE CLiQ devices have changed with respect to the previous representation e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Table 11 3 Numbers of the DRIVE CLiQ nodes Configuration without option G61 with option G61 Nodes Number Number Power Module U1 lefthand sub cabinet 2 2 Power Module U1 righthand sub cabinet 3 3 TM31 A60 4 4 2 TM31 A61 5 SMC30
32. Edition 7 87 Part 1 Section 5 4 3 2 4 The standard specifies the following When power conversion units are installed in general operating areas live parts must be protected in such a way that they cannot be touched either directly or indirectly The operating areas must be dry and free of dust The air supplied must not contain any electrically conductive gas vapors or dust which could impair the function of the devices It may be necessary to filter the air supplied to the installation room If the air contains dust filter mats option M54 can be installed in front of the hoods IP54 and the ventilation grilles on the cabinet doors The ambient conditions for the units in the operating rooms must not exceed the values of code F in accordance with EN 60146 At temperatures gt 40 C 104 F and altitudes gt 2000 m the devices must be derated The basic version of the cabinet units complies with the IP20 degree of protection in accordance with EN 60529 The chassis units are installed in accordance with the dimension drawings supplied The clearance between the top of the cabinet unit and the ceiling is also specified on the dimension drawings The cooling air for the power unit is drawn in from the front through the ventilation grilles in the lower part of the cabinet doors The warmed air is expelled through the perforated top cover or the ventilation grilles in the top cover with option M13 M23 M54 M78 Cooling air can also be supp
33. Size to DIN 43 620 1 00 00 1 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 29 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12 30 Version C 660 V 690 V 3AC part 2 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GH31 5CA0 1GH31 8CA0 1GH32 2CA0 Rated motor output kW 132 160 200 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 168 201 234 Rated output current A 150 175 215 Base load current I A 142 170 208 Base load current I A 134 157 192 Maximum output frequency 2 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 2 8 3 8 4 2 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 67 68 69 73 69 73 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 95 120 2x70 AWG MCM 4 0 300 2 x 000 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 600 2 x 600 2 x 600
34. Technical Data 12 3 6 Cabinet Unit Version C 660 V 690 V 3AC Table 12 29 Version C 660 V 690 V 3AC part 1 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GH28 5CA0 1GH31 0CA0 1GH31 2CA0 Rated motor output kW 75 90 110 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 103 119 141 Rated output current A 85 100 120 Base load current A 80 95 115 Base load current IH A 76 89 107 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 1 7 2 1 2 7 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 17 0 17 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 67 68 67 68 67 68 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 50 50 70 AWG MCM 00 00 000 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 600 2 x 600 2 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 35 50 70 AWG MCM 0 00 000 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x70 2 x 150 2 x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 000 2 x 400 2 x 400 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 225 225 225 Power block type FX FX FX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 400 x 2000 x 600 400 x 2000x600 400 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 022 2 3NE1 022 2 3NE1 224 2 Rated current A 125 125 160
35. connect the power cables first and then the motor cables 4 Screw the motor cables onto the terminals Make sure that you connect the conductors in the correct sequence U2 T1 V2 T2 W2 T3 and U1 L1 V1 L2 W1 L3 CAUTION Tighten the screws with the appropriate torque 50 Nm with M12 otherwise the terminal contacts could catch fire during operation NOTE The motor ground must be fed back directly to the cabinet unit and connected SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 15 Electrical Installation 06 05 Direction of Motor Rotation 4 16 With induction machines with a clockwise phase sequence looking at the drive shaft the motor must be connected to the cabinet unit as follows Table 4 2 Connection terminals on the cabinet unit and motor Cabinet unit connection terminals Motor connection terminals U2 T1 V V2 T2 V W2 T3 W In contrast to the connection for the clockwise phase sequence two phases have to be reversed with a counter clockwise phase sequence looking at the drive shaft NOTE If an incorrect phase sequence was connected when the cables were routed and the phase sequence cannot be corrected by subsequently swapping the motor cables it can be corrected by means of a negative command value or by parameterizing the cabinet unit With motors that can be operated in a star delta configuration the windings must be checked to ensure that they have been conne
36. p1433 p1435 Pl speed controller Torque r1547 1 r1539 setpoint ve oaa preo Fig 7 12 Reference model Function diagram FP 6031 Parameters e e 7 26 p1400 3 Reference model speed setpoint component p1433 p1434 p1435 p1436 p1437 Speed controller reference model natural frequency Speed controller reference model damping Speed controller reference model deadtime Speed controller reference model speed setpoint output Speed controller reference model component input SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 4 3 3 Speed controller adaptation Description Two adaptation methods are available namely free Kp_n adaptation and speed dependent Kp_n Tn_n adaptation Free Kp_n adaptation is also active in operation without encoder mode and is used in operation with encoder mode as an additional factor for speed dependent Kp_n adaptation Speed dependent Kp_n Tn_n adaptation is only active in operation with encoder mode and also affects the Tn_n value 1400 6 1459 1400 5 i Adaptation signal 1 1 mE Pa Referred to p200x or p205x Adaptation signal 2 p1458 p1456 p1457 p1466 p1400 5 Kp_n_adapt p1460 ro Pa TA Speed dependent Poi R Kp_n adaptation p1461 p1400 0 iiei Dynamic response Sensorless p vodor reduction is control field weakening speed active p1465 only for sensorless controller vector
37. red Numeric keypad ON OFF Jog Fig 5 29 Components of the cabinet operator panel SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 31 Commissioning 06 05 5 5 Initial Commissioning 5 5 1 Initial Ramp Up Start Screen When the system is switched on for the first time the control unit CPU is initialized automatically The following screen is displayed BETTER saucs Initialization CPU start Fig 5 30 Initial screen While the system is ramping up the internal statuses are displayed in the bottom line of the operator panel Topology Display When the cabinet unit is ramped up for the first time or reset to the factory setting a screen appears for you to confirm the topology determined Current configuration r0098 01 01100100H Line module Fig 5 31 Confirming the topology example After a few seconds the system automatically exits the screen and the ramp up is continued Once the system has successfully ramped up the drive has to be commissioned when the system is switched on for the first time after it has been delivered The converter can then be switched on When the system is then ramped up again it can be operated immediately SINAMICS G150 5 32 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning 5 5 2 Basic Commissioning Entering the Motor Data During initial commissioning you have to enter motor data using the operator panel Use the data shown on th
38. sea level in m 0 to 2000 96 7 71 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 12 3 Technical Data 06 05 Voltage Derating as a Function of the Site Altitude In addition to current derating voltage derating must also be considered at site altitudes gt 2000 m above sea level Table 12 4 Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude 380 V 480 V 3AC Site altitude above Rated converter input voltage sealevelinm 30v 400v 420v 440v 460v 480V 0 to 2000 Up to 2250 Up to 2500 Up to 3000 Table 12 5 Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude 500 V 600 V 3AC sea level in m 500 V 525 V 550 V 575 V 600 V 98 99 Table 12 6 Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude 660 V 690 V 3AC Rated converter input voltage sea level in m 660 V 690 V Up to 2500 SINAMICS G150 12 4 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Current Derating as a Function of the Pulse Frequency When the pulse frequency is increased the derating factor of the output current must be taken into account This derating factor must be applied to the currents specified in the technical specifications in Section 12 3 Table 12 7 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for devices with a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz Order no Power Output current at Derating factor at 4 kHz 6SL3710 kW 2 kHz A Supply vo
39. such as conductive foam rubber or household aluminum foil The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly illustrated in the following diagram a conductive floor surface b ESD table c ESD shoes d ESD overall e ESD chain f cabinet ground connection g contact with conductive flooring IH IH IH c a Sitting Standing Standing sitting Fig 1 1 ESD protective measures SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Device Overview 2 2 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on the following SINAMICS G150 Introduction to the cabinet units The main components and features of the cabinet unit The cabinet unit wiring Explanation of the type plate Operating Instructions 2 1 Device Overview 06 05 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 Applications Features and Design Applications SINAMICS G150 drive converter cabinet units are specially designed to meet the requirements of drives with a quadratic and constant load characteristic medium performance requirements and no regenerative feedback Applications include e Pumps and fans e Compressors e Extruders and mixers e Mills Features The accuracy of sensorless vector control ensures that the system can be used for a wide variety of applications and as a result an additional speed sensor is not required SINAMICS G150 takes this into account and as a result offers a low cost drive so
40. 1 BI p0852 1 Enable operation 0 Pulse inhibit The motor coasts down The Ready To Run status remains set 0 Set ramp generator to 0 The ramp generator output is set to zero setpoint 0 4 1 BI p1140 1 Enable ramp function generator _ 0 The current setpoint is frozen at the ramp 0 Freeze ramp generator 5 generator output 1 BI p1141 1 Restart ramp generator 1 The speed setpoint at the input of the ramp function generator is enabled 6 1 Enable speed setpoint 0 The speed setpoint at the input of the 1 BI p1142 0 Inhibit speed setpoint ramp function generator is set to zero The drive brakes in accordance with the ramp down time set in p1121 0 gt 4 Acknowledge error A positive signal transition acknowledges all BI p2103 7 the current faults Note The error is acknowledged at a 0 1 edge via BI p2103 Bl p2104 or BI p2105 Reserved Reserved 1 PROFIBUS control words and setpoints are analyzed 1 Control via PLC 1 BI p0852 10 0 PROFIBUS control words and setpoints are not analyzed Note This bit should not be set to 1 until the PROFIBUS slave has returned an appropriate status via STW1 9 1 41 17 Direction of rotation 1 CCW phase sequence 7 BI p1113 changeover 0 CW phase sequence 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 1 Parameter data set changeover DDS 1 Data set 2 data set 2 is active 15 BI p0820 0 Data set 1 0 Parameter data set changeover
41. 10 500 V 525 V10 525 V 575 V 10 575 V 600 V 10 600 V Table 4 5 Supply voltage assignments for setting the fan transformer 660 V 690 V 3AC Line voltage Fan transformer tap U1 T10 660 V 10 660 V 690 V 10 690 V SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 7 5 Table 4 6 Adjusting the Internal Power Supply A1 T10 Version A Only A transformer A1 T10 is installed for the internal 230 V AC power supply for the cabinet The location of the transformer is indicated in the layout diagrams supplied The primary terminals of the transformer may need to be reconnected to the existing supply voltage The supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the transformer for the internal power supply are indicated in Table 4 6 to Table 4 8 IMPORTANT If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual supply voltage the internal power supply will not be correct Supply voltage assignments for the internal power supply 380 V 480 V 3AC Supply voltage range Tapping Matching transformer taps A1 T10 LH1 LH2 342 V 390 V 380 V 1 2 391 V 410 V 400 V 1 3 411 V 430 V 415V 1 4 431 V 450 V 440 V 1 5 451 V 470V 460 V 1 6 471 V 528 V 480 V 1 7 Table 4 7 Supply voltage assignments for the internal power supply 500 V 600 V 3AC Supply voltage range T
42. 18 Version A 500 V 600 V 3AC part 3 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GF35 8AA0 1GF37 4AA0 1GF38 1AA0 Rated motor output kW 400 500 560 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 500 V to 600 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 608 774 852 Rated output current A 575 735 810 Base load current A 560 710 790 Base load current In A 514 657 724 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 8 7 12 7 14 1 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 1 48 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 72 75 72 75 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 3x 185 4x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 600 3 x 500 4 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 8 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 185 3 x 150 3 x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 500 3 x 400 3 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 6 x 600 6 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 3 holes M12 3 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 18 holes M12 18 holes Approx weight standard version kg 860 1320 1360 Power block type HX JX JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 1200 x 2000 x 600 1600 x 2000 x 600 1600 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 354 6 3NA3 365 6 Rated current A 2 x355 2 x 500 Circuit breaker Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 Cond semi cond prote
43. 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current 1 A 852 Rated output current A 810 Base load current I A 790 Base load current ly A 724 Maximum output frequency 4 Hz 100 Power loss kW 14 7 Cooling air requirement m s 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 4x 150 AWG MCM 4 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 8 x 240 AWG MCM 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 4 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 3 x 185 AWG MCM 3 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 6 x 240 AWG MCM 6 x 600 Fastening screw M12 3 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 18 holes Approx weight standard version kg 980 Power block type JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 1000 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection Rated current A Circuit breaker 1 L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing
44. BI Binector input 24V Signal source Signal sink X122 1 DIO Jog 1 xido ey 4 X122 2 Adi 1 _ Jog 2 24V X122 1 ADIO rozzo Internal 7220 1091 X122 2 d DI 1 Internal Jog 2 Fig 6 7 Interconnecting digital signals example SINAMICS G150 6 16 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation Example 2 Connection of OC OFF3 to several drives The OFF3 signal is to be connected to two drives via terminal DI 2 on the control unit Each drive has a binector input 1 OFF3 and 2 OFF3 The two signals are processed via an AND gate to STW1 2 OFF3 BO Binector output BI Binector input 24V Signal source Signal sink Drive 1 A X122 3 Jo 2 OFF3 I Drive2 OFF3 Fig 6 8 Interconnecting OFF3 with more than one drive example BICO interconnections to other drives The following parameters are available for BICO interconnections to other drives e 19490 number BICO interconnections to other drives e 19491 0 15 BI Cl of BICO interconnections to other drives e 19492 0 15 BO CO of BICO interconnections to other drives e p9493 0 15 Reset BICO interconnections to other drives Binector connector converters and connector binector converters Binector connector converter e Several digital signals are converted to a 32 bit integer double word or to a 16 bit integer word e p2080 0 15 Bl PROFIBUS PZD send bit serial Connector binector converter e A 32 bit integer double word or a 16 bit integer word is converted t
45. Binector Input BI 6 14 ROP Setpoint asirini a 6 58 Binector Output BO n se 6 14 POPIO r a EE EANA AR AEREA 5 31 Block Protection cceseeeeesseeeeeees 9 37 Applications nesnenin 2 2 Braking Unit 25 kW Option L61 4 40 Automatic Restart 9 13 Braking Unit 50 kW Option L62 4 40 Automatic Speed Controller Optimization 9 Cc 3 Cabinet Anti Condensation Heating Option Auxiliary Supply 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 21 Enah EERE ee tate ee at a 4 36 230 Vi A Gi ie ties ee ae 4 22 Cabinet Illumination with Service Socket 24 Vi DC asics Gaeta teases 4 22 Option ESOT oe raano EA 4 36 Auxiliary Voltage 4 28 Cable Lengths enri 4 13 B CDS BOO EE E A AEE eee ne 4 55 COPYING E 6 12 BOZ a es ee 4 57 Certificate of Compliance with Order 1 2 BO Serre EE seats ect teeta ants aes 4 57 Certification e a 1 2 BOF Ach E E 4 58 Checklist Basic commissioning Electrical Installation 0 eee 4 2 Settings for cabinet units with a high Mechanical Installation 0ee 3 4 power rating 5 38 Circuit Breaker Option L26 0 4 34 Basic Commissioning ceeee 5 33 Cleaning sirisser eiee 11 2 Entering Motor Data 00 06 5 34 Closed loop torque control 0005 7 31 Entering the Basic Parameters 5 36 Command Data Set oo eeeeeeee 6 9 Entering the Encoder Data 5 35 Command sources Motor Identification eee 5 37 General ose
46. Conductor protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet with option L26 3NA3 354 6 3NA3 365 6 Rated current A Circuit breaker 2 x 355 2 x 500 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 Cond semi cond protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet without option L26 3NE1 447 2 3NE1 448 2 Rated current A Circuit breaker 670 850 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 27 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12 28 Version A 660 V 690 V 3AC part 6 Size to DIN 43 620 1 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Rated motor output kW 1500 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current 1 A 1568 Rated output current A 1500 Base load current IL A 1462 Base load current Ix A 1340 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 Power loss kW 29 4 Cooling air re
47. DDS data set 1 is active SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 39 Operation 06 05 Speed Setpoint N_Setp Speed setpoint with 16 bit resolution incl sign bit Bit 15 determines the setpoint sign Bit 0 gt positive setpoint Bit 1 gt negative setpoint The speed setpoint is normalized via parameter p2000 N_setp 4000 hex or 16384 dec speed in p2000 PCS7 Specific Setpoints PCS7 x Depending on the configuration KP adaptation values for the speed controller and acceleration values or other setpoints for example are transferred here Depending on their application these variables are generally normalized via parameters p2000 to p2004 6 6 5 Overview Table 6 11 Overview of status words and actual values Description of Status Words and Actual Values Abbreviation Description Status word 1 Parameter See Table 6 12 Function diagram FP2452 STW 1 Interface Mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 Status word 1 See Table 6 13 FP2451 STW 1 Interface Mode PROFIdrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 N_act Actual speed value r0063 0 FP6010 la_act Actual current r0068 0 FP6714 M_act Actual torque value r0080 0 FP6714 P_act Actual power value r0082 0 FP6714 N_act_GLATT Actual speed value smoothed r0063 1 FP6010 la_act_GLATT Actual current smoothed r0068 1 FP6714 M_act_GLATT Actual torque value smoothed r0080 1 FP6714 P_act_GLATT
48. DIN VDE mm 8 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 8 x 600 8 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 4 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 8 holes M12 8 holes M12 10 holes Approx weight standard version kg 670 670 980 Power block type HX HX JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 600 x 2000 x600 600 x 2000 x 600 1000 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 448 2 Circuit breaker Circuit breaker Rated current A 850 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 15 Technical Data 06 05 12 3 3 Table 12 16 Version A 500 V 600 V 3AC part 1 Cabinet Unit Version A 500 V 600 V 3AC Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GF31 8AA0 1GF32 2AA0 1GF32 6AA0 Rated motor output kW 110 132 160 Rated in
49. Droop input speed controller O a Speed setpoint C Torque r1547 1 1539 setpoint Speed actual value Cn Only active if the pre control has been activated SLVC p1452 p1470 p1472 p1496 gt 0 Only for SLVC p1442 p1460 j p1462 Fig 7 15 Speed controller with droop Requirements e All drives must be operated with vector and speed control with or without speed sensor e The ramp up ramp down times of the ramp function generator must be identical for all drives SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 29 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Function Diagram FD 6030 Parameters 7 30 r0079 p1492 r1482 p1488 p1489 r1490 r1508 Total speed setpoint Enable droop Speed controller torque output Droop input source Droop feedback scaling Droop feedback speed reduction Torque setpoint before supplementary torque SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 4 4 Closed loop torque control Description For sensorless closed loop speed control p1300 20 or closed loop speed control with encoder VC p1300 21 it is possible to change over to closed loop torque control using BICO parameter p15071 It is not possible to change over between closed loop speed and torque control if closed loop torque control is directly selected with p1300 22 or 23 The torque setpoint and or supplementary setpoint can be entered usin
50. Flying restart WARNING When the Flying restart 01200 function is active the drive may still be accelerated by the detection current despite the fact that it is at standstill and the setpoint is 0 For this reason entering the area around the drive when it is in this condition can cause death serious injury or considerable material damage SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 15 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 2 4 2 9 2 4 3 Flying Restart with Encoder The flying restart function behaves differently with V f control and vector control V f characteristic 01300 lt 20 Refer to Section 9 2 4 1 Flying Restart Without Encoder Vector control with encoder Since the speed is known from the start the motor can be magnetized immediately at the appropriate frequency The duration of magnetization is specified in p0346 Once the excitation build up time has elapsed the ramp function generator is set to the actual speed value and the motor ramped up to the current setpoint speed WARNING When the flying restart 1200 function is active the drive may still be accelerated by the detection current despite the fact that it is at standstill and the setpoint is 0 For this reason entering the area around the drive when it is in this condition can cause death serious injury or considerable material damage Parameters p1200 FlyRest oper mode 0 FlyRestart inactive
51. L26 when gt 800 A X L83 X X L84 X X L86 X X L87 X X 0 This is required when not only the open and closed loop control but also the 230 V AC consumer thermistor motor protection PT100 evaluation unit or insulation monitor is to remain in operation if the main supply fails SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 21 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 8 1 230 V AC Auxiliary Supply The maximum fuse rating is 16 A The connection is protected inside the cabinet with 3 A or 5A Connection e On terminal block X40 remove the jumpers between terminals 1 and 2 as well as 5 and 6 e Connect the external 230 V AC supply to terminals 2 L1 and 6 N 4 8 2 24 V DC Auxiliary Supply The power requirement is 5 A Connection Connect the external 24 V DC supply to terminals 1 P 24 V and 2 Me t of terminal block X9 SINAMICS G150 4 22 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 9 Signal Connections 4 9 1 Customer Terminal Block A60 NOTE The factory setting and description of the customer terminal block can be found in the circuit diagrams The location of the customer terminal block in the cabinet unit is indicated in the layout diagram Shield Connection The shield connection of shielded control cables on the customer terminal block A60 is established in the immediate vicinity of the terminal block For this purpose the customer terminal block
52. Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control The optimum speed controller setting can be determined via the automatic speed controller optimization function p1960 If the inertia load has been specified the speed controller Kp Tn can be calculated by means of automatic parameterization p0340 4 The controller parameters are defined in accordance with the symmetrical optimum as follows Tn 4xTs Kp 0 5 x r0345 Ts 2 x r0345 Tn Ts sum of the short delay times includes p1442 and p1452 If vibrations occur with these settings the speed controller gain Kp must be reduced manually Actual speed value smoothing can also be increased standard procedure for gearless or high frequency torsion vibrations and the controller calculation performed again because this value is also used to calculate Kp and Tn The following relationships apply for optimization e f Kp is increased the controller becomes faster although overshoot is reduced Signal ripples und vibrations in the speed control loop however increase e f Tn is decreased the controller still becomes faster although overshoot is increased When setting speed control manually you are advised to define the dynamic response via Kp and actual speed value smoothing so that the integral time can be reduced as much as possible When doing so closed loop control must also remain stable in the field weakening range To suppress any vi
53. Operating Instructions in the documentation folder Main Contactor Option L13 Description The SINAMICS G150 cabinet unit is designed as standard without a line contactor Option L13 main contactor is needed if a switching element is required for disconnecting the cabinet from the supply necessary with EMERGENCY OFF The contactor is energized and supplied within the cabinet Connection 4 30 Table 4 18 Terminal block X50 checkback contact main contactor closed Terminals Designation Technical specifications 4 NO Max load current 10 A 5 NC Max switching voltage 250 V AC 6 COM Max switching capacity 250 VA Required minimum load gt 1 mA NO normally open contact NC normally closed contact COM mid position contact Max connectable cross section 4 mm AWG 10 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 2 Sinusoidal Filter Option L15 Description The sinusoidal filter limits the voltage gradients and the capacitive charge discharge currents that normally occur when the converter is in operation Additional pulse frequency dependent noise is also prevented The service life of the motor is the same as that for direct on line operation CAUTION If a sinusoidal filter is connected to the converter the filter must be activated during commissioning to prevent it from being destroyed see Chapter 5 Restrictions The follow
54. Overcurrent Monitoring with two thresholds e First threshold exceeded e Second threshold exceeded A30031 A30032 A30033 Current limitation of phase activated Pulsing in the phase in question is inhibited for one pulse period F30017 gt OFF2 is triggered if the threshold is exceeded too often F30001 Overcurrent gt OFF2 Overvoltage n Comparison of DC link voltage with hardware shutdown threshold F30002 Overvoltage gt OFF2 Undervoltage 1 Comparison of DC link voltage with hardware shutdown threshold F30003 Undervoltage gt OFF2 Short circuit e Second monitoring threshold checked for overcurrent e Uce monitoring for IGBT module F30001 Overcurrent gt OFF2 F30022 Monitoring Uce gt OFF2 Ground fault Monitoring the sum of all phase currents After threshold in p0287 is exceeded F30021 Power section ground fault gt OFF2 Note The sum of all phase currents is displayed in r0069 6 For operation the value in p0287 1 must be greater than the sum of the phase currents when the insulation is intact Line phase failure detection F30011 Line phase failure in main circuit gt OFF2 The monitoring thresholds are permanently defined in the converter and cannot be changed by the user 9 34 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 2 Ther
55. The component is not ready for operation Option board not installed or no associated drive object has OPT been created option Green Continuous Option board is ready Flashing Depends on the option board used 0 5 Hz Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component Option board not ready e g after power on MOD OFF Reserved Green Continuous Reserved Customer Terminal Block TM31 A60 Table 10 2 Description of the LEDs on the TM31 LED Color Status Description OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside permissible tolerance range Green Continuous The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ communication is taking place Orange Continuous DRIVE CLiQ communication is being established RDY Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component Green Red Flashing 2 Hz Firmware is being downloaded Gr n Orange _ Flashing 2 Hz Component recognition via LED is activated p0144 or Note Rot Orange Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0154 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 10 3 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 06 05 Control Interface Board Interface Module in the Power Module U1 Table 10 3 Description of the LEDs on the control interface board LED state Description H200 H201 Off Off The electronics power supply is
56. Toolbar i tas Project navigator Working area Detail view gt I Target system output Press F1 to open Help display Offline mode Operating area Explanation Toolbar In this area you can access frequently used functions by clicking icons Project navigator The elements and projects available in the project are displayed here Working area In this area you can change the settings for the drive units Detail view Detailed information about faults and alarms for example is displayed this area SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 3 Commissioning 06 05 5 3 Commissioning Using STARTER Basic Procedure Using STARTER 5 3 1 5 4 STARTER uses a sequence of dialog screens for entering the required drive unit data IMPORTANT These dialog screens contain default settings which you may have to change according to your application and configuration This is intentional Aim By taking time to consider what configuration data you enter you can prevent inconsistencies between the project data and drive unit data identifiable in online mode Creating Your Project Click the STARTER icon on your desktop or choose the following menu path in the Windows start menu to call up STARTER Start gt Simatic gt STEP 7 gt STARTER The first time you run the software the main screen shown below appears with the following windows e STARTER Getting Started Drive Com
57. acts on the speed controller output and affects the torque generating current setpoint When Vdc_min control is active the torque generating current setpoint is reduced so that the drive becomes regenerative In the event of a power failure the DC link voltage decreases due to the lack of power from the supply system When the DC link voltage threshold set via parameter p1245 p1285 is reached the Vdc_min controller is activated Due to the PID properties of the controller the motor speed is reduced to the extent that the regenerative drive energy maintains the DC link voltage at the level set in p1245 p1285 The kinetic energy of the drive governs the dropout characteristic of the motor speed and in turn the buffering duration In centrifugal mass drives e g fans buffering can last a few seconds In drives with a low centrifugal mass e g pumps however buffering can last just 100 200 ms When the power is restored the Vdc_min controller is deactivated and the drive is ramped up to its setpoint speed at the ramp function generator ramp Alarm A7402 drive DC link voltage minimum controller active is present as long as the Vdc_min controller is active If the drive can no longer generate any regenerative energy because for example it is almost at a standstill the DC link voltage continues to drop If the minimum DC link voltage is undershot see Fig 9 3 lt 1 gt the drive is switched off with fault F30003 power section
58. and REMOTE when the drive is switched on motor is running e No Before the system switches to LOCAL a check is carried out to determine whether the drive is in the operational status If so the system does not switch to LOCAL and outputs the message Local not possible Before the system switches to REMOTE the drive is switched off and the setpoint is set to 0 SINAMICS G150 6 56 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 7 7 2 ON OFF Key ON key always active in LOCAL when the operator input inhibit is deactivated OFF key in the factory setting acts as OFF1 ramp down at the deceleration ramp p1121 when n 0 voltage disconnection only if a main contactor is installed The OFF key is only active in LOCAL mode Settings Menu Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Red OFF key acts as factory setting OFF1 e OFF1 Ramp down on the deceleration ramp p1121 e OFF2 Immediate pulse block motor coasts to a standstill e OFF3 Ramp down on the emergency stop ramp p1135 6 7 7 3 Switching Between Clockwise and Counter Clockwise Rotation Settings Menu Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Switching between CW CCW factory setting no e Yes Switching between CW CCW rotation by means of the CW CCW key possible in LOCAL mode e No The CW CCW key has no effect in LOCAL mode For safety reasons the CW CCW key is disabled in the factory setting pumps and fans
59. averaged and entered into p383x e p3845 2 Friction characteristic plot activated positive direction of rotation e p3845 3 Friction characteristic plot activated negative direction of rotation DANGER When plotting the friction characteristic the drive causes the motor to move the maximum motor speed can be reached When commissioning the drive the EMERGENCY STOP functions must function perfectly To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be carefully observed SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions Function diagram FP 7010 Parameters J e SINAMICS G150 p3820 p3839 r3840 13841 p3842 p3845 Operating Instructions Friction characteristic value nO Friction characteristic value M9 Friction characteristic status Friction characteristic output Activate friction characteristic Activate friction characteristic plot 9 23 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 2 7 Increasing the Output Frequency Description In applications that require higher output frequencies the pulse frequency of the power module may have to be increased Since increasing the pulse frequency also increases the switching losses a derating factor for the output current must be taken into account when the drive is configured Once the pulse frequency has been increased the new output currents are automati
60. control p1463 p1400 5 p1462 Pa Speed dependent piere Bag Tn_n adaptation pa B Tn_n_adapt Fig 7 143 Free Kp adaptation A dynamic response reduction in the field weakening range can be activated p1400 0 in sensorless operation This is activated when the speed controller is optimized in order to achieve a greater dynamic response in the basic speed range Example of speed dependent adaptation NOTE This type of adaptation is only active in operation with encoder mode SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 27 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Fig Proportional gain Integral action time 0 p1463 x p1462 With adaptation Without adapatation p1464 p1465 Constant lower speed range n lt p1464 Adaptation range p1464 lt n lt p1465 Constant upper speed range n gt p1465 7 14 Function diagram FP 6050 Parameters 7 28 Free Kp adaptation p1400 5 Speed control configuration Kp Tn adaptation active Free Kp_n adaptation p1455 p1456 p1457 p1458 p1459 p1470 Speed controller P gain adaptation signal Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point Speed amplifier P gain adaptation upper starting point Adaptation factor lower Adaptation factor upper Speed controller sensorless operation P gain Speed dependent Kp_n Tn_n adaptation VC only p1460 p1461 p1462 p1463 p1464 p1465 p1466 Speed controller P gain adaptation s
61. cueehateandeestan wt aA 9 37 9 4 4 Stall Protection Vector Control Only eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeerneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeenneeeeneaa 9 38 9 4 5 Thermal Motor Protection ce ecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeenneeeesenaeeeseeaeeesnneeeeees 9 39 10 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 10 1 10 1 Chapter Content 2 3 a a tetas aa danatedaeceie dade aaia a etaa aS 10 1 10 2 DiAGHOSIS eian E TO O T OAA 10 2 10 2 1 Diagnosis Using N o E AEE E EE E E E E TE 10 2 10 2 2 Diagnosis via P rameterSiniscsesnwkamepnnitanina ni kan a e a 10 6 10 2 3 Indicating and Rectifying Faults eee eeeseeeeeneeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeseeeeeessneeeeneaaes 10 9 SINAMICS G150 z Operating Instructions Vil Contents 06 05 10 3 Overview of Faults and Alarms 0 0 cccceeceeeeeeenneeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaes 10 10 10 3 1 External Warming I rasini niae th el el ees 10 10 10 3 2 External Fault Ves j ce sce deletes dec reteset a a a ieee devo aa yess 10 11 10 3 3 Extemal Fault ors cies a ee E E e AE AAE Ea EAE a EEE EAE AAE A a E a RS SAE 10 11 10 4 Service and SUpport arre aie aee a ea sae eaa EE TAa eE ae a E aa EAE S a p EE EDATEA 10 12 11 Maintenance and Servicing 11 1 11 1 Chapter Content i mi niren haa e ee ee 11 1 11 2 MamntenantE erein aaa ened imi he ee AE OEO cee ieee 11 2 11 2 1 CIS ANMIAG ies E tues sevearbeeevsdone denise E E E atte 11 2 11 3 SEMVICINGS 3 ates EE E AE E T adasbie AT ares 11 3 11 3 1 Instal
62. each key at least once NOTE You can also exit the key test screen by pressing any key and keeping it pressed LED Test In this screen you can check that the 4 LEDs are functioning properly SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 55 Operation 06 05 6 7 7 Operation via the Operator Panel LOCAL Mode You activate the control keys by switching to LOCAL mode If the green LED in the LOCAL REMOTE key does not light up the key is not active For LOCAL master control all of the supplementary setpoints are de activated After the master control has been transferred to the operator panel the BICO interconnections at bit 1 to bit 10 of the control word of the sequence control are not effective refer to function diagram 2501 6 7 7 1 LOCAL REMOTE Key REMOTE I i Activate LOCAL mode press the LOCAL key LOCAL mode LED lights up REMOTE mode LED does not light up the ON OFF JOG direction reversal faster and slower keys are not active Settings Menu Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Save LOCAL mode factory setting yes e Yes LOCAL or REMOTE operating mode is saved when the supply voltage is switched off and restored when the supply voltage is switched back on e No LOCAL or REMOTE operating mode is not saved REMOTE is active when the supply voltage is switched back on LOCAL REMOTE also during operation factory setting no e Yes You can switch between LOCAL
63. inverted signals p Encoder signals TTL HTL m Zero marks IV No zero mark monitoring Distance to zero mark Inversion JT Invert actual speed value T Invert actual position value Supply voltage iby G 24y OK Cancel Help ok Fig 5 22 Entering the encoder data user defined encoder data HTL encoder 26 Select the measuring system You can choose the following encoders x Encoder type r Resolution m Zero marks Rotary Pulses revolution C Linear 2048 Measuring system Incremental pulse TTL iw Encoder evaluation type SMC30 IV No zero mark monitoring j i p Encoder connection Distance to zero mark e g 2048 periods per revolution X521 X531 C x520 E 1 PRERE RTE N in l ion r Encoder signals TTL HTL inversion Single ended Differential with inverted signals JT Invert actual speed value T Invert actual position value Supply voltage o 5V C ay Carcel Hep Fig 5 23 Entering the encoder data user defined encoder data TTL encoder 27 Enter the required encoder data 28 Click OK CAUTION Once the encoder has been commissioned the supply voltage 5 24 V set for the encoder is activated on the SMC30 module If a 5 V encoder is connected and the supply voltage has not been set correctly the encoder may be damaged SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Commissioning Default Settings f
64. least 20 cm The greater the distance over which the cables are routed in parallel the greater the clearance must be If a sufficient clearance cannot be maintained you must install additional shields e Avoid unnecessarily long cable loops Filtering Cables e Line supply cables and power supply cables for devices and modules may have to be filtered in the cabinet to reduce incoming or outgoing disturbances e To reduce emissions SINAMICS G150 is equipped with a radio interference suppression filter as standard in accordance with the limit values defined in category C3 Optional filters which are available on request can be fitted for use in environment 1 category C2 SINAMICS G150 4 10 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 6 Electrically connecting separately shipped transport units After the mechanical installation has been completed for transport units that are separately shipped the following electrical connections must be established between the righthand and lefthand sub cabinets e The PE buses must be connected e The DC link must be connected e The 24 V DC 230 V AC power supply and signal cables must be connected e The DRIVE CLiQ topology must be connected 4 6 1 Connecting the PE buses A connector jumper is provided loose to connect the PE buses of the two sub cabinets Establishing the connection 1 At the righthand side of the left sub cabinet release 1 x M12 nut of the PE rail
65. level gt N ae Iusetp torque generating current setpoint Switching Vdc_max control on off The switch on level of the Vdc_max control r1242 or r1282 is calculated as follows when the automatic switch in level sensing is disabled p1254 0 11242 r1282 1 15 x p0210 unit supply voltage DC link when the automatic switch on level sensing is enabled p1254 1 11242 r128 Vdc_max 50 V Vdc_max overvoltage threshold of the Power Module Function Diagram FP6220 FP6320 Parameters e J SINAMICS G150 p1240 p1280 r1242 r1282 p1243 p1283 p1285 p1287 p1290 p1291 p1292 p1251 p1252 ko N K N a ee N AN ee Operating Instructions Vdc controller configuration Vdc_min controller switch in level Vdc_max controller dynamic factor Vdc_min controller switch in level Vdc_min controller switch in level Vdc_min controller dynamic factor Vdc controller proportional gain Vdc controller integral action time Vdc controller derivative action time Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 r1258 r1298 Vdc_min controller output limit V f control Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection Vdc_min controller time threshold Vdc_min controller response Vdc_min controller speed threshold Vdc controller output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 3 Automatic Restart Des
66. load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Table 12 15 Version C 380 V 480 V 3AC part 3 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GE37 5CA0 1GE38 4CA0 1GE41 0CA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 400 450 560 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 600 700 800 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 785 883 1034 Rated output current A 745 840 985 Base load current A 725 820 960 Base load current I A 570 700 860 Maximum output frequency 4 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 9 6 10 1 14 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 70 73 70 73 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2 x 300 4x 150 3 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 800 4 x 400 3 x 600 Maximum DIN VDE mm 8 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 8 x 600 8 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 4 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 3 x 150 3x 185 4x 185 AWG MCM 3 x 400 3 x 500 4 x 500 Maximum
67. means of a rapid stop using a deceleration ramp that must be parameterized The cabinet unit is then disconnected from the power supply via the line contactor which bypasses the electronics by means of a safety combination to EN 60 204 1 The operating status is indicated by means of eight LEDs A120 A121 Connection Table 4 27 Terminal block X120 connection for EMERGENCY OFF category 1 230 V AC Terminals Technical specifications 7 Loop in EMERGENCY OFF button from system side 8 remove jumper 7 8 15 On for monitored start 16 Remove bridges 15 16 and connect button 17 ig Checkback trip safety combination Max connectable cross section 4 mm AWG 10 Setting When the emergency stop function OFF3 ramp down time p1135 is used to shut down the drive the ramp down time should be less than or at the most equal to the time set on the contactor combination after which the converter is de energized Diagnostics Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on A120 A121 are described in Additional Operating Instructions in the operating manual SINAMICS G150 4 38 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 10 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1 24 V DC Option L60 Description EMERGENCY OFF category 1 for controlled stop to EN 60 204 This function stops the drive by means of a rapid stop using a deceleration ramp that must
68. mm 2x95 2x 120 2 x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 4 0 2 x 300 2 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 4x 240 4x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 390 860 860 Power block type GX HX HX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 800 x 2000 x600 1200 x 2000 x 600 1200 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 365 6 3NA3 365 6 3NA3 255 6 Rated current A 500 500 2x 315 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 3 Cond semi cond protection without option L26 3NE1 334 2 3NE1 334 2 3NE1 435 2 Rated current A 500 500 560 Size to DIN 43 620 1 2 2 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 17 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12
69. not supplied from the internal 24 V supply terminal X540 the jumper between ground M1 and M or M2 and M must be removed in order to avoid potential rounding The external ground must then be connected to terminals M1 and M2 X520 4 Digital Inputs Table 4 10 Terminal block X520 Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 DIO Voltage 3 V to 30 V 2 DI 1 Current input typical 10 mA at 24 V 3 DI 2 With electrical isolation reference potential is terminal M1 4 DI3 Level 5 M1 High signal level 15 V to 30 V 6 M Low signal level 3 V to 5 V DI digital input M1 ground reference M electronic ground Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 NOTE An open input is interpreted as low To enable the digital inputs to function terminal M1 must be connected This can be done as follows 1 The provided ground reference of the digital inputs or 2 A jumper to terminal M note this removes isolation for these digital inputs SINAMICS G150 4 26 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation X530 4 Digital Inputs Table 4 11 Terminal block X530 Terminal Designation DI 4 Technical specifications DI5 DI6 DI 7 0o A O N J gt M2 6 M Voltage 3 V to 30 V Current input typical 10 mA at 24 V With electrical isolation The reference potential is terminal M2 Level High signal le
70. on an open device must be carried out with extreme caution because external supply voltages may be present The power and control terminals may be live even when the motor is not running Dangerously high voltage levels are still present in the cabinet up to five minutes after it has been disconnected due to the DC link capacitors For this reason the cabinet should not be opened until after a reasonable period of time has elapsed 11 4 1 Replacing the Filter Mats Options M23 and M54 The filter mats must be checked at regular intervals If the mats are too dirty to allow the air supply to flow normally they must be replaced NOTE This section is only relevant for options M23 and M54 Not replacing contaminated filter mats can cause premature drive shutdown SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 5 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 2 Replacing the Power Block Type FX Replacing the Power Block D Q O FE O Fig 11 2 Replacing the power block type FX SINAMICS G150 11 6 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 2 1 Unscrew the connection to the outgoing
71. option K50 6 7 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 43 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 8 Loading the new operator panel firmware and database from the PC Description You have to load the database for the operator panel each time you require a language other than that stored in the operator panel or if the firmware of the cabinet unit has been upgraded to enhance its functionality or rectify problems Firmware may need to be loaded to the AOP if the AOP has been upgraded to enhance its functionality or rectify problems The load program LOAD_AOP30 and the database files can be found on the CD Procedure for Loading the Database 1 Establish the RS232 connection from the PC to the AOP30 2 Provide the supply voltage 24 V DC a A O Start the LOAD_AOP30 program on the PC Choose the PC interface COM1 COM2 Depending on the language you require choose a file e g AOP30_DB V02 30 20 E D CBIN and open it to start loading the database Once this is complete Database loaded is displayed on the AOP30 Switch the power on switch the power supply off and then back on Procedure for Loading Firmware and the Database 1 Establish the RS232 connection from the PC to the AOP30 2 Provide the supply voltage 24 V DC oon Ff W o N Start the LOAD_AOP30 program on the PC Choose the PC interface COM1 COM2 Choose and open the firmware AOP30 H86 Follow the i
72. potentiometer e Fixed setpoints The various assignments are explained in the following sections NOTE Make sure that the default settings you choose during commissioning are compatible with the cabinet configuration see Commissioning Chapter 5 Emergency OFF signals L57 L59 and L60 and motor protection signals L83 and L84 are always active regardless of the command source Function Diagrams To supplement this operating manual the documentation folder contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle of the SINAMICS G150 The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating manual The page numbers 6xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the documentation CD in the SINAMICS G List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions SINAMICS G150 6 2 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 3 Basic Information About the Drive System 6 3 1 Parameters Overview The drive is adapted to the relevant drive task by means of parameters Each parameter is identified by a unique parameter number and by specific attributes e g read write BICO attribute group attribute and so on The parameters can be accessed via the following means e PC with the STARTER commissioning tool via PROFIBUS e The
73. products http www siemens de automation service amp support Field Service If your plant is down and you need fast on site help we can provide the specialists with the required expertise wherever you are With our comprehensive service network we offer professional and reliable expertise to get your plant up and running again as quickly as possible Experts are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Tel 0180 50 50 444 Of course we can also arrange special service contracts tailored to your specific requirements For details please contact your Siemens office Spare Parts and Repairs 10 12 Our global network of regional spare parts warehouses and repair centers enables us to respond quickly and reliably with modern logistics procedures During the operational phase of your machinery we provide a comprehensive repairs and spare parts service to ensure maximum operational reliability Our service includes expert advice with technical problems and a wide range of product and system support services tailored to your needs For more information about repairs or spare parts please call the following number in Germany Tel 0180 50 50 448 You can call this number outside office hours and at the weekend to contact our emergency spare parts service SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms Technical support We offer technical support in both German and English for deployi
74. rotation p q BI p1113 changeover 0 CW phase sequence 12 Reserved 13 1 Increase motorized gt BI p1035 potentiometer 1 Decrease motorized 7 BI p1036 potentiometer 14 Note If motorized potentiometer up and down are both 0 or 1 simultaneously the momentary setpoint is frozen 15 Reserved Control Word 1 CTW 1 Interface Mode PROFIdrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 Table 6 10 Control word 1 Interface Mode PROFIdrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 Bit Meaning Explanation Operating BICO condition 0 Deceleration on the deceleration ramp 0 OFF1 OFF1 p1121 then pulse block main contactor if f 0 fitted is opened 1 BI p0840 1 ON 0 Coast to stop OFF2 0 Pulse block main contactor if fitted is BI p0844 opened 1 1 BI p0845 1 Do not coast to stop Note Control signal OFF2 is generated by ANDing BI p0844 and BI p0845 0 Deceleration on the rapid stop ramp 2 0 Fast stop OFF3 p1115 then pulse block main contactor if fitted is opened 1 BI p0848 1 No emergency stop SINAMICS G150 6 38 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation Bit Meaning Explanation Operating BICO condition Note Control signal OFF3 is generated by ANDing BI p0848 and BI p0849 1 Enable inverter pulse enable ramp up 0 Disable operation with active setpoint 3
75. signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 33 11 34 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 13 Replacing the Fan Type JX Replacing the Fan Left Hand Power Block E OR amp ig aag ooooL ooo 8o oaa Tao 6 ee or er S oi amp E E Fig 11 16 Replacing the fan type JX left hand power block os Oooo ef of E SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables including ambient temperature and the degree of cabinet protection and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Open the cabinet door e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 16
76. source Table 5 Parameter macro p0700 S G150 PROF Idrive NAMUR Sink Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0840 0 ON OFF 1 Vector p0922 p0844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector p0922 p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector r0722 3 CU DI3 CU p0848 0 No OFF3_1 Vector p0922 p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector 1 p0806 Inhibit LOCAL mode Vector p0810 Switchover CDS bit 0 Vector p0852 Enable operation Vector 1 p0922 p0854 Control from the PLC Vector 1 p0922 Profibus PZD telegram p0922 selection Vector 20 PROF Idrive NAMUR p1020 FSW bit 0 Vector p1021 FSW bit 1 Vector p1035 MOP raise Vector p1036 MOP lower Vector p1055 Jog bit 0 Vector p1056 Jog bit 1 Vector Direction of rotation p1113 changeover Vector p0922 p1140 Enable RFG Vector 1 p0922 p1141 Start RFG Vector 1 p0922 p1142 Enable nsetp Vector 1 p0922 p2103 Acknowledge fault_1 Vector 0 p0922 p2104 Acknowledge fault_2 Vector 0 p2106 Ext fault_1 Vector r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p2107 Ext fault_2 Vector 1 p2112 Ext alarm_1 Vector r0722 0 CU DIO CU p2116 Ext alarm_2 Vector 1 p0738 DI DO8 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0739 DI DO9 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 24 V CU Parameter Macros 10 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions
77. the relevant values To continue choose lt F5 gt Final confirmation Confirm the basic parameters you have entered to save them To return to the previous dialog screen choose lt Back gt To continue choose lt F5 gt The basic parameters you have entered are saved permanently and the required calculations for closed loop control are made Fig 5 35 Basic commissioning Entering the Basic Parameters 5 36 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Basic Commissioning Motor Identification Motor ID stationary measurement Motor identification stationary measurement Please go LOCAL and press the green I key to switch on the drive to start To switch on the drive choose LOCAL wait until the motor identification LED in the LOCAL key lights up and then press the Note Motor may rotate briefly ON key If motor identification is aborted with lt F4 gt motor Help Alarm Cancel control uses the characteristic motor values calculated from the type plate data rather than the F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 measured values The measurement improves ea Ea Ea Ee Ksi control quality because deviations in the electrical characteristic values due to differences between the material properties and manufacturing tolerances are minimized NOTE When motor identification is complete you must press the OFF key to cancel the power on inhibit Motor ID rotating measurement Motor identification rotating measure
78. the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 3 plugs Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection 1 plug Remove the connection for the DC link sensor 1 nut Remove the power connections 6 screws Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the installation device for the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 11 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 Replacing the Right Hand Power Block 2 2 g O oO o D OIO E Fig 11 5 Replacing the power block type HX right hand power block SINAMICS G150 11 12 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the pro
79. the output 12 33 Technical Data 06 05 SINAMICS G150 12 34 Operating Instructions 06 05 List of Abbreviations List of Abbreviations A AC AD ADC ADR Al AO AOP BERO BI BICO BO CAN CB CD CDS Cl CMD COM CPU CT CU DA DAC DC DDS DI DI DO DO EMC EN ESD FAQ FI Float FW HW V0 IEC SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Alarm Alternating current Analog Digital Converter Address Analog Input Analog output Advanced Operator Panel Tradename for a type of proximity switch Binector Input Binector Connector Binector Output Capacitance Serial bus system Communication Board Compact Disc Command Data Set Connector Input Command Mid position contact of a changeover contact Central Processing Unit Constant Torque Control Unit Digital Analog Converter Direct Current Drive Data Set Digital input Bidirectional Digital Input Output Digital Output Electromagnetic Compatibility European standard Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD Fault Frequently Asked Questions Residual Current Circuit Breaker Floating point number Firmware Hardware Input Output International Electrotechnical Commission List of Abbreviations 1 List of Abbreviations 06 05 IGBT JOG LED MB MDS NC NEMA NO OEM Order No p PD PE PROFIBUS PTC PZD RAM RFG RS232 RS485 S1 S3 SH SI SPS STW SW TIA TM UL Vd
80. the system runtime in days The value is saved when the system is switched off After the drive unit is powered up the counter continues to run with the value that was Saved the last time that the drive unit was powered down Relative System Runtime The relative system runtime after the last POWER ON is displayed in p0969 The value is in milliseconds nach 49 Tagen lauft der Zahler Uber Actual Motor Runtime The motor runtime is displayed in p0650 in hours The counter is started when the pulses are enabled When the pulse enable is withdrawn the counter is stopped and the value saved The values can only be stored with a CU320 with order number 6SL3040 OAA1 and version C or higher The counter is deactivated with p0651 0 If the maintenance interval set in p0651 is reached fault FO1590 is triggered Once the motor has been maintained the maintenance interval must be reset Operating Hours Counter for the Fan The operating hours of the fan in the power section are displayed in p0251 The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter e g after a fan has been replaced The service life of the fan is entered in p0252 Alarm A30042 is output 500 hours before this figure is reached Monitoring is deactivated with p0252 0 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 25 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 2 9 Simulation operation Description The simulation function is p
81. to 200 Hz 2M2 to IEC 60 721 3 2 Shock load Acceleration Corresponds to class 100 m s at 11 ms 3M4 to IEC 60 721 3 3 40 m s at 22 ms 1M2 to IEC 60 721 3 1 100 m s at 11 ms 2M2 to IEC 60 721 3 2 1 applies to cable lengths up to 100 m 12 2 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data 12 2 1 Derating Data Current Derating as a Function of the Site Altitude and Ambient Temperature If the cabinet units are operated at a site altitude gt 2000 m above sea level the maximum permissible output current can be calculated using the following tables The site altitude and ambient temperature are compensated here The degree of protection selected for the cabinet units must also be taken into account Table 12 2 Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature inlet air temperature at the air inlet of the cabinet unit and site altitude for cabinet units with degree of protection IP20 IP21and IP23 Site altitude above Ambient temperature in C sea level in m 50 0 to 2000 87 0 Up to 2500 83 7 4 96 91 96 2 80 5 5 Up to 3500 96 7 92 3 88 8 84 3 77 3 Up to 4000 97 8 92 7 88 4 85 0 80 8 74 0 Table 12 3 Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature inlet temperature at the air inlet for the cabinet unit and site altitude for cabinet units with degree of protection IP54 Site altitude above Ambient temperature in C
82. to ensure that they are secure in position and if necessary retightened Cabling must be checked for defects Defective parts must be replaced immediately NOTE The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the installation conditions cabinet environment and the operating conditions Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract For further details contact your regional office or sales office SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing 11 3 Servicing Servicing involves activities and procedures for maintaining and restoring the operating condition of the cabinet unit Required Tools The following tools are required for replacing components e Spanner or socket spanner w f 10 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 13 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 16 17 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 18 19 e Hexagon socket spanner size 8 e Torque spanner max 50 Nm e Screwdriver size 1 2 e Screwdriver Torx T20 e Screwdriver Torx T30 Tightening Torques for Current Carrying Parts When securing connections for current carrying parts DC link motor connections busbars you must observe the following tightening torques Table 11 41 Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts Screw Torque M8 13 Nm M10 25 Nm M12 50 Nm SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 3 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05
83. to p0369 Measurement of the magnetization current p0320 Speed controller optimization p1470 and p1472 Kp adaptation switch off Acceleration pre control setting p1496 Setting for ratio between the total moment of inertia and that of the motor p0342 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions NOTE To set the new controller setting permanently the data must be saved with p0977 or p0971 on the non volatile CompactFlash card DANGER A During speed controller optimization the drive triggers movements in the motor that can reach the maximum motor speed The emergency OFF functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed Parameters e p1959 e p1960 e p1961 e p1965 e p1967 e 11969 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Speed controller optimization configuration Speed controller optimization selection Saturation characteristic speed for calculation Speed controller optimization speed Speed controller optimization dynamic factor Speed controller identified optimization inertia 9 7 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 2 2 Vdc Control Description The Vdc control function can be activated using the appropriate measures if an overvoltage or undervoltage is present in the DC link e Overvoltage in the DC link Ty
84. to the fixing points provided With version C with a width of 400 mm the cabinet unit can if required be secured to a non flammable vertical surface by means of the wall support supplied see 3 3 2 The cooling air can flow unobstructed 2 The minimum ceiling height for unhindered air outlet specified in the O T operating manual must be observed The cooling air supply must be not be obstructed see 3 3 2 3 Transport units separately shipped must be connected to one another O O refer to Chapter 3 3 4 4 Components that are supplied separately for transport reasons canopy or O O hood must be fitted see 3 3 5 5 The clearance around an open door escape route specified in the O 0O applicable accident prevention guidelines must be observed 6 For option M13 M78 O O Choose the required metric screw connections or conduit thread connections on the basis of the cable cross section and drill the required holes in the blanking plates When the cable is fed in from above ensure that enough room is available if the cable has to be bent because of the cable feeder and cross sections The cable entries should be fed in vertically to minimize transverse forces on the entries see 3 3 6 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Mechanical Installation 3 3 2 Preparatory Steps On Site Requirements The cabinet units are suitable for installation in general operating areas DIN VDE 0558
85. upstream of ramp function 1114 NSET rpm p2000 generator 1 Output frequency 2 r0024 F_OUT Hz Reference frequency Power smoothed 3 r0032 PACTV kW 12004 DC link voltage smoothed 4 r0026 U_DC V p2001 Actual speed smoothed 5 r0021 N_ACT rpm p2000 Absolute actual current smoothed 6 r0027 ACT A p2002 Motor temperature 7 10035 T_MOT C Reference temperature Converter temperature 8 r0037 T_PM C Reference temperature Actual torque smoothed 9 r0031 M_ACT Nm p2003 Converter output voltage smoothed 10 r0025 U_OUT V p2001 For diagnostic purposes Speed setpoint smoothed r0020 NSET rom p2000 Ifa temperature sensor has not been installed a value of 200 C is displayed 6 52 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation Signal Parameter Short name Unit Scaling 100 see Table 6 16 Control factor smoothed r0028 MODDP Reference control factor Field producing current component r0029 IDACT A p2002 Torque producing current component r0030 IQACT A p2002 Converter overload r0036 PMI2T 100 Shutdown Degree of thermal overload Speed actual value motor sensor r0061 N_ACT rpm p2000 Speed setpoint after filter r0062 N_ACT rpm p2000 Actual speed after smoothing r0063 N_ACT rpm p2000 Speed controller system deviation r0064 rpm p2000 Slip frequency r0065 Hz Reference frequency
86. with the programmed speed torque curve p2182 p2190 If the current value is outside the programmed tolerance bandwidth a fault or alarm is triggered depending on parameter p2181 The fault or alarm message can be delayed by means of parameter p2192 to prevent false alarms caused by brief transitional states Torque Nm p1082 p2189 eee eee eee ee ee p2190 Bae Sst eee ere he p2187 eee Actual torque i 2188 HM p2185 p2186 i Speed p2182 i p2183 p2i84 1min 12198 1 E N e p H H i A07920 p2192 lt 2192 lt t Fig 9 10 Load monitoring p2181 1 SINAMICS G150 9 32 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 3 2 Commissioning The extended monitoring functions function module can be activated by running the commissioning Wizard Parameter r0108 17 indicates whether the function module has been activated Function Diagrams FD 8010 Speed messages FD 8013 Load monitoring SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 33 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 4 9 4 1 Description Monitoring and Protection Functions Protecting Power Components General SINAMICS power sections offer comprehensive functions for protecting power components Table 9 5 General protection for power components Protection against Protective measure Response
87. x 500 3 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 6 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 18 holes Approx weight standard version kg 670 670 940 Power block type HX HX JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 600 x 2000 x600 600 x 2000x600 1000 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 435 2 3NE1 447 2 3NE1 448 2 Rated current A 560 670 850 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 32 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Table 12 33 Version C 660 V 690 V 3AC part 5 Size to DIN 43 620 1 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GH38 1CA0 Rated motor output kW 800 Rated input voltage V
88. x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 480 480 860 Power block type GX GX HX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 1000 x 2000 x 600 1000 x 2000 x 600 1200 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 365 3NA3 372 3NA3 475 Rated current A 500 630 800 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 4 Cond semi cond protection without option L26 3NE1 334 2 3NE1 436 2 3NE1 438 2 Rated current A 500 630 800 Size to DIN 43 620 1 2 3 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 10 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Table 12 11 Version A 380 V 480 V 3AC part 3 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GE37 5AA0 1GE38 4AA0 1GE41 0
89. your options by pressing the lt Back pushbutton If you have made an incorrect entry you have to delete the entire drive unit from the project navigator and add a new one 7 Carefully check your options and then click Continue gt SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 13 Commissioning 06 05 Selecting the Control Structure Configuration Drive_unit_0 Control structure Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Drive unit Options Function modules _ Motor holding brake r Technology controller CJEne oder Aa Defaults of the setpoint J Extended messages monitoring ODrive fun OPROFIBUS process d Closed loop control n M control Wf control C Wf control Control method Speed control with encoder E Actual speed value preparation Cancel Help Fig 5 14 Selecting the control structure 8 Select the required data Function modules Select the function modules required in your application Technology controller Extended messages monitoring Control type Choose one of the following open loop closed loop control types Torque control without sensor Torque control with sensor Speed control without sensor Speed control with sensor V f control for precise frequency controlled drives with FCC V f control for precise frequency controlled drives textiles V f control wit
90. 0 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 405 519 639 Rated output current A 380 490 605 Base load current A 370 477 590 Base load current I A 340 438 460 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 5 3 6 4 8 2 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 69 73 70 73 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 120 2x 185 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 300 2 x 500 2 x 600 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 600 2 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 4 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2 x 150 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 4 0 2 x 400 2 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x 150 2 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 4 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 300 300 670 Power block type GX GX HX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 400 x 2000 x600 400 x 2000x600 600 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 334 2 3NE1 436 2 3NE1 438 2 Rated current A 500 630 800 Size to DIN 43 620 1 2 3 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 14 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base
91. 0 2x 185 3 x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2 x 500 3 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 6 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 18 holes Approx weight standard version kg 860 860 1320 Power block type HX HX JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 1200 x 2000 x 600 1200 x 2000 x 600 1600 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 252 6 3NA3 354 6 3NA3 365 6 Rated current A 2x 315 2 x 355 2 x 500 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 3 Cond semi cond protection without option L26 3NE1 435 2 3NE1 447 2 3NE1 448 2 Rated current A 560 670 850 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 26 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Table 12 27 Version A 660
92. 0 V AC 6A 16 contactor PE PE PE Max connectable cross section 4 mm AWG 10 NOTE The connection for external auxiliary equipment must be set in accordance with the connected consumer Q155 Circuit Proposal for Controlling the Auxiliary Contactor from Within the Converter The following circuit for example can be used if the auxiliary contactor is to be controlled from within the converter The Operation message is then no longer available for other purposes SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 33 Electrical Installation 06 05 Fig 4 8 Circuit proposal for controlling the auxiliary conductor from within the converter NOTE If 230 V AC is applied to the relay outputs the customer terminal block must also be grounded via a 6 mm protective conductor 4 10 4 Main Circuit Breaker Incl Fuses Circuit Breaker Option L26 Description Up to 800 A a load interrupter with externally mounted fuses is used as the main circuit breaker Above 800 A the standard circuit breaker is used The circuit breaker is energized and supplied within the converter Connection Table 4 22 Terminal block X50 checkback contact main circuit breaker circuit breaker closed Terminal Designation 1 Technical specifications NO Max load current 10 A 2 NC Max switching voltage 250 V AC 3 COM Max switching capacity 250 VA Required minimum load gt 1 mA N
93. 00 kW standard gt 500 kW only available as option L23 L Rectifier Braking chopper optional Voltage DC link Inverter Motor connection Version A Version C 1 The main circuit breaker fuse and main contactor functions are implemented as of an output current of gt 800 A by means of circuit breakers Fig 2 4 Wiring principle versions A and C SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 2 9 Device Overview 06 05 Circuit principle Version A parallel circuit with 6 pulse infeed 6 pulse infeed Line connection Main switch optional Fuses optional 1 Main contactor optional Line reactor Uk 2 Rectifier Separate voltage DC link Inverter Motor connection Motor with separate winding systems 1 From an output current of gt 800 A the functions main switch fuses and main contactor are implemented using a circuit breaker Fig 2 5 Circuit principle Version A parallel circuit 6 pulse infeed connected to one motor with separate winding systems SINAMICS G150 2 10 Operating Instructions 06 05 Device Overview Circuit principle for a parallel circuit with 12 pulse infeed motor with one winding system 12 pulse infeed Line supply connection Main switch optional 1 Fuses optional Main contact
94. 14 In the selection field next to Motor type select the appropriate motor for your application 15 Click Continue gt SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Configuring the Motor and Entering Motor Data Configuration Drive_unit_0 Motor data Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Drive unit Options Control structure Motor data Induction motor rotary Drive setting Motor 4 K K K K p304 0 Rated motor voltage p305 0 Rated motor current OMotor holding brake Encoder p307 0 Rated motor power IK Defaults of the setpoin fp308 0 Rated motor power factor 0 000 Drive functions p310 0 Rated motor frequency 0 00 Hz PROFIBUS process de p311 0 Rated motor speed 0 0 rpm Important parameters p335 0 Motor cooling type Non ventilat Summary p341 0 Motor moment of inertia p342 0 Ratio between the total and motor moment of in 1 000 p344 0 Motor weight 0 0 I Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data lt Back Cancel Help Fig 5 17 Configuring the motor and entering motor data 16 Enter the motor data see motor type plate 17 If necessary activate Do you want to enter mechanical data 18 If necessary activate Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data IMPORTAN
95. 2 ZOE a a o amp D f ia Fig 11 6 Replacing the power block type JX left hand power block SINAMICS G150 11 14 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 6 Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 2 plugs Remove the power connections 6 screws O oa FF N Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the installation device for the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 15 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 Replacing the Right Hand Power Block
96. 2 1 Example of a cabinet unit version A e g 132 kW 400 V 3AC some components are optional SINAMICS G150 2 4 Operating Instructions 06 05 Device Overview Version A high power rating using a parallel circuit For very high power ratings the cabinet drive comprises two cabinet units that together drive a motor in a parallel circuit configuration e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Customer terminal strip Control Unit CU320 A10 Operator panel A J A A j J N N N N F J Y V r P PP COLE AAA AA L LLL OZZZZZZA Line connection Motor Line connection Motor X1 connection X2 X1 connection X2 Main switch Q1 Power Module U1 Main switch Q1 Power Module U1 Location code Location code Location code Location code H A24 H A49 H A25 H A50 Lefthand cabinet section Righthand cabinet section Fig 2 2 Example of the cabinet drive version A e g 1500 kW 3 ph 690 V AC components in some cases optional SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 2 5 Device Overview 06 05 Special features when connecting up and operating cabinet drive units in a parallel circuit configuration The cabinet dri
97. 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 31 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12 32 Version C 660 V 690 V 3AC part 4 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GH34 7CA0 1GH35 8CA0 1GH37 4CA0 Rated motor output kW 450 560 710 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 493 608 774 Rated output current A 465 575 735 Base load current I A 452 560 710 Base load current I A 416 514 657 Maximum output frequency 2 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 9 1 10 8 13 5 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 72 75 72 75 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2 x 240 3 x185 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 600 3 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 150 2x 185 3 x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2
98. 3 277 Maximum output frequency 2 Hz 160 160 160 Power loss kW 2 9 3 8 4 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 23 0 36 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 67 68 69 73 69 73 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x70 2x 95 2x 120 AWG MCM 2 x 000 2 x 4 0 2 x 300 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 50 2x 70 2x95 AWG MCM 2 x 00 2 x 000 2 x 4 0 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x 150 2 x 150 2 x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2 x 400 2 x 400 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 320 320 390 Power block type FX FX GX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 252 3NA3 254 3NA3 365 Rated current A 315 355 500 Size to DIN 43 620 1 2 2 3 Cond semi cond protection without option L26 3NE1 230 2 3NE1 331 2 3NE1 334 2 Rated current A 315 350 500 Size to DIN 43 620 1 1 2 2 D The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The base load curre
99. 4 10 11 25 kW Braking Unit Option L61 50 kW Braking Unit Option L62 eee 4 40 4 10 12 Thermistor Motor Protection Unit Option L83 L84 oo ee eeeeeeeenneeeeeteeeeeesaeeeeeeaas 4 45 4 10 13 PT100 Evaluation Unit Option L86 0 ee eee eeeee ects eeeeee eee eeeeeeceaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeenaeeseneees 4 45 4 10 14 Insulation Monitor Option L87 00 ee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeseneeeeeeneeeeseaaes 4 47 4 10 15 Sensor Module SMC30 for Detecting the Actual Motor Speed Option K50 4 48 4 10 15 1 DO SCIIPUON Asni beanies castles aana A a a A a aaa eA aaaea ie aiaa 4 48 4 10 15 2 COMMOCTION UE EEE EEEE TA T ETA T E EA 4 51 4 10 15 3 Connection EXample Sz rigen iiaeia AEE cae aaa a EE AAE iea 4 53 4 10 16 Customer Terminal Block Extension Option G61 eessseesiesrisreriesrrieerrirerrssrnn 4 54 4 10 17 NAMUR Terminal Block Option BOO 0 cceccceeececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeseeeseaeeee 4 55 4 10 18 Separate 24 V DC Power Supply for NAMUR Option B02 4 57 4 10 19 Outgoing Section for External Auxiliary Equipment for NAMUR Option BO3 4 57 4 10 20 PROFIdrive NAMUR option BO4 0 cece cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeceneeseeeeseaeeseaeeseeeesaeeseneeseaeeee 4 58 5 Commissioning 5 1 5 1 Chapter Content Srel a diit en en eaten eee 5 1 5 2 The STARTER Commissioning TOOl c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeneaas 5 2 5 2 1 Installing START ER E E E atau nue eee c
100. 40 2 x 300 4x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 600 2 x 800 4 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 185 3 x 150 3x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 500 3 x 400 3 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 10 holes M12 16 holes Approx weight standard version kg 1700 1710 2130 Power block type HX HX HX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 2400 x 2000 x 600 2400 x 2000 x 600 2400 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet with option L26 3NA3 475 3NA3 475 Circuit breaker Rated current A 800 800 Size to DIN 43 620 1 4 4 Cond semi cond protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet without option L26 3NE1 438 2 3NE1 448 2 Circuit breaker Rated current A 800 850 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 1 L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 12 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equ
101. 41 5AA0 The terminals on the setting terminals must be connected to 0 and the supply voltage 0 500V 525V 575V 600V 0 600V CON 660V 690V Fig 4 3 Setting terminals for the fan transformer 380 V 480 V 3AC 500 V 600 V 3AC 660 V 690 V 3AC The line supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the fan transformer are indicated in Table 4 3 to Table 4 5 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 17 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 18 NOTE With the 660 V 690 V 3AC fan transformer a jumper is inserted between terminal 600 V and terminal CON Terminals 600V and CON are for internal use IMPORTANT If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual supply voltage e The required cooling capacity cannot be provided because the fan rotates too slowly e The fan fuses may blow due to an overcurrent NOTE The order numbers for fan fuses that have blown can be found in the spare parts list Table 4 3 Supply voltage assignments for setting the fan transformer 380 V 480 V 3AC Line voltage Fan transformer tap U1 T10 380 V 10 380 V 400 V 10 400 V 440 V 10 440 V 480 V 10 480 V Table 4 4 Supply voltage assignments for setting the fan transformer 500 V 600 V 3AC Line voltage Fan transformer tap U1 T10 500 V
102. 42 6 Operation 6 1 6 1 Chapter Contenmta a beta tiabeden aa a a aa aaa aa E aa a e ASEE 6 1 6 2 General Information About Command and Setpoint Sources ceee 6 2 6 3 Basic Information About the Drive System ccceceeeeeeeeeieeeeettteeeeeetneeeees 6 3 6 3 1 ee E E EEE EN cass apuseaadcnts vad densa cgeassad N O 6 3 6 3 1 1 Parameter TypeS icc ape ar e a ie A E a a 6 3 6 3 1 2 Parameter Categories siivicocccecccegiessuedecscueccudesuneetdectensudecdensscedvesducedenestdaedeediide ttauebdeceensieeed 6 4 6 3 2 Drive ODjOCHS riire asarna e aa aa ea A EAA aAA eE N EEES E nei a aaa 6 6 6 3 3 D ta Setske a a dag A E a a a a aa 6 8 6 3 4 BICO Technology Interconnection of Signals seseeeeerieeerirreriiesrriresrirreerssrrrres 6 14 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions V Contents 06 05 6 4 Command SOUCOS 2 ie ccidebietecchisueteds tiesinio arei bates ieas ireki 6 19 6 4 1 PROFIBUS Default Setting sicir cniri eee eens es aa e edie 6 19 6 4 2 TM31 Terminals Default Setting eee eeeeseeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeenneeeeneaa 6 21 6 4 3 NAMUR Default Setting 2 0 0 cceccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeecaaeseeeeesaaeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeesaeeeeeeees 6 23 6 4 4 PROF Idrive NAMUR Default Setting 0 ee eceeecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeesnaeeeenees 6 25 6 5 SEIPOINMUSOUNCES E TEE E E 6 27 6 5 1 ANALOG INPULS AEE TEE E E EA EAN E AE E E 6 27 6 5 2 Motorized Potentiometer 0 00 ccccecca u
103. 5 plugs and release the cable connection for the signal cables 2 connectors Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the installation device for the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 9 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 4 Replacing the Power Block Type HX Replacing the Left Hand Power Block GOO6 8 7 3 ey 7e G a 6 4 9 1 O Oleje 6 9 6 FE 0 B Fig 11 4 Replacing the power block type HX left hand power block SINAMICS G150 11 10 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps Removal Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply Allow unimpeded access to the power block Remove the protective cover The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 4 O oa FF N N Remove the busbar 6 screws Unscrew the connection to
104. 512 Supplementary torque 1 scaling e p1513 Supplementary torque 2 e p1514 Supplementary torque 2 scaling e 11515 Supplementary torque total SINAMICS G150 7 32 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 4 5 Torque limiting Description mms Crs Fig 7 17 Torque limiting The value specifies the maximum permissible torque whereby different limits can be parameterized for motor and regenerative mode e p0640 Current limit e p1520 Torque limit upper motoring e p1521 Torque limit lower regenerative e p1522 Torque limit upper motoring e p1523 Torque limit lower regenerative e p1524 Torque limit upper motoring scaling e p1525 Torque limit lower regenerating scaling e p1530 Power limit motoring e p1531 Power limit regenerating The currently active torque limit values are displayed in the following parameters e 10067 Maximum drive output current e 11526 Torque limit upper motoring without offset e 11527 Torque limit lower regenerative without offset All of the following limits act on the torque setpoint that is either available at the speed controller output for closed loop speed control or as torque input for closed loop torque control The minimum or the maximum is used for the various limits This minimum or maximum is cyclically calculated and is displayed in r1538 or r1539 e 11538 Upper effective torque limit e 11539 Lower effective torque limit SINAMICS G150 Op
105. 6SL3710 1GE32 1440 400 110kw 2104 6SL3710 1GE32 1C40 400V 110kw 2104 65L3710 1GE32 1CU0 4007 110kw 2104 6SL3710 1GE32 6440 400 132kw 2604 6SL3710 1GE32 6C40 4007 132kw 2604 6SL3710 1GE32 6CU0 400 132kw 2604 6SL3710 1GE33 1440 400 160kw 3104 6SL3710 1GE33 1C40 400V 160kW 3104 6SL3710 1GE33 1CU0 4007 160kw 3104 6SL3710 1GE33 8440 400 200kw 3804 6SL3710 1GE33 8C40 4007 200kw 3804 ESL37101GE338CUO 400V 200kW 380A Configure the drive Drive object type Vector Default macro G150 Cabinet unit 2 x 7 lt Back Cancel Help Fig 3 5 12 Configuring the drive unit In Voltage selection select the appropriate voltage and in Display filter the appropriate cooling method for your drive unit NOTE In this step you make a preliminary selection of the cabinet units You do not define the supply voltage and cooling method yet 4 A listis now displayed under Drive unit selection Choose the corresponding 5 Click Continue gt 5 12 drive unit according to type order no see the type plate SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Choosing the Options Configuration Drive_unit_0 Options Configure the order options M Drive unit Control structure Options selection Tl C setting Motor h o NAMUR terminal block 0802 Safely isolated 24 Y supply PELV
106. 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 WARNING Please ensure that the two disconnect switches Q98 and Q99 are opened and closed together according to the subsequent specifications The cabinet unit can be damaged if the disconnect switches are incorrectly set SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 6 pulse infeed gt open the disconnect switch For 6 pulse infeeds disconnect switches Q98 and Q99 must be opened and it is not permissible that the DC links are connected with one another this is the condition with the equipped is shipped 12 pulse infeed gt close the disconnect switches For 12 pulse infeeds the disconnect switches Q98 and Q99 must be closed the DC links must be connected with one another 4 7 3 Connecting the Motor and Power Cables Connecting the Motor and Power Cables on the Cabinet Unit NOTE The location of the connections is indicated in the layout diagrams provided in 3 1 Open the cabinet remove the covers if necessary in front of the connection panel for motor cables terminals U2 T1 V2 T2 W2 T3 X2 and power cables terminals U1 L1 V1 L2 W1 L3 X1 2 Move or remove the bottom plate below the connection panel through which the motor cables are fed 3 Screw the protective earth PE into the appropriate terminal with earth symbol 50 Nm with M12 at the points provided in the cabinet NOTE With version C
107. 8 Part 1 Cooling method Forced air cooling Sound pressure level lt 75 dB A at 50 Hz line frequency lt 78 dB A at 60 Hz line frequency Shock hazard protection BGV A2 Cabinet system Rittal TS 8 doors with double barb lock Paint finish RAL 7035 indoor requirements Compliance with standards Standards EN 60 146 1 EN 61 800 2 EN 61 800 3 EN 50 178 EN 60 204 1 EN 60 529 CE marking To EMC directive No 89 336 EC and low voltage directive No 73 23 EC RI suppression In accordance with EMC product standard for variable speed drives EN 61 800 3 category C3 category C2 optional L00 Ambient conditions Operation Storage Transport Ambient temperatures 0 C to 40 C Up to 50 C with derating 25 C to 55 C 25 C to 70 C Above 40 C for 24 hours Humidity range non condensing Corresponds to class 5 to 95 5 to 95 5 to 95 at 40 C 3K3 to IEC 60 721 3 3 1K4 to IEC 60 721 3 1 2K3 to IEC 60 721 3 2 Site altitude Up to 2000 m above sea level without derating gt 2000 m above sea level with derating see Section 12 2 1 Strain resistance Vibratory load Deflection Acceleration Corresponds to class 0 075 mm at 10 Hz to 58 Hz 1 5 mm at 5 Hz to 9 Hz 3 1 mm at 5 Hz to 9 Hz 10 m s at gt 58 Hz to 200 5 m s at gt 9 Hz to 200 Hz Hz 1M2 to IEC 60 721 3 1 10 m s at gt 9 Hz
108. AA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 400 450 560 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 600 700 800 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 785 883 1034 Rated output current A 745 840 985 Base load current A 725 820 960 Base load current I A 570 700 860 Maximum output frequency a Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 9 6 10 1 14 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 70 73 70 73 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2 x 300 4x 150 3 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 800 4 x 400 3 x 600 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 8 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 3x150 3x 185 4x185 AWG MCM 3 x 400 3 x 500 4 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 6 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes PE conductor connection M12 M12 M12 Fastening screw 10 holes 16 holes 18 holes Approx weight standard version kg 865 1075 1360 Power block type HX HX JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 1200 x 2000 x 600 1200 x 2000 x 600 1600 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 475 Rated current A 800 Circuit breaker Circuit breaker Size to DIN 43 620 1 4 Cond semi cond protection without option L26 3NE1 448 2 Rated current A 850 Circuit b
109. AE O 6 46 Preparatory Steps c ceceeeeees 3 5 Option Short Codes eeeeee 2 14 Mechanically connecting separately Outgoing Section for External Auxiliary shipped transport units 08 3 6 Equipment for NAMUR Option B03 4 57 Menu Output Terminals 0 cceeeeeeeeeees 8 1 Aan S eearri i ieee 6 50 Overload Capability eee 12 7 AOP30 Diagnosis eeeeeeee 6 55 Overload Responses na 9 35 AOP30 Settings ce ceeeeeeeeeeees 6 51 P Battery Status 0 0 eeeeeteeeeenes 6 55 Parameterization Errors cceeeee 6 63 Commissioning Service 0 6 51 Parameterization Inhibit 6 59 Communication cccceeeeeeeeeees 6 55 Personnel Required Qualifications 1 1 Control Settings eceeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 51 Power Block Database Version ccceeeeeeeee 6 55 Type FX Replacing 11 6 Defining the operation screen 6 51 Type GX Replacing 11 8 Device Commissioning 06 6 51 Type HX Replacing 0 ceeeee 11 10 Display Settings cee 6 51 Type JX Replacing 11 14 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Index 3 Index 06 05 Power Connections ceeeee 4 13 Connecting the Motor and Power Cables E I E RE E EA at 4 15 Power Supply Internal 005 4 19 Preparatory Steps Mechanical Installation 0 2 3 5 PROFIBUS mri cid i ie 6 31 Bus Terminat
110. AMICS G150 4 20 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 8 External Supply of the Auxiliary Supply from a Secure Line Description An external auxiliary supply is always recommended if communication and closed loop control are to be independent of the supply system An external auxiliary supply is particularly recommended for low power lines susceptible to short time voltage dips or power failures With an external supply independent of the main supply warnings and fault messages may still be displayed on the operator panel and internal protection and monitoring devices if the main supply fails DANGER When the external auxiliary supply is connected dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit even when the main circuit breaker is open NOTICE An external auxiliary supply infeed must always be used if the automatic restart WEA function is to be used with integrated EMERGENCY STOP option L57 L59 L60 Otherwise the automatic restart function does not work Table 4 9 Connection options for the external auxiliary voltage depending on the selected options Cabinet unit option External supply of auxiliary voltage independent of the main supply 24 V DC 230 V AC 24 V DC 230 V AC terminal X40 terminal X9 terminal X40 terminal X9 with options L13 L26 230 V AC when gt 800 A terminal X40 With no further X options Version C L13 X
111. Actual power value smoothed r0082 1 FP6714 MELD_NAMUR VIK NAMUR signaling bit bar r3113 See Table 6 14 Alarm Alarm code 12132 FP8065 Fault Error code 12131 FP8060 SINAMICS G150 6 40 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation Status Word 1 Interface Mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 Table 6 12 Status word 1 Interface Mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 Bit Meaning Ready to power up Explanation Ready to power up Power supply on electronics initialized line contactor released if necessary pulses inhibited Not ready to power up BICO BO r0899 0 Ready to run Ready to run Voltage at line module i e line contactor closed if used field being built up Not ready to power up Cause No ON command has been issued BO r0899 1 Operation enabled Operation enabled Enable electronics and pulses then ramp up to active setpoint Operation inhibited BO r0899 2 Fault present Fault present The drive is faulty and is therefore out of service The drive switches to Power on inhibit once the fault has been acknowledged and the cause has been remedied The active faults are stored in the fault buffer No fault present No active fault in the fault buffer BO 12193 3 No OFF2 active coasting active OFF2 No OFF2 active Coasting active OFF2 An OFF2 command is present BO r0899 4 0 Fast stop active OFF3 No OF
112. Alarm An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive It does not result in the drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged Alarms are self acknowledging that is they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been eliminated Fault and Alarm Displays Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault alarm buffer along with time the error occurred and the time it was rectified The time stamp relates to the relative system time in milliseconds r0969 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 61 Operation 06 05 Current fault in 33463512 Drv Motor Overtemp F7011 Drv Motor Overtemp Fault value 00000000 00000000 hex Cause Motor temperature has reached the fault threshold parameterized in p0605 Remedy Back Ack Back Fig 6 30 Fault screen To acknowledge a stored fault choose F5 Ack Alarm memory Status Drv Motor Overtemp A7850 External warning 1 AlarmVal 00000000 00000000 hex A7910 Drv Motor Overtemp active Cause A7852 External warning 3 Motor temperature has exceeded the alarm threshold parameterized in p0604 The reaction set in p0610 is Delete Back Back A v Fig 6 31 Alarm screen SINAMICS G150 6 62 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 7 9 Saving the Parameters Permanently Description 6 7 10 If parameters have been changed using the operator panel confirm with OK in the Parameter Editor the new
113. Analog inputs characteristic value y2 e p4063 Analog inputs offset NOTE In the factory setting and after basic commissioning an input current of 20 mA is equal to the main setpoint 100 reference speed p2000 which has been set to the maximum speed p1082 Example Changing Analog Input 0 from Current to Voltage Input 10 to 10 V S5 0 V Current voltage switchover i Set current voltage selector to Voltage V p4056 0 4 Set analog input type 0 to 10 10 V v Fig 6 18 Example Setting analog input 0 NOTE The new analog input must then be stored on the CompactFlash card so that it is protected in the event of a power failure F3505 Fault Analog Input Cable Breakage Example 6 28 The fault is triggered when analog input type p4056 is set to 3 4 20 mA with open circuit monitoring and the input current of 2 mA has been undershot The fault value can be used to determine the analog input in question TM Analog I Wire Break FaultValue 0000000003 00000003 hex Cause T 31 Wire break analog input Component ID 3 Modul A60 4 Modul A61 option Remedy T 31 Check Cable Anal Input 0 Analog input 0 X521 1 2 1 Analog input 1 X521 3 4 Back A Fig 6 19 Fault screen SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 5 2 Motorized Potentiometer Description The digital motorized potentiometer enables you to set spe
114. Automatic Speed Controller Optimization Description Two motor identification options which are based on each other are available e Standstill measurement with p1910 motor identification e Rotating measurement with p1960 speed controller optimization These can be selected more easily via p1900 p1900 2 selects the standstill measurement motor not rotating p1900 1 also activates the rotating measurement p1900 1 sets p1910 1 and p1960 in accordance with the current control type p1300 Parameter p1960 is set depending on p1300 e p1960 1 when p1300 20 or 22 e p1960 2 when p1300 21 or 23 Motor identification is not started until all the enable signals are set and the next switch on command is issued This is indicated using appropriate alarms A07991 for the standstill measurement and A07980 for the rotating measurement When the standstill measurement is complete the drive switches itself off automatically and p1910 is automatically reset to 0 To start the rotating measurement the drive has to be switched on again The drive also switches itself off automatically when this measurement is complete and p1960 and p1900 is reset to 0 The ON command must be canceled The measurements can be aborted by canceling the enable signals e g OFF or by resetting the parameters NOTE To set the new controller setting permanently the data must be saved with p0977 or p0971 on the non volatile CompactFlash card
115. BI 722 0 CO without index CO with index Index 0 1 Cl Cl 2 3 Fig 6 5 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Interconnecting signals using BICO technology Operation 06 05 NOTE A signal source BO can be connected to any number of signal sinks BI A signal sink BI can only ever be connected to one signal source BO The BICO parameter interconnection can be implemented in different command data sets CDS The different interconnections are activated by switching data sets Interconnections across drive objects are also possible Internal Encoding of the Binector Connector Output Parameters The internal codes are needed for example in order to write BICO input parameters via PROFIBUS Parameter number Index number Bit 31 ees 16 15 10 9 ts 0 0 Device e g CU320 63 Separate object Example of signal sources 0000 0011 1110 1001 bin 1111 11 bin 00 0000 0010 bin 1001da o3 Jee Bee 03E9 FC02 hex gt CO 1001 2 0000 0000 0000 0001 bin 0000 00 bin 00 0000 0000 bin 0001 0000 hex gt fixed 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 0000 00 bin 00 0000 0000 bin 0000 0000 hex gt fixed 0 Fig 6 6 Internal encoding of the binector connector output parameters Example 1 Interconnection of digital signals Suppose you want to operate a drive via terminals DI 0 and DI 1 on the control unit using jog 1 and jog 2 BO Binector output
116. Board SA Wye a if YON lol 6 Ube ee 1 alle O gl O e l r ie Pe ooooL Oo0006 Oooo e f w ar 8 er TE o Oo G o f ey 0 Nae al a D aya E Fig 11 11 Replacing the control interface board type JX ta SINAMICS G150 11 24 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the fan e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 11 1 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the electronics slide in unit 2 screws When removing the electronics slide in unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 below CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables 5 The control interface board can then be removed from the electronics slide in unit Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tighte
117. DC link undervoltage If a speed threshold see Fig 9 3 lt 2 gt set with parameter p1257 p1297 is undershot when Vdc_min control is active the drive is switched off with F7405 drive kinetic buffering minimum speed undershot If a shutdown with undervoltage in the DC link F30003 occurs without the drive coming to a standstill despite the fact that Vdc_min control is active the controller may have to be optimized via dynamic factor p1247 p1287 Increasing the dynamic factor in p1247 p1287 causes the controller to intervene more quickly The default setting for this parameter however should be suitable for most applications Parameter P1256 1 p1296 can be used to activate time monitoring for kinetic buffering The monitoring time can be set in parameter p1255 p1295 If buffering i e the power failure lasts longer than the time set here the drive is switched off with fault F7406 drive maximum duration for kinetic buffering exceeded The standard fault reaction for this fault is OFF3 which means that this function can be used for controlled drive deceleration in the event of a power failure In this case excess regenerative energy can only be dissipated via an additional braking resistor SINAMICS G150 9 10 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions Description of Vdc_max Control Fig 9 4 IV ord V controller active In qsetp OA Switch on
118. E To ensure that you can continue with basic commissioning you must confirm each parameter in this screen individually SINAMICS G150 Help A Change Continue E F2 m M F5 Fig 5 33 Selecting the motor type and entering the motor data 5 34 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Basic Commissioning Entering the Encoder Data if available Enc commissioning Back c 0 p0400 Enc type selection 9999 User def p0404 Enc configuration 00200008H p0405 Enc sq wave A B 00000009H p0408 Encoder pulse No 1024 Help A v Change Continue Fig 5 34 Entering the encoder data if available If the SMC30 encoder evaluation module is connected this is recognized by the AOP30 and a screen is displayed in which you can enter the encoder data Change the values with lt F4 gt Confirm the values with lt F5 gt The bit settings for p0404 indicate the following Bit Meaning Value 0 Value 1 20 Voltage level5V No Yes 21 Voltage level 24 V No Yes The bit settings for p0404 indicate the following Bit Meaning Value 0 Value 1 0 Signal Unipolar Bipolar 1 Level HTL TTL 2 Track monitoring None A B lt gt A B 3 Zero pulse 24 V unip As A B track NOTE In the factory setting an HTL encoder is bipolar with 1024 pulses per revolution and a 24 V power supply Chapter 4 Electrical Installation contains two connection examples for HTL and TTL encoders CAUTION Once the encoder has been co
119. E 2 4 2 3 2 Version Guiadceai dein Aaa arg iaa a a a i ain 2 8 2 4 Wiring FPrneiple saisie ien a AR E EA bieassiaidetieaes 2 9 2 5 Type Plate ae cobs eoettedsagedenedby coh deoeetedsagtecart RAEE 2 13 3 Mechanical Installation 3 1 3 1 Chapter Contenti aie hd einen tetas eta ads 3 1 3 2 Transportation ANd Storage cece eeeene eee eeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 3 2 3 3 Installation sc acek ee er itt a etait a ete late etn 3 4 3 3 1 Mechanical Installation Checklist eee cceeeeeeeeeneeceeneeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeseeaeeesneeeeeenaeeeenenaeees 3 4 3 3 2 Preparatory Steps ssc iene washes Hades a eaaa a eid E e A aa 3 5 3 3 3 Ee a EE TEE EE A AA EET 3 6 3 3 4 Mechanically connecting separately shipped transport units 0 eee teen eeteereeees 3 6 3 3 5 Fitting Additional Canopies Option M21 or Hoods Option M23 M54 eee 3 7 3 3 6 Cable Entry from Above Option M13 Motor Connection from Above Option M78 3 10 4 Electrical Installation 4 1 4 1 Chapter Content n20n oa Reese cen ie Mee et ae Re Sette 4 1 4 2 Electrical Installation Checklist ccecccceceeceeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeseseceaeaeeeeeeeseneesaees 4 2 4 3 Important Safety Precautions 0 c ce eceeeee sence eeeeneeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 4 6 4 4 Introduction to EMC s 2 2 cis tere cen eetiri tages antes Geass eats teens 4 7 4 5 EMC Compliant Installation 0 0 cccccceceececceceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeesesseneeeeeereesensnsae
120. F3 active Coasting active OFF3 An OFF3 command is present BO r0899 5 Power on inhibit Power on inhibit A restart is only possible through OFF1 followed by ON No power up inhibit Power up is possible BO r0899 6 Alarm present Alarm present The drive is operational again No acknowledgement necessary The active alarms are stored in the alarm buffer No alarm present No active alarm is present in the alarm buffer BO 12139 7 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 41 Operation 06 05 Bit Meaning Explanation BICO 1 Setpoint actual value monitoring within tolerance bandwidth Actual value within a tolerance bandwidth dynamic Speed setpoint actual value overshoot or shortfall permitted for t lt tmax 8 deviation within tolerance N Nsetpt BO r2197 7 bandwidth f fsetpt etc tmax can be parameterized 0 Setpoint actual value monitoring not within tolerance band 1_ Control from the PLC 9 Control requested for PLC BO r0899 9 A 1 is always present 0 Local operation i 1 for n comparison value reached or exceeded f or n comparison value p BO r2199 1 reached or exceeded 0 for n comparison value not reached 10 Note The message is parameterized as follows p2141 Threshold value p2142 Hysteresis imi M or P limit not reached 11 l M or P limit not reac
121. FS p0100 Mot type IEC NEMA p0100 0 F Motor data Back p0304 Mot U_rated 400 Veff p0304 Mot U_rated 400 Veff U_rated p0305 Mot I_rated p0307 Mot P_rated p0308 Mot CosPhi_rated Help A A IEC 50 Hz kW 1 NEMA 60 Hz hp Cancel 0 870 Change 400 SEI 405 00 Aeff 235 00 kW OK Hee y Motor data Back p0308YMot CosPhi_rated p0310 Mot f_rated p0311 Mot n_rated c 0 0 870 50 00 Hz 1485 0 rp m p0335vMotor cooling type 0 Non ventila Dialog screen for selecting the line frequency and motor data in kW or hp Change the values with lt F4 gt Confirm the values with lt F5 gt The following is defined 0 line frequency 50 Hz motor data in kW 1 line frequency 60 Hz motor data in hp To select the setting options choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To abort the motor selection choose lt F4 gt To confirm the settings choose lt F5 gt Entering motor data specified on the type plate Change the values with lt F4 gt A screen is displayed in which you can enter the relevant values To return to the previous dialog screen choose lt back gt When you set the values they must each be confirmed with lt F5 gt A checkmark Vv next to the parameter number indicates that the corresponding value has been confirmed Once you have set and confirmed all the values press lt F5 gt to continue with basic commissioning NOT
122. Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 70 95 120 AWG MCM 000 4 0 300 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x 150 2x 150 2x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2 x 400 2 x 400 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 225 300 300 Power block type FX GX GX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 400 x 2000 x600 400x2000x600 400 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 225 2 3NE1 227 2 3NE1 230 2 Rated current A 200 250 315 Size to DIN 43 620 1 1 1 1 1 L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 30 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Table 12 31 Version C 660 V 690 V 3AC part 3 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1G
123. GENCY OFF Category 0 Option Hood to Increase the Degree of LOY E E T 4 37 Protection to IP23 IP54 3 9 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1 Option Installation Device 11 4 59 E E E E 4 38 Insulation Monitor Option L87 4 47 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1 Option J LOO E E envi 4 39 Jogo t lene a aa 6 58 Encoder Data Set 6 11 JOG iC cite E E ee 6 58 Entering Motor Data eee 5 33 EU Declaration of Conformity 1 2 KdO witha HOAs 4 48 EU Manufacturer s Declaration 1 2 Kinetic Buffering 9 9 Extended Braking Control 008 9 30 SINAMICS G150 Index 2 Operating Instructions 06 05 Index L Drive Commissioning 6 51 LeVine led E E 4 30 Fault Memory Alarm Memory 6 50 E EE A E A E TET 4 31 F ert ieii 6 50 LV T E E T E E A ET 4 33 Keyboard oeseri edisi 6 55 L26 AAE digs E T 4 34 Language switch eeeeee 6 54 E a E E E E ee dit 4 35 LED TeStsiuctes acetic aon 6 55 LOO TAE E A E T 4 36 Parameterization c eeeeeeeees 6 49 Ost E E E huge dit 4 36 Reset AOP Settings eee 6 54 LS E A E T 4 37 Set Date oeni irinin ieii 6 54 Ea PA int tan T NEER 4 38 Set MMG A 6 54 a a EEVA E TAA E ERS 4 39 Software Version 6 55 LO lein a AR 4 40 SUCE oae E 6 47 LOZ a RR 4 40 Minimum cable lengths 4 14 LOS ka a a a deee 4 45 Minimum Speed cccceceeeeseeceeeeees 7 5 Ea en teat aden taht 4 45 Monitoring Functions 9 34 LOO TE T E ete adi eaten 4 45
124. H32 6CA0 1GH33 3CA0 1GH34 1CA0 Rated motor output kW 250 315 400 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 280 353 436 Rated output current A 260 330 410 Base load current I A 250 320 400 Base load current I A 233 280 367 Maximum output frequency 2 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 5 0 6 1 8 1 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 69 73 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2x 120 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 4 0 2 x 300 2 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 4x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 600 2 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 2 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x70 2x95 2x 120 AWG MCM 2 x 000 2 x 4 0 2 x 300 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 300 300 670 Power block type GX GX HX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 400 x 2000 x600 400x2000x600 600 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 331 2 3NE1 334 2 3NE1 334 2 Rated current A 350 500 500 Size to DIN 43 620 1 2 2 2 1 L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12
125. INAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 12 Thermistor Motor Protection Unit Option L83 L84 Description This option includes the thermistor motor protection unit with PTB approval for PTC thermistor sensors PTC resistor type A for warning and shutdown The power supply for the thermistor motor protection unit is provided inside the converter where the evaluation is also performed Option L83 triggers the external alarm 1 A7850 if a fault occurs Option L84 triggers the external fault 1 F7860 if a fault occurs Connection Table 4 34 F127 F125 connection for thermistor motor protection unit Equipment designation Functional description F127 T1 T2 Thermistor motor protection warning F125 T1 T2 Thermistor motor protection shutdown The PTC thermistor sensors are connected directly to terminals T1 and T2 of the evaluation unit Table 4 35 Maximal line length for the sensor circuit Line cross section in mm Line length in m 2 5 2 x 2800 1 5 2 x 1500 0 5 2 x 500 Diagnostics 4 10 13 Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on A120 A121 are described in Additional Operating Instructions in the operating manual PT100 Evaluation Unit Option L86 Description NOTE The PT100 evaluation unit and the parameters for the measurement channels are described in Additional Opera
126. ISO 9001 Our worldwide sales and service network offers our customers individual consultations provides support with planning and design and offers a range of training courses For detailed contact information and the current link to our Internet pages see 10 3 Design The SINAMICS G150 cabinet units are characterized by their compact modular and service friendly design A wide range of electrical and mechanical components enable the drive system to be optimized for the appropriate requirements Two cabinet unit versions are available depending on the options that are chosen SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 2 3 Device Overview 06 05 2 3 1 Version A All the required power supply connection components such as the main circuit breaker circuit breakers main contactor line fuses radio interference suppression filter motor components and additional protection and monitoring devices can be installed as required The cabinet unit comprises up to four cabinet panels with a total width of between 800 and 3200 mm depending on the output Line reactor L1 Operator panel Power Module U1 Emergency off Control Unit CU320 A10 Main circuit breaker Q1 Door interlock MEREN EE ba RAE Customer terminal block A60 a Ventilation grilles gt depending on degree of protection Line connection X1 Motor connection X2 Fig
127. Instructions in the documentation folder e EU declaration of conformity e Certificate of compliance with order e EU manufacturer s declaration SINAMICS G150 1 2 Operating Instructions 06 05 Safety Information 1 2 Safety and Operating Instructions DANGER rN This equipment is used in industrial high voltage installations During operation this equipment contains rotating and live bare parts For this reason they could cause severe injury or significant material damage if the required covers are removed if they are used or operated incorrectly or have not been properly maintained When the machines are used in non industrial areas the installation location must be protected against unauthorized access protective fencing appropriate signs Requirements Those responsible for protecting the plant must ensure the following e The basic planning work for the plant and the transport assembly installation commissioning maintenance and repair work is carried out by qualified personnel and or checked by experts responsible e The operating manual and machine documentation are always available e The technical data and specifications regarding the applicable installation connection environmental and operating conditions are always observed e The plant specific assembly and safety guidelines are observed and personal protection equipment is used e Unqualified personnel are forbidden from using these machi
128. M31 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Parameter Macros 1 1 Parameter Macros 06 05 Parameter macro p1000 PROFIBUS 100001 This macro is used to set PROFIBUS as the setpoint source Table 6 Parameter macro p1000 PROFIBUS Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r2050 1 PROFIBUS PZD2 Vector p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector p1075 Suppl setpoint Vector 0 Vector p1076 Additional setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector Parameter macro p1000 Al0 TM31 100002 This macro is used to set analog input 0 on customer terminal block TM31 as the setpoint source Table 7 Parameter macro p1000 AIO TM31 Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r4055 AIO TM31 TM31 p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 TM31 p1075 Suppl setpoint Vector 0 TM31 p1076 Additional setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 TM31 Parameter macro p1000 motorized potentiometer 100003 This macro is used to set the motorized potentiometer as the setpoint source Table 8 Parameter macro p1000 motorized potentiometer Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r1050 Motorized potentiometer Vector p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector p1075 S
129. Motor changeover 9 17 LO Tacit iat wade hen ahaa 4 47 Motor Data Set 6 11 Load Monitoring 9 32 Motor Identification cece 9 3 Loading the Database Operator Panel 11 Motorized Potentiometer 6 29 44 N Loading the Firmware Operator Panel 11 NAMUR 44 Outgoing Section for External Auxiliary LOCAL REMOTE Key seeen 6 56 Equipment Option BO3 4 57 LOW overload ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettees 12 7 Separate 24 V DC Power Supply Option M BO2 hide hierar anette 4 57 MUS asset e ins ee EET 3 10 NAMUR signaling bit bar 6 44 Me Tornien iets aie tieineieti as 3 8 NAMUR Terminal Block Option BOO 4 55 Morana aa a tiers 3 9 0 MO arara S 3 9 ORF ROY ohra A 6 57 Moa e A 3 10 ON KEY oirn iie atonal 6 57 Main Circuit Breaker incl Fuses Option On Site Requirements 0 0cee 3 5 BS EE A T E 4 34 Opening and closing the disconnect switch Main Contactor Option L13 O O Settee tele atte atau ies ESE teien eran 4 14 Maintenance ceccceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneees 11 2 Operating Hours Counter 9 25 Maintenance and Servicing 00 11 1 Operating Instructions eee 1 3 MDS Operation s ieia teaa aaa 6 1 COPYING eara EAT 6 13 Operation Screen 6 48 MDS Motor Data Set ee 6 11 Operator Input Inhibit 0 ee 6 59 Mechanical Installation Operator Panel ccceceeeeeeeeeeees 5 31 CeCKLiStins sacrecsicdaccadeisacdeds oahaceaeeeants 3 4 OVEIVIOW E
130. NAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 5 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 3 A 4 6 Important Safety Precautions WARNING The cabinet units are operated with high voltages All connection procedures must be carried out with the cabinet de energized All work on the units must be carried out by trained personnel only Death serious injury or substantial material damage can result if these warnings are not taken into account Work on an open device must be carried out with extreme caution because external supply voltages may be present The power and control terminals may be live even when the motor is not running Dangerously high voltage levels are still present in the cabinet up to five minutes after it has been disconnected due to the DC link capacitors For this reason the cabinet should not be opened until after a reasonable period of time has elapsed Reforming the DC link capacitors The storage period should not exceed two years If the device is stored for more than two years the DC link capacitors of the devices must be reformed during commissioning The reforming procedure is described in Maintenance and Servicing The operator is responsible for ensuring that the motor converter and other devices are installed and connected in accordance with the recognized technical rules in the country of installation and applicable regional guidelines Special attention should be paid to cable dimensioning fuses gr
131. NOTE The voltage boost affects all V f characteristics p1300 from 0 to 6 IMPORTANT If the voltage boost value is too high this can result in a thermal overload of the motor winding SINAMICS G150 7 12 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control Permanent Voltage Boost p1310 The voltage boost is active across the entire frequency range whereby the value decreases continuously at higher frequencies V f linear r0071 Va p0304 V permanent fa f max p0310 p1082 no of pole pairs V p0305 rated motor current x permanent r0395 current stator resistance x p1310 permanent voltage boost Fig 7 6 Permanent voltage boost example p1300 0 and p1311 0 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 13 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Voltage Boost at Acceleration p1311 The voltage boost is only active during acceleration braking VA V f linear Vv rodri T S EL NNN ANN accelerate NI f max p1082 no of Vicceleration P0305 rated motor current x pole pairs r0395 current stator resistance x p1311 voltage at acceleration Fig 7 7 Voltage boost at acceleration example p1300 0 and p1310 0 Function Diagram FD 1665 6300 Parameters e p0305 Rated motor current e 10395 Stator resistance actual e p1310 Voltage boost permanent e p1311 Voltage boost at acceleration e 11315 Voltage b
132. O DriveObject The following DOs are available in the G150 e CU General parameters for the electronics module CU320 e Vector Drive control e T M31 Terminal module TM31 Parameters with identical functions may exist with the same parameter number in more than one DO e g p0002 The AOP30 is used for operating devices that comprise more than one drive in this respect a regulated infeed is also a drive so that attention is focused on one drive i e the current drive You can switch between the drives either in the operation screen or in the main menu The corresponding function key is labeled Drive This drive determines the following e Operation screen e Fault and alarm displays e Parameterization Depending on your requirements you can choose between two AOP display types 1 All parameters All the parameters for the current drive See above the CU and all the other device DOs are displayed in a list as with older drives The DO to which the parameter currently selected belongs inverted is displayed in curly brackets in the top left of the screen You can also select parameters for just one function group from this complete list 2 DO selection In this display you can pre select a DO so that only the parameters for this DO are listed This display is indicated by the text DO next to the DO designator in curly brackets The expert list in STARTER is only displayed in the DO view In both cases
133. O normally open contact NC normally closed contact COM mid position contact Max connectable cross section 4 mm AWG 10 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 34 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 5 EMERGENCY OFF Button Option L45 Description The EMERGENCY OFF button with protective collar is integrated in the door of the cabinet unit The contacts of the button are connected to terminal block X120 Category 0 and 1 EMERGENCY OFF functions can be activated in conjunction with options L57 L59 and L60 A braking unit may be necessary to achieve the required shutdown times NOTE When the EMERGENCY OFF button is pressed the motor coasts to a standstill and the main motor voltage is disconnected to EN 60204 1 VDE 0113 Auxiliary voltages e g for separately driven fans or anti condensation heating may still be present Voltage is also present within certain sections of the converter e g the closed loop control or any auxiliary equipment If all the voltages have to be completely disconnected the EMERGENCY OFF button must be integrated in a protection concept which must be implemented on the system side For this purpose an NC contact is installed at terminal X120 Connection Table 4 23 Terminal block X120 checkback contact EMERGENCY OFF button in cabinet door Terminal Designation 1 Technical specifications 1 NC Checkback contacts of EMERGENCY OFF button in 2 NC ca
134. Operating Instructions Edition 06 2005 Converter Cabinet Units SIEMENS SINAMICS G150 75 kW to 1500 kW SIEMENS SINAMICS G150 Version A and C Operating Instructions User Documentation Valid for Converter type SINAMICS G150 Edition 06 05 Control version V2 3 Safety Information 1 Device Overview 2 Mechanical Installation 3 Electrical Installation 4 Commissioning 5 Operation 6 Setpoint Channel and 7 Closed Loop Control Output Terminals 8 Functions Monitoring 9 and Protective Functions Diagnosis Faults and 4 0 Alarms Maintenance and 11 Servicing Technical Data 12 List of Abbreviations Index Parameter Macros 06 05 Contents For further information please visit us at http Awww ad siemens de The reproduction transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written permission Offenders will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved Siemens AG 2005 All rights reserved We have checked the contents of this document for agreement with the hardware and software described Nonetheless differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical However the data in this manual is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions We are thankful f
135. Output frequency r0066 Hz Reference frequency Output voltage r0072 UACT V p2001 Control factor r0074 Reference control factor Torque producing actual current r0078 A p2002 Actual torque r0080 Nm p2003 For further diagnostic purposes Fixed speed setpoint effective 11024 rpm p2000 Motorized potentiometer after the ramp r1050 rpm p2000 function generator Resulting speed setpoint r1119 rpm p2000 Speed controller output 11508 Nm p2003 component of speed controller 11482 Nm p2003 PROFIBUS setpoint r2050 rpm p2000 Scalings for Vector Object Table 6 16 Scalings for vector object Size Scaling parameter Default for quick commissioning Reference speed 100 p2000 p2000 Maximum speed p1082 Reference voltage 100 p2001 p2001 1000 V Reference current 100 p2002 p2002 Current limit 00640 Reference torque 100 p2003 p2003 2 x rated motor torque Reference power 100 12004 12004 p2003 Reference frequency 100 o p2000 0 Reference control factor 100 Maximum output voltage without overload Reference flux 100 Rated motor flux Reference temperature 100 100 C SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 53 Operation 06 05 TM31 Object Table 6 17 List of signals for the operation screen TM31 object Signal Parameter Unit Scaling 100 Analog input 0 V mA r4052 0 V mA V 100 V mA 100 mA Analog input 1 V
136. PCS7 telegram Depending on the setting in p0922 the interface mode of the control and status word is automatically set p0922 1 352 999 STW 1 ZSW 1 Interface Mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 p0922 20 STW 1 ZSW 1 Interface Mode PROFIdrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 Free telegrams p0922 999 gt Speed control 2 words Send and receive telegrams can be configured as required by using BICO technology to interconnect the send and receive words The default process data assigned under a is retained during the switchover to p0922 999 although it can be changed or supplemented at any time To maintain compliance with the PROF Idrive profile however the following assignments should be retained Interconnect PZD receive word 1 as control word 1 CTW 1 Interconnect PZD send word 1 as status word 1 STW 1 For more information about possible interconnections see function diagrams FP2460 to FP2460 and the simplified diagrams 620 to 622 Structure of the Telegrams Table 6 7 Structure of the telegrams Telegr PZD1 PZD2 PZD 3 PZD 4 PZD 5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD 8 PZD 9 PZD 10 1 CTW 1 N_setp STW 1 N_act 20 CTW 1 N_setp STW 1 N_act_GLATT la_act_GLATT M_act_GLATT P_act_GLATT MELD_NAMUR 352 CTW1 N_setp PCS7_3 PCS7_4 PCS7_5 PCS7 6 STW 1 N_act_GLATT la_act_GLATT M_act_GLATT WARN CODE FAULT CODE 999 CTW1 free free free free
137. PT100 resistors Terminals Designation Technical specifications T11 T13 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 1 group 1 T21 T23 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 2 group 1 T31 T33 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 3 group 1 T41 T43 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 1 group 2 T51 T53 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 2 group 2 T61 T63 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 3 group 2 51 52 54 90 240 V AC DC relay output limit value group 1 reached two way contact 61 62 64 90 240 V AC DC relay output limit value group 2 reached two way contact Ground _ OUT 1 0 4 20 mA U1 OUT 1 0 2 10V i OUT 1 analog output Out 1 sensor group 1 Ground _ OUT 2 0 4 20 mA U2 OUT 2 0 2 10V 12 OUT 2 analog output Out 2 sensor group 2 Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 Diagnostics 4 46 Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on A140 are described in Additional Operating Instructions in the operating manual SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 14 Insulation Monitor Option L87 Description This device monitors the complete electrically connected circuit for insulation faults The insulation resistance as well as all the insulation faults that occur in the DC link and on the motor side of the cabinet are detected Two respons
138. Parameter Macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO BI PROFIBUS send status p2080 10 word 1 Vector r2199 1 Comparison value reached Vector Bl PROFIBUS send status p2080 1 1 word 1 Vector 11407 7 M I P limiting not active Vector BI PROFIBUS send status p2080 12 word 1 Vector 0 Vector Bl PROFIBUS send status No motor overtemperature p2080 13 word 1 Vector r2129 14 alarm Vector BI PROFIBUS send status p2080 14 word 1 Vector r2197 3 Clockwise Vector Bl PROFIBUS send status No alarm therm overload p2080 15 word 1 Vector r2129 15 power section Vector PROFIBUS invert status p2088 word Vector B800h Vector Selecting fault alarm code Alarm motor p2128 14 for trigger Vector 7910 overtemperature Vector Selecting fault alarm code Alarm therm overload p2128 15 for trigger Vector 5000 power section Vector Time constant revolutions p2153 actual value filter Vector 20 ms Vector Smoothing time constant p4053 0 analog inputs TM31 TM31 0 ms TM31 Smoothing time constant p4053 1 analog inputs TM31 TM31 TM31 p4056 0 Analog inputs type TM31 2 Current 0 20 mA TM31 p4056 1 Analog inputs type TM31 2 Current 0 20 mA TM31 p4076 0 Analog outputs type TM31 O Current 0 20 mA TM31 p4076 1 Analog outputs type TM31 0 Current 0 20 mA TM31 p4071 0 Signal analog output 0 TM31 r0063 Actual speed smoothed TM31 Absolute current actual p4071 1 Signal analog o
139. SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 31 Operation 06 05 PROFIBUS Connection The PROFIBUS is connected by means of a 9 pin Sub D socket X126 The connections are electrically isolated Table 6 4 X126 PROFIBUS connection Pin Signal name Meaning Range 1 SHIELD Ground connection 2 M24_ SERV Power supply for teleservice ground OV 3 RxD TxD P Receive transmit data P B B RS485 4 CNTR P Control signal TTL 5 DGND PROFIBUS data reference potential C C 6 VP Supply voltage plus 5V 10 7 P24 SERV Power supply for teleservice P 24 V 24 V 20 4 V 28 8 V 8 RxD TxD N Receive transmit data N A A RS485 9 Not used Connectors The cables must be connected via PROFIBUS connectors because they contain terminating resistors VA PROFIBUS plug without PROFIBUS plug with PG PC connection PG PC connection 6ES7972 0BA41 0XA0 6ES7972 0BB41 0XA0 Fig 6 23 PROFIBUS connectors Bus Terminating Resistor The bus terminating resistor must be switched on or off depending on its position in the bus otherwise the data will not be transmitted properly Principle the terminating resistors must only be switched on at both ends of the bus line the resistors must be switched off at all other connectors The cable shield must be connected at both ends over large surface area contacts SINAMICS G150 6 32 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation First bu
140. Setpoint Addition Description The supplementary setpoint can be used to enter correction values from higher level closed loop controls This can be implemented using the summing point of the main supplementary setpoint in the setpoint channel Both variables are imported simultaneously via two separate or one setpoint source and added in the setpoint channel Function Diagram FD 3030 Parameters SINAMICS G150 p1070 p1071 11073 p1075 p1076 11077 r1078 Operating Instructions Main setpoint Main setpoint scaling Main setpoint effective Suppl setpoint Supplementary setpoint scaling Supplementary setpoint effective Total setpoint effective 7 3 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 7 2 2 Direction of Rotation Changeover Description If an incorrect phase sequence was connected when the cables were installed and the phase sequence cannot be corrected by swapping the motor cables it can be corrected by means of a negative command value or by parameterizing the cabinet unit thereby enabling the direction to be reversed This is mainly used for operating the drive in both directions of rotation Requirements Direction of rotation changeover is triggered e via PROFIBUS by means of control word 1 bit 11 e via the cabinet operator panel LOCAL mode with the direction of rotation changeover key NOTE Only one direction of rotation is enabled in the factory setting Function Diagr
141. T This function should only be activated if the data sheet for equivalent circuit diagram data is available If any data is missing an error message will be output when the system attempts to load the drive project to the target system SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 17 Commissioning 06 05 Configuring the Motor and Entering Equivalent Circuit Diagram Data Configuration Drive_unit_0 Equivalent circuit diagram data Control structure MDrive setting lM Motor Motor data Calculation of the Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the setp Drive functions IPROFIBUS proces Fig 5 18 Entering equivalent diagram data 19 If necessary enter the equivalent circuit diagram data 20 Click Continue gt SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Calculating the Motor Controller Data WDrive unit Options Control structure W Drive setting Motor M Motor data CJ Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the setp Drive functions PROFIBUS proces Configuration Drive_unit_0 Calculation of the motor controller data Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Important paramete a x Calculation of the motor controller data No calculation Complete calculation without equiv circuit diagram date Complete calculation with equiv circuit diagram data
142. T2 for shutdown see Section 4 10 12 protection unit shutdown 25 Option L86 The resistor thermometers must be connected to O O PT100 evaluation unit A140 for the PT100 evaluation The two evaluation unit wire or three wire system can be used here to connect the PT100 sensors The sensors are divided into two groups see Section 4 10 13 This must be taken into account when the evaluation is performed factory setting 26 Option L87 The insulation monitor can only be operated with the O 0O Insulation insulated neutral system Only one insulation monitor monitoring may be used in one electrically connected network For system side control the signaling relays must be connected accordingly or with individual drives the cabinet unit is fed via a converter transformer assigned to the cabinet unit integrated in the cabinet unit warning train see Section 4 10 14 Point 9 must also be taken into account here Before the cabinet is operated from an ungrounded supply IT supply the connection bracket for the basic interference suppression device must be removed see Section 4 7 6 Required Tools To install the connections you will require e Spanner or socket spanner w f 10 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 13 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 16 17 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 18 19 e Hexagon socket spanner size 8 e Torque spanner max 50 Nm e Screwdriver size 2 e Screwdriver Torx T20 e Screwdriver Torx T30 SI
143. TM31 DI4 TM31 Fixed setpoint selection bit p1021 1 Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1035 MOP raise Vector r4022 1 TM31 DI1 TM31 p1036 MOP lower Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1055 Jog bit 0 Vector 0 p1056 Jog bit 1 Vector 0 p1113 Direction reversal Vector r4022 6 TM31 DIG TM31 p1140 Enable RFG Vector 1 p1141 Start RFG Vector 1 p1142 Enable speed setpoint Vector 1 p2103 1 acknowledge faults Vector 0 p2104 a acknowledge faults Vector r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p2106 External fault 1 Vector r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p2107 External fault 2 Vector 1 p2112 External alarm 1 Vector r0722 0 CU DIO CU p2116 External alarm 2 Vector 1 p0738 DI DO8 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU 0 not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output CU Parameter Macros 8 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Parameter Macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0739 DI DO9 CU 1 CU p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 0 not inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 CU p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 CU p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 not inverted p0728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU 1 CU p0741 DI DO11 CU 1 CU p0748 1 1 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 not inverted p0728 11 Set DI DO11 input or output CU 1 CU p0742 DI DO12 CU 1 CU p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 C
144. U 0 not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 CU p0743 DI DO13 CU r0899 6 Power on inhibit Vector p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 1 inverted p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 CU p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 CU p0745 DI DO15 CU 12138 7 Acknowledge fault Vector p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU 0 not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU 1 CU p2103 1 acknowledge faults TM31 p2104 2 acknowledge faults TM31 r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p4031 DO1 TM31 r2139 3 Vector p4038 DO8 TM31 r0899 0 Ready to power up Vector p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 1 TM31 p4039 DO9 TM31 Factory setting p4028 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4040 DO10 TM31 Factory setting p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4041 DO11 TM31 Factory setting p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 Factory setting p2103 17 acknowledge faults A_INF 0 p2104 2 acknowledge faults A_INF r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Parameter Macros 9 Parameter Macros 06 05 Parameter macro p0700 S G150 PROF Idrive NAMUR 70010 With this macro the PROF Idrive NAMUR interface is pre set as default as command
145. U 0 not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output CU Parameter Macros 6 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Parameter Macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0739 DI DO9 CU 1 CU p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 0 not inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 CU p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 CU p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 not inverted p0728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU 1 CU p0741 DI DO11 CU 1 CU p0748 1 1 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 not inverted p0728 11 Set DI DO11 input or output CU 1 CU p0742 DI DO12 CU 1 CU p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 CU p0743 DI DO13 CU r0899 6 Power on inhibit Vector p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 1 inverted p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 CU p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 CU p0745 DI DO15 CU 12138 7 Acknowledge fault Vector p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU 0 not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU 1 CU p2103 1 acknowledge faults TM31 p2104 2 acknowledge faults TM31 r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p4031 DO1 TM31 r2139 3 Vector p4038 DO8 TM31 r0899 0 Ready to power up Vec
146. UTION A ventilation clearance of 200 m must be maintained on all sides of the braking resistor with ventilation grilles SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation Table 4 30 Braking resistor dimensions Unit 25 kW resistor option L61 50 kW resistor option L62 Length mm 740 810 Width mm 485 485 Height mm 605 1325 HH _ 11 T2 screw _ terminal 2 5 mm M12 wz wal 601 3 T 177 57 M50 HHH hgg 2 x thread bolts Ground 150 le M8 connection M8 Eats 79 66 0 710 740 Fig 4 9 Dimension drawing for braking resistor 25 kW 810 1321 2 x thread bolts A M10 HH HFH T1 T2 screw terminal 2 5 mm L 93 112 70 e al ET Ground connection M10 710 740 Tt 52 5 380 52 5 Fig 4 10 Dimension drawing for braking resistor 50 kW SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 41 Electrical Installation 06 05 Connecting the Braking Resistor WARNING AN The cables must only be connected to terminal block X5 when the cabinet unit is s
147. Unit Version C 380 V 480 V 3AC ce ceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeesaeeeeeeesaeenaes 12 13 12 3 3 Cabinet Unit Version A 500 V 600 V 3AC ce ceecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseaeenaes 12 16 12 3 4 Cabinet Unit Version C 500 V 600 V 3AC ce ceecceeeeeeeereeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeesaeeeeeeesaeenaes 12 20 12 3 5 Cabinet Unit Version A 660 V 690 V 3AC 0 0 eeccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeneeeeaeeeneeesiaeenees 12 23 12 3 6 Cabinet Unit Version C 660 V 690 V 3AC ce ceecceceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeesaeseeeeestaeeeneeeeaeenaes 12 29 SINAMICS G150 viii Operating Instructions Safety Information 1 1 1 Definitions and Warning Information Qualified Personnel gt For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels a qualified person is someone who is familiar with the installation mounting start up operation and maintenance of the product He or she must have the following qualifications e Trained or authorized to energize de energize ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures e Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety procedures e First aid training DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death serious injury or substantial damage to property WARNING Indicates an imminently hazardous situation wh
148. V 690 V 3AC part 5 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GH38 1AA0 2GH41 1AA0 2GH41 4AA0 Rated motor output kW 800 1000 1350 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 852 1116 1424 Rated output current A 810 1070 1360 Base load current 7 A 790 1036 1314 Base load current In A 724 950 1216 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 14 7 21 6 27 0 Cooling air requirement m s 1 48 1 56 2 96 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 72 75 75 78 75 78 Line connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Recommended DIN VDE mm 4x 150 2 x 240 3 x 185 AWG MCM 4 x 400 2 x 600 3 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 8 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 8 x 600 4 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 4 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Recommended DIN VDE mm 3x185 2x 185 3 x 150 AWG MCM 3 x 500 2 x 500 3 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 6 x 240 4x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 6 x 600 4 x 600 6 x 600 Fastening screw M12 3 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes PE conductor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Fastening screw M12 18 holes M12 2 holes M12 18 holes Approx weight standard version kg 1360 1700 2620 Power block type JX HX JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 1600 x 2000 x 600 2400 x 2000 x 600 3200 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection
149. VDE mm 2x 150 2 x 150 2x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2 x 400 2 x 400 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 225 225 300 Power block type FX FX GX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 400 x 2000 x600 400 x 2000x600 400 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 230 2 3NE1 331 2 3NE1 334 2 Rated current A 315 350 500 Size to DIN 43 620 1 1 2 2 D The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 13 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12 14 Version C 380 V 480 V 3AC part 2 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GE33 8CA0 1GE35 0CA0 1GE36 1CA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 200 250 315 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 300 400 500 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V 1
150. WG MCM 2 x 400 2 x 400 2 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 300 300 300 Power block type GX GX GX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 400 x 2000 x600 400 x 2000x600 400 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 227 2 3NE1 230 2 3NE1 331 2 Rated current A 250 315 350 Size to DIN 43 620 1 1 1 2 D The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 20 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Table 12 21 Version C 500 V 600 V 3AC part 2 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GF33 3CA0 1GF34 1CA0 1GF34 7CA0 Rated motor output kW 200 250 315 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 500 V to 600 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 353 436 493 Rated outp
151. With SINAMICS G150 only CDS0O is normally used as a default setting for the command and setpoint sources Make sure that the selected default settings are compatible with the actual system configuration You cannot use the lt Back pushbutton if you want to change the default settings unless No selection is displayed for the current value If you have made an incorrect entry you have to delete the entire drive unit from the project navigator and add a new one 30 Carefully check the default settings and then click Continue gt Technological Application Defining the Motor Identification Configuration Drive_unit_0O Drive functions Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Option Control structure Drive setting Motor Technological application Pumps and fans 1 hed Motor data Calculation of the rr Motor holding brake Encoder ged ashore 5 eit ce Defaults of the setp Motor identification Motor data identification for rotal PROFIBUS proces f 4 motor data identification is performed once at the drive m motor identification is recommended at the initial commissioning enable The motor is under current and may turn up to a quarter of a revolution After completion of this measurement an optimization of the turning motor is performed at the next drive enable Fig 5 25 Technological application definin
152. a set contains the parameters for switching between different drive control configurations The CDS and DDS can be switched over during normal operation Further types of data set also exist however these can only be activated indirectly by means of a DDS switchover EDS encoder data set MDS motor data set SINAMICS G150 6 4 Operating Instructions Operation 06 05 2 3 3 T E o ml D le 2 c S 2 O Data set independent drive parameters CDS Command Data Set DDS Drive Data Set Motor selection Encoder selection EDS Encoder Data Set MDS Motor Data Set Parameter categories Fig 6 2 SINAMICS G150 6 5 Operating Instructions Operation 06 05 6 3 2 Drive Objects A drive object is a self contained software function with its own parameters and if necessary its own faults and alarms Drive objects can be provided as standard e g I O evaluation or you can add single e g option board or multiple objects e g drive control Control Unit Drive objects Evaluation Evaluation Evaluation Evaluation Drive A i i inate ee onboard control option Terminal eee Terminal i Module Module Terminal Module Terminal Module Power Module Fig 6 3 Drive objects Drive objects installed by default e Drive control Drive control handles closed loop control of the moto
153. aa 4 27 4 52 X522 naia ii a ae et aasia 4 28 X530 a ar aa a 4 27 MOB T ia a aa aa ana 4 52 XAO o a a a 4 28 MAG eter nna a a it ete i 4 29 MOA Dich it on sagan ted Tateadoita ate sete 4 29 Index 5 Index 06 05 SINAMICS G150 Index 6 Operating Instructions 06 05 Parameter Macros Parameter Macros Parameter macro p0015 G150 cabinet unit This macro is used to make default settings for operating the cabinet unit Table 1 Parameter macro p0015 G150 cabinet unit Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0400 0 Encoder type selection Vector 9999 Other Vector Encoder configuration p0404 0 effective Vector 200008h Vector Squarewave signal encoder p0405 0 AIB track Vector 9h Bipolar like A B track Vector 1024 pulses per p0408 0 Rotary encoder pulses rev _ Vector 1024 environment Vector p0500 Technological application Vector 1 Pumps fans Vector Motor temperature sensor p0600 for monitoring Vector 0 No sensor Vector Motor temperature sensor p0601 type Vector 0 No sensor Vector p0603 0 Cl Motor temperature Vector r4105 Sensor on TM31 TM31 p0603 1 Cl Motor temperature Vector Motor temperature alarm p0604 threshold Vector 120 factory setting Vector Motor temperature fault p0605 threshold Vector 155 factory setting Vector p0606 Motor temperature timer Vector 0 factory setti
154. abinet cabinet field H A25 to the lower connector sections in the lefthand sub cabinet cabinet field H A24 1 Connecting cable with the connector designation A1 X97 in the lower connector section A1 X97 2 Connecting cable with the connector designation A1 X98 in the lower connector section A1 X98 3 Connecting cable with the connector designation A1 X99 in the lower connector section A1 X99 The cables must be routed so that power cables cannot interfere with data and signals that are being transferred along the connecting cables Connecting up the DRIVE CLiQ topology The DRIVE CLiQ connection from the Power Module in the lefthand sub cabinet cabinet field H A49 to the Control Unit CU320 cabinet field H A50 The connecting cable cable number W003 is inserted in the Power Module in the plant and must be inserted in the DRIVE CLiQ socket X102 of the Control Unit The cables must be routed so that power cables cannot cause interference on the DRIVE CLiQ connection SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 7 Power Connections WARNING AN e Swapping the input and output terminals can destroy the cabinet unit e Swapping or short circuiting the DC link terminals can destroy the cabinet unit e The contactor and relay operating coils that are connected to the same supply network as the cabinet unit or are located near the cabinet unit must be connected
155. abinet unit The NAMUR default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER NAMUR e AOP30 G S150 NAMUR Command Sources r0807 master control active LOCAL REMOTE key 0 REMOTE NAMUR terminal block 1 LOCAL operator panel Internal control Namur terminals X2 Fig 6 13 Command sources AOP30 gt NAMUR terminal block Priority The priority of the command sources is shown in Fig 6 13 NOTE The emergency OFF and motor protection signals are always active regardless of the command source For LOCAL master control all of the supplementary setpoints are de activated SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 23 Operation 06 05 Terminal Assignment with the NAMUR Default Setting When you choose the NAMUR default setting the terminal assignment is as follows as with option BOO NAMUR terminal block ON dynamic ON OFF static OFF dynamic Faster Slower RESET Interlock CCW rotation 0 signal CW phase sequence 1 signal CCW phase sequence Line disconnection Ready to operate 32 Motor rotates __ DO NO DO COM DO NC Speed setpoint Ss 0 4 20 mA Motor frequency 0 4 20 mA Q Motor current 0 4 20 mA A PTC sensor Fig 6 14 terminal assignment with NAMUR terminal block default setting Switching the Command Source The command source can be
156. able 10 1 Description of the LEDs on the CU320 LED Color Status Description OFF Electronics power supply outside permissible tolerance range Green Continuous The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLIQ communication is taking place RDY Flashing 2 Hz Writing to CompactFlash card ready Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component Flashing CompactFlash Card is not inserted 0 5 Hz Boot error e g firmware cannot be loaded to RAM Green Flashing Control unit 320 is ready Red 0 5 Hz No software licenses for the device Orange Continuous DRIVE CLIQ communication is being established Flashing Unable to load firmware to RAM 0 5 Hz Flashing 2 Hz Firmware CRC error SINAMICS G150 10 2 Operating Instructions 06 05 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms LED Color Status Description OFF Cyclic communication has not yet taken place Note PROFIBUS is ready for communication when the control unit is ae ready see LED RDY Green Continuous Cyclic communication is taking place PROFIBUS i F a INE cyclic Flashing Full cyclic communication is not yet taking place operation 0 5 Hz Possible causes e The master is not transmitting setpoints e No global control GC or master sign of life is transmitted during isochronous operation Red Continuous Cyclic communication has been interrupted OFF Electronics power supply outside the permissible tolerance range
157. ade before the drive unit is re commissioned SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 39 Commissioning 06 05 5 6 Status After Commissioning LOCAL Mode Control via Operator Panel e You switch to LOCAL mode by pressing the LOCAL REMOTE key e Control ON OFF is carried out via the ON and OFF keys e You specify the setpoint using the increase and decrease keys or by entering the appropriate numbers using the numeric keypad Analog outputs e The actual speed r0063 is output as a current output in the range 0 to 20 mA at analog output 0 X522 2 and 3 A current of 20 mA is equal to the maximum speed in p1082 e The actual current value r0068 is output as a current output in the range 0 to 20 mA at analog output 1 X522 5 and 6 A current of 20 mA is equal to the current limit 00640 set to 1 5 x rated motor current p0305 Digital outputs e The enable pulses signal is output at digital output 0 X542 2 and 3 e The no fault active signal is output at digital output 1 X542 5 and 6 fail safe e The ready to start signal is output at digital output 8 X541 2 SINAMICS G150 5 40 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning 5 7 5 7 1 5 7 2 Data Backup Saving the CompactFlash Card Parameter Settings After commissioning you are advised to store the CompactFlash card data on an external storage medium hard disk data media To do so use a card reader connected to a PC En
158. am FD 3040 Parameters e p1110 Inhibit negative direction e p1111 Inhibit positive direction e p1113 Direction reversal SINAMICS G150 7 4 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 2 3 Suppression Speed and Minimum Speed Description Variable speed drives can generate critical whirling speeds within the control range of the entire drive train This prevents steady state operation in their proximity in other words although the drive can pass through this range it must not remain within it because resonant oscillations may be excited The suppression bandwidths allow this range to be blocked for steady state operation Because the points at which critical whirling speeds occur in a drive train can vary depending on age or thermal factors a broader control range must be blocked To ensure that the speed does not constantly increase and decrease in the suppression bandwidth speeds the bands are assigned a hysteresis Specifying a minimum speed allows a specific range to be disabled about speed 0 1 min for steady state operation Signal Flow Diagram Suppression speed 1 Suppression speed 4 p1091 Suppression speed 2 Suppression speed 3 p1094 p1092 p1093 Minimum speed p1080 Setpt after limit n_set n min_lim r1114 r1112 Minimum limit Bandwidth p1101 Fig 7 1 Signal flow diagram suppression speeds and minimum speeds SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 5 Setpoint Ch
159. and Closed Loop F Control 7 1 Chapter Content S PENA EEE O AEE E R This chapter provides information on the setpoint channel and closed loop control functions e Setpoint channel Direction reversal Suppression speed Minimum speed Speed limitation Ramp function generator e V f control e Speed control with without encoder Closed loop Setpoint channel control PROFIBUS NE E Input terminals A60 TM31 ry J P Output terminals A60 Namur terminals X2 Diagnosis Faults alarms K i Monitoring functions Functions Protection functions eed A i 7 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 1 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Function Diagrams To supplement this operating manual the documentation folder contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle of the SINAMICS G150 The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating manual The page numbers 7xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the documentation CD in the SINAMICS G List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions SINAMICS G150 7 2 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 2 Setpoint Channel 7 2 1
160. annel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Function Diagram FD 1550 3050 Parameters e p1091 Skip speed 1 e p1092 Skip speed 2 e p1093 Skip speed 3 e p1094 Skip speed 4 e p1101 Skip speed bandwidth e p1080 Minimum speed e 1112 Speed setpoint after minimum limiting 7 2 4 Speed Limitation Description Speed limitation aims to limit the maximum permissible speed of the entire drive train to protect the drive and load machine process against damage caused by excessive speeds Signal Flow Diagram Speed limit in positive direction of rotation n_set n min_lim P RFG setpt at input r1112 r1119 Speed limit in negative direction of rotation p1086 Fig 7 2 Signal flow diagram Speed limitation Function Diagram FD 1550 3050 Parameters e p1082 Maximum speed e p1083 Speed limit in positive direction of rotation e p1086 Speed limit negative direction of rotation SINAMICS G150 7 6 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 2 5 Ramp Function Generator Description The ramp function generator limits the rate at which the setpoint changes when the drive is accelerating or decelerating This prevents excessive setpoint step changes from damaging the drive train Additional rounding times can also be set in the lower and upper speed ranges to improve control quality and prevent load surges thereby protecting mechanical components such as shafts and couplings The ramp up and ra
161. apping Matching transformer taps A1 T10 LH1 LH2 450 V 515 V 500 V 1 8 516 V 540 V 525 V 1 9 541 V 560 V 550 V 1 10 561 V 590 V 575 V 1 11 591 V 660 V 600 V 1 12 Table 4 8 Supply voltage assignments for the internal power supply 660 V 690 V 3AC Supply voltage range Tapping Matching transformer taps A1 T10 LH1 LH2 591 V 630 V 600 V 1 12 631 V 680 V 660 V 1 14 terminals 12 and 13 are bridged 681 V 759 V 690 V 1 15 terminals 12 and 13 are bridged SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 19 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 7 6 Removing the Connection Bracket for the Interference Suppression Capacitor with Operation from an Ungrounded Supply If the cabinet unit is operated from an ungrounded supply IT supply the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor of the converter U1 must be removed Unscrew the screws M4 Torx T20 and remove the connection bracket Fig 4 4 Removing the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor NOTE For the following cabinet units the connecting jumper must be removed in both sub cabinets e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL37 10 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL37 10 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 SIN
162. approx 1 Hz NOTE When the motor is started or reversed in closed loop control at 0 Hz it is important to take into account that a switchover is made from closed loop to open loop control automatically if the system remains in the 0 Hz range for too long gt 2 s or gt p1758 Function Diagram FD 6730 Parameters e p0305 Rated motor current e 10331 Motor magnetizing current short circuit current e p1610 Torque setpoint static SLVC e p1611 Supplementary accelerating torque SLVC e p1750 Motor model configuration e p1755 Motor model changeover speed sensorless operation e p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis e p1758 Motor model changeover delay time closed open loop control SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 4 2 Vector Control with Encoder Description Benefits of vector control with an encoder The speed can be controlled right down to 0 Hz standstill Stable control response throughout the entire speed range A defined and or variable torque for speeds below approx 10 of the rated motor speed needs to be maintained Compared with speed control without an encoder the dynamic response of drives with an encoder is significantly better because the speed is measured directly and integrated in the model created for the current components Function Diagram FD 1590 1610 6010 6030 6040 6050 6060 6490 SINAMICS G150 Operating Inst
163. apsed see Fig 9 5 Ngearchmax 1 25 Nmax P1082 The flying restart function behaves differently with V f control and vector control e V f characteristic 91300 lt 20 The search speed yielded from parameter p1203 reduces the search frequency in accordance with the motor current The parameterizable search current P1202 is injected here If the search frequency is similar to the rotor frequency a current minimum occurs Once the frequency has been found the motor is magnetized The output voltage during the magnetization time p0346 is increased to the voltage value yielded from the V f characteristic see Fig 9 5 e Vector control without encoder The motor speed is determined using the speed adaptation control loop for the electric motor model To begin with the search current p1202 is injected and then the controller is activated starting from the maximum search frequency The dynamic response of the controller can be altered using the search speed factor p1203 If the deviation of the speed adaptation controller is not too great the motor continues to be magnetized for the duration parameterized in p0346 Once the excitation build up time p0346 has elapsed the ramp function generator is set to the actual speed value and the motor ramped up to the current setpoint frequency ON OFF command DO search max Setpoint speed n search max Search Demagnetize Magnetize p1082 1 25 Fig 9 5 AN
164. arameter word 1 1 Ready to start 0 r0889 0 1 Ready to operate DC link loaded pulses blocked 1 r0889 1 1 Operation enabled drive follows n_setp 2 r0889 2 1 Fault present 3 12139 3 0 Coast to stop active OFF2 4 r0889 4 0 Fast stop active OFF3 5 r0889 5 1 Power on disable 6 r0889 6 1 Alarm present 7 12139 7 1 Speed setpoint actual deviation in the tolerance bandwidth p2163 8 12197 7 p2166 1 Control required to PLC 9 r0899 9 1 f orn comparison value reached or exceeded p2141 p2142 10 r2199 1 1 I M or P limit reached p0640 p1520 p1521 11 1407 7 Reserved 12 0 Alarm motor overtemperature A7910 13 r2129 14 Reserved 14 0 Alarm thermal overload in power section A5000 15 r2129 15 1 Pulses enabled inverter is clocking drive is carrying current r0899 11 1 n_act lt p2155 r2197 1 1 n_act gt p2155 r2197 2 1 Ramp up ramp down completed r2199 5 1 n_act lt p2161 preferably as n_min or n 0 message r2199 0 1 Torque setpoint lt p2174 r2198 10 1 LOCAL mode active control via operator panel r0807 0 0 Motor blocked 12198 6 8 6 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Functions Monitoring and Protective 9 Functions 9 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on e Drive functions Motor identification routine Vdc control automatic restart flying restart motor changeover friction characteristic increase in the output frequency runtime simul
165. arker gt p0405 9 Hex Track A Track A Track B Track B Zero pulse Inverted zero pulse CTRL Ground Sensor power supply 24 V Ground for sensor power supply Fig 4 16 Connection example 1 HTL encoder bipolar without zero marker Connection Example 2 TTL Encoder Unipolar Without Zero Marker gt p0405 A Hex Track A Track A Track B Track B Zero pulse Inverted zero pulse CTRL Ground Sensor power supply 5 V Ground for sensor power supply Fig 4 17 Connection example 2 TTL encoder unipolar without zero marker SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 53 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 10 16 Customer Terminal Block Extension Option G61 Description 4 54 A TM31 interface module customer terminal block A60 is already installed in standard SINAMICS S150 cabinet units A second module A61 provides the following additional digital and analog inputs outputs in the drive system 8 digital inputs 4 bidirectional digital inputs outputs 2 relay outputs with changeover contact 2 analog inputs 2 analog outputs 1 temperature sensor input KTY84 130 PTC The second TM31 must be installed on the system side Default settings are not provided SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 17 NAMUR Terminal Block Option B00 Description The terminal block is designed in accordance with the requirements and guidelines d
166. assignment for control word 1 is described in 6 6 4 Status word 1 The bit assignment for status word 1 is described in 6 6 5 Switching the Command Source The command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 SINAMICS G150 6 26 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 5 Setpoint Sources 6 5 1 Analog Inputs Description The customer terminal block TM31 features two analog inputs for specifying setpoints for current or voltage signals In the factory setting analog input 0 terminal X521 1 2 is used as a current input in the range 0 to 20 mA Requirements The default setting for analog inputs was chosen during commissioning e STARTER TM31 Terminals e AOP30 TM31_AI0 Signal Flow Diagram Char x2 p4059 Smoothing p4053 4063 H H current U I p Char y2 H Current value r4052 4060 4055 Char y1 only when p4056 3 p4058 F3505 Scaling Analog input cable breakage Fig 6 17 Signal flow diagram analog input 0 Function diagram FD 9566 9568 Parameters e 14052 e p4053 e 14055 e p4056 e p4057 e p4058 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Actual input voltage current Analog inputs smoothing time constant Analog inputs actual input value in percent Analog inputs type Analog inputs characteristic value x1 Analog inputs characteristic value y1 6 27 Operation 06 05 e p4059 Analog inputs characteristic value x2 e p4060
167. ation operation e Extended functions Technology controller Extended braking control Extended monitoring functions e Monitoring and protective functions Power Module protection thermal monitoring functions and overload responses anti stall protection stall protection thermal motor protection Closed loop control l Setpoint channel PROFIBUS Ga p he Input terminals A60 TM31 i ft Output terminals A60 Namur terminals X2 Se ee ep ree ne a ee eee ee i Diagnosis Faults alarms p Monitoring functions Functions Protection functions SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 1 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 Function Diagrams To supplement this operating manual the documentation folder contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle of the SINAMICS G150 The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating manual The page numbers 9xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the documentation CD in the SINAMICS G List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions SINAMICS G150 9 2 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 1 Motor Identification and
168. ation r0064 1 min p2000 Control factor r0074 Reference control factor Torque generating current setpoint r0077 A p2002 Torque producing actual current r0078 A p2002 Flux setpoint r0083 Reference flux Actual flux r0084 Reference flux For further diagnostic purposes Speed controller output r1480 Nm p2003 component of speed controller 11482 Nm p2003 Scaling Table 8 1 Scaling Size Scaling parameter Default for quick commissioning Reference speed 100 p2000 p2000 Maximum speed p1082 Reference voltage 100 p2001 p2001 1000 V Reference current 100 p2002 p2002 Current limit p0640 Reference torque 100 p2003 p2003 2 x rated motor torque Reference power 100 r2004 r200 4 p2003 xp2000 x Tr 30 Reference frequency p2000 100 Reference control factor without overload 100 Maximum output voltage Reference flux 100 Rated motor flux Reference temperature 100 100 C SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 8 3 Output Terminals 06 05 Example Changing Analog Output 0 from Current to Voltage Output 10 to 10 V X522 1 2 Voltage output present at terminal 1 ground is at terminal 2 p4076 4 Set analog output type 0 to 10 10 V H Fig 8 2 Example Setting analog output 0 Example Changing Analog Output 0 from Current to Voltage Output 10 10 V and Setting the Characteristic X522 1 2 Voltage
169. be parameterized The cabinet unit is then disconnected from the power supply via the line contactor which bypasses the electronics by means of a safety combination to EN 60 204 1 The operating status is indicated by means of five LEDs A121 Connection Table 4 28 Terminal block X120 connection for EMERGENCY OFF category 1 24 V DC Terminals Button circuit 24 V DC 7 Loop in EMERGENCY OFF button from system side 8 remove jumper 7 8 15 On for monitored start 16 Remove bridges 15 16 and connect button 17 18 Checkback trip safety combination Max connectable cross section 4 mm AWG 10 Setting When the emergency stop function OFF3 ramp down time p1135 is used to shut down the drive the ramp down time should be less than or at the most equal to the time set on the contactor combination after which the converter is de energized Diagnostics Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on A120 are described in Additional Operating Instructions in the operating manual SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 39 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 10 11 25 kW Braking Unit Option L61 50 kW Braking Unit Option L62 Description Braking units are used when regenerative energy occurs occasionally and briefly for example when the brake is applied to the drive emergen
170. be present Voltage is also present within certain sections of the converter e g the closed loop control or any auxiliary equipment If all the voltages have to be completely disconnected the EMERGENCY OFF button must be integrated in a protection concept which must be implemented on the system side For this purpose an NC contact is installed at terminal X120 Connection Table 4 26 Terminal X120 connection for EMERGENCY OFF category 0 230 V AC and 24 V DC Terminal 230 V AC and 24 V DC button circuit 7 Loop in EMERGENCY OFF button from system side 8 remove jumper 7 8 15 On for monitored start 16 Remove bridges 15 16 and connect button 17 i Checkback trip safety combination Max connectable cross section 4 mm AWG 10 Reconnection to the 24 V DC Button Circuit When using the 24 V DC button circuit you must remove the following jumpers at terminal X120 4 5 9 10 and 11 14 You must also insert the following jumpers at terminal X120 4 11 5 10 and 9 14 Diagnostics Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on A120 are described in Additional Operating Instructions in the operating manual SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 37 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 10 9 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1 230 V AC Option L59 Description EMERGENCY OFF category 1 for controlled stop to EN 60 204 This function stops the drive by
171. binet door 3 NC 2 Max load current 10 A 4 NC 2 Max switching voltage 250 V AC Max switching capacity 250 VA Required minimum load gt 1 mA NC normally closed contact a Factory setting in converter for options L57 L59 and L60 Max connectable cross section 4 mm AWG 10 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 35 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 10 6 Cabinet Illumination with Service Socket Option L50 Description One universal lamp with an integrated service socket is installed for each cabinet panel The power supply for the cabinet illumination and socket must be provided externally and fused at max 10 A The cabinet illumination is switched on manually via a slide switch or automatically by means of an integrated motion detector factory setting The mode is selected via the switch on the light Connection 4 10 7 Table 4 24 Terminal block X390 connection for cabinet illumination with service socket Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 L1 2 N 230 V AC 3 PE Max connectable cross section 4 mm AWG 10 Cabinet Anti Condensation Heating Option L55 Description A The anti condensation heating is used at low ambient temperatures and high levels of humidity to prevent condensation forming A 100 W heater is installed for a 400 mm and 600 mm cabinet panel and 2 100 W heaters for an 800 1000 and 1200 mm cabinet panel The power supply for the heat
172. binets with a canopy are 250 mm higher Cabinet units with degree of protection IP23 are supplied with additional hoods as well as plastic ventilation grilles and braided plastic in the air inlet doors and outlet hoods The hoods are flush with the cabinets at the side and front and have a recess at the rear so that air can escape even if the cabinet is wall mounted Air escapes from the front and back The hood is secured by means of the four holes for the crane hook in the cabinet Hoods increase the height of the cabinet by 400 mm Cabinet units with degree of protection IP54 are supplied with additional hoods plastic ventilation grilles and a filter medium in the air inlet doors and outlet hoods The filter mediums can be easily fitted and replaced from the outside Air escapes from the front and back Compliance with degree of protection IP54 requires an intact filter medium which must be replaced on a regular basis due to the prevailing ambient conditions SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 3 7 Mechanical Installation 06 05 Attaching a Canopy to Increase the Degree of Protection to IP21 Option M21 1 Remove the crane transport assembly if fitted 2 Attach the spacers to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified You may have to remove the protective grille 3 Fit the canopy to the spacers Insert the enclosed screws from above Insert the enclosed screws from below Fig 3 1 Cabinet with a
173. bit resolution incl sign bit e Bit 15 determines the actual value sign Bit 0 gt positive actual value Bit 17 negative actual value e The actual speed value is normalized via parameter p2000 N_act 4000 hex or 16384 dec speed in p2000 Actual Current Value la_Act la_Act_GLATT e Actual current value with 16 bit resolution e The actual current value is normalized via parameter p2002 la_act 4000 hex or 16384 dec current in p2002 Actual Torque Value M_Act M_Act_GLATT e Actual torque value with 16 bit resolution incl sign bit e Bit 15 determines the actual value sign Bit 0 gt positive actual value Bit 17 negative actual value e The actual torque value is normalized via parameter p2003 M_act 4000 hex or 16384 dec torque in p2003 Actual Power Value P_Act P_Act_GLATT e Actual power value with 16 bit resolution incl sign bit e Bit 15 determines the actual value sign Bit 0 gt positive actual value Bit 17 negative actual value e The actual power value is normalized via parameter p2004 P_act 4000 hex or 16384 dec power in p2004 Alarm Code WARN_CODE The number of the current alarm and the last alarm to occur are output here Decimal notation is used i e value 7910 dec A07910 motor overtemperature Fault Code FAULT_CODE The number of the oldest fault still active is output here Decimal notation is used i e value 7860 dec F07860 external fault 1 SINAMICS G150 Op
174. ble ramp up 0 Disable operation with active setpoint 3 1 BI p0852 1 Enable operation 0 Pulse inhibit The motor coasts down The Ready To Run status remains set 0 Set ramp generator to 0 The ramp generator output is set to zero setpoint 0 4 1 BI p1140 1 Enable ramp function generator 0 The current setpoint is frozen at the ramp 0 Freeze ramp generator 5 generator output 1 BI p1141 1 Restart ramp generator 6 1 Enable speed setpoint 1 The speed setpoint at the input of the 1 Bl p1142 ramp function generator is enabled SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 37 Operation 06 05 Bit Meaning Explanation Operating BICO condition 0 Inhibit speed setpoint 0 The speed setpoint at the input of the ramp function generator is set to zero The drive brakes in accordance with the ramp down time set in p1121 0 gt 1 Acknowledge error A positive signal transition acknowledges all BI p2103 7 the current faults Note The error is acknowledged at a 0 1 edge via BI p2103 BI p2104 or BI p2105 Reserved Reserved 1 PROFIBUS control words and setpoints are analyzed 1 Control via PLC 1 BI p0852 10 0 PROFIBUS control words and setpoints are not analyzed Note This bit should not be set to 1 until the PROFIBUS slave has returned an appropriate status via STW1 9 1 Di i i 1 CCW phase sequence 11 1 Direction of
175. brations that occur in the speed controller it is usually only necessary to increase the smoothing time in p1442 or p1452 or reduce the controller gain The integral output of the speed controller can be monitored via r1482 and the limited controller output via r1508 torque setpoint NOTE When compared to closed loop speed control with encoder the dynamic performance for sensorless drives is significantly lower The actual speed is derived using a model based calculation from the drive converter output quantities current and voltage These current and voltage signals are noisy This means that the actual speed must be filtered using appropriate filter algorithms in the software SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 21 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Function Diagram FD 6040 Parameters 7 22 p0340 p1442 p1452 p1460 p1462 p1470 p1472 p1960 r0062 r0063 10345 11482 r1508 Automatic calculation of motor closed loop control parameters Speed actual value smoothing time VC Speed actual value smoothing time SLVC Speed controller P gain adaptation speed lower Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed lower Speed controller sensorless operation P gain Speed controller sensorless operation integral action time Speed controller optimization selection CO Speed setpoint after the filter CO Actual speed smoothed CO Rated motor start up time CO Torque output s
176. c VDE VDI VT ZK ZSW List of Abbreviations 2 Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Jog Inductance Light Emitting Diode Ground Megabyte Motor Data Set Normally closed contact National Electrical Manufacturers Association Normally open contact Original Equipment Manufacturer Machine readable product designation Variable parameters Power Module Data Set Protective Earth Process Field Bus Positive Temperature Coefficient PROFIBUS process data Visualization parameter read only Random Access Memory Ramp Function Generator Serial interface Standard Describes the physical characteristics of a digital serial interface Continuous Duty Periodic Duty Safe standstill Safety Integrated Programmable Logic Controller PLC PROFIBUS Control Word Software Totally Integrated Automation Terminal Module Underwriters Laboratories Inc DC link voltage Association of German Electrical Engineers Association of German Engineers Variable torque DC Link PROFIBUS status word SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Index Index Parameter Types 6 3 CDS Command Data Set 6 9 Parameters ssnst 6 3 DDS Drive Data Set ee 6 10 Basic Information About the Drive System6 A 3 A7850 External Warning 1 10 10 BICO technology 6 14 AlS e aea AR aed eee 10 10 BICO Technology Analog Inputs 4 27 6 27 Interconnecting Signals 0 6 15 Analog Outputs seeen 4 28 8 2
177. cally included in the calculation for power section protection Default Pulse Frequencies With the default pulse frequencies listed below the following maximum output frequencies can be achieved Table 9 3 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency Converter rating Default pulse frequency Maximum output frequency kW kHz Hz Supply voltage 380 480 V 110 250 2 160 315 900 1 25 100 Supply voltage 500 600 V 110 1000 1 25 100 Supply voltage 660 690 V 75 1500 1 25 100 Maximum Output Frequencies Achieved by Increasing the Pulse Frequency By multiplying the basis pulse frequency with integers the following output frequencies can be achieved taking into account the derating factors Table 9 4 Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency Pulse frequency Maximum output frequency kHz Hz 1 25 100 2 160 2 5 200 4 320 5 400 Parameter e p1800 Pulse frequency 1 Due to the closed loop control the maximum output frequency is limited to 300 Hz SINAMICS G150 9 24 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 8 Runtime Operating Hours Counter Total System Runtime The total system runtime is displayed in p2114 Index 0 indicates the system runtime in milliseconds after reaching 86 400 000 ms 24 hours the value is reset Index 1 indicates
178. carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 31 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 Replacing the Fan Right Hand Power Block DOGO O OE fe Q Q Q OIO 8 E i Fig 11 15 Replacing the fan type HX right hand power block SINAMICS G150 11 32 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables including ambient temperature and the degree of cabinet protection and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Open the cabinet door e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 15 1 Remove the copper bars 12 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any
179. ce and establish the fault 5 Rectify the displayed fault with the help of the appropriate operating instructions provided in Additional Operating Instructions 10 3 3 External Fault 3 Causes Fault code F7862 External Fault 3 is triggered when the braking resistor available with options L61 and L62 is subject to thermal overload thereby activating the thermostat The drive is switched off with OFF2 Remedy The cause of the braking resistor overload must be eliminated and the fault code acknowledged SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 10 11 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 06 05 10 4 Service and Support Service and Support Helpline If you need help and do not know who to contact we make sure that you receive all the help you need as quickly as possible The helpline ensures that a specialist in your area can provide you with professional support The helpline in Germany for example is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year German and English are spoken Tel 0180 50 50 111 Online support Our round the clock worldwide online support service provides quick and efficient support in five languages The comprehensive Internet based information system which is available round the clock provides product support services and support tools in the shop Online support provides a wide range of technical information e FAQs tips and tricks downloads current news e Manuals e Helpful programs and software
180. cription The automatic restart function automatically restarts the cabinet unit after an undervoltage or a power failure The alarms present are acknowledged and the drive is restarted automatically The drive can be restarted using e The normal procedure for starting the drive from standstill e The flying restart function For drives with small inertia loads and load torques where the drive can be brought to a standstill within seconds Such as pump drives with water gauges the start from standstill is recommended NOTE The flying restart function can also be activated for drives with large inertia loads such as fan drives This enables you to switch to the motor that is still rotating WARNING AN If p1210 is set to gt 1 the motor can be restarted automatically without the need to issue the ON command In the event of prolonged power failures and when the automatic restart function is activated p1210 gt 1 the drive may have been at a standstill for a long time and mistakenly considered to have been switched off For this reason entering the area around the drive when it is in this condition can cause death serious injury or considerable material damage Parameters e p1210 Automatic restart mode e p1211 Automatic restart start attempts e p1212 Automatic restart delay time start attempts e p1213 Wiedereinschaltautomatik berwachung Netzwiederkehr Settings To prevent the motor from switching to phas
181. cted properly Please refer to the relevant documentation for the motor and note the required insulation voltage for operating the cabinet unit SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 7 4 Adjusting the Fan Voltage U1 T10 The power supply for the device fan in the Power Module U1 T10 is generated from the main supply system by means of a transformer The location of the transformer is indicated in the layout diagrams supplied The transformer is fitted with primary taps so that it can be fine tuned to the rated line supply voltage When delivered the taps are always set to the highest level With a low supply voltage the appropriate transformer tap must be activated NOTE Two transformers U1 T10 and T20 are installed in the following cabinet units The two primary terminals on these devices must be set together e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 0_A0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF37 4_A0 6SL3710 2GF38 1_A0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL3710 2GH37 4_A0 6SL3710 2GH38 1_A0 NOTE For the following cabinet units the setting terminals must be set the same in both sub cabinets e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL37 10 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL37 10 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH
182. ction without option L26 3NE1 447 2 3NE1 448 2 Rated current A 670 850 Circuit breaker Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 18 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Table 12 19 Version A 500 V 600 V 3AC part 4 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 2GF41 1AA0 2GF41 4AA0 Rated motor output kW 630 710 1000 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 500 V to 600 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 904 1116 1424 Rated output current A 860 1070 1360 Base load current 7 A 836 1036 1314 Base load current In A 770 950 1216 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 15 6 17 4 25 4 Cooling air requirement m s 1 56 1 56 2 96 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 75 78 75 78 75 78 Line connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabi
183. ctions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the fan e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 10 1 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the electronics slide in unit 2 screws When removing the electronics slide in unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 below CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables 5 The control interface board can then be removed from the electronics slide in unit Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 23 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 9 Replacing the Control Interface Board Type JX Replacing the Control Interface
184. ctor voltage current Al1 Voltage VIED S5 1 current X522 2 Analog Outputs Temperature Sensor Connection Table 4 14 Terminal block X522 Terminal Designation 1 Technical specifications 1 AO 0 V 2 AO 0 ref 40 V 10V 3 AO 0 A 4 mA 20 mA 4 AO 1 V 20 mA 20 mA 0 mA 20 mA 5 AO 1 ref 6 AO 1 A 7 KTY KTY84 0 200 C 8 KTY PTC Rood lt 1 5 KQ AO analog output KTY temperature sensor connection Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 X540 Common Auxiliary Voltage for Digital Inputs Table 4 15 Terminal block X540 P24 P24 P24 P24 P24 P24 P24 8 P24 VDC Imax 150 mA total of all P24 terminals Continued short circuit proof N O JAJA O JIN Terminal Designation Technical specifications Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 SINAMICS G150 4 28 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation X541 4 Non Floating Digital Inputs Outputs Table 4 16 Terminal block X541 Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 P24 As input a 2 DI DO 8 Voltage 3 V to 30 V 3 DI DO 9 Current input typical 10 mA at 24 V DC 4 DI DO 10 As output 5 DI DO 11 Max load current per output 20 mA 6 M Continued short circuit proof DI DO digital input output M Electronic ground Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14
185. cy stop The braking units comprise a chopper power section and a load resistor which must be attached externally To monitor the braking resistance a thermostat integrated in the shutdown train of the cabinet unit is installed in the braking resistor Table 4 29 Load data for the braking units Line voltage Cont Peak Chopper Chopper Braking Max chopper chopper P29 power P40 resistor current power power power Pos P15 P20 Pao Rs 380 V 480 V 25 kW 125 kW 100 kw 50 kW 44 Q 7 5 189A 380 V 480 V 50 kW 250 kW 200 kw 100 kw 2 2Q0 47 5 378 A 500 V 600 V 50 kW 250 kW 200 kW 100 kW 3 4 9 7 5 306 A 660 V 690 V 25 kW 125 kW 100 kW 50 kW 9 8Q 7 5 127A 660 V 690 V 50 kW 250 kW 200 kw 100 kw 4997 5 255 A Installing the Braking Resistor 4 40 The braking resistor should not be installed in the vicinity of the converter The following points must be taken into account e The braking resistors are only suitable for floor mounting e The maximum cable length between the cabinet unit and braking resistor is 50 m e Sufficient space must be available for dissipating the energy converted by the braking resistor e A sufficient distance from flammable objects must be maintained e The braking resistor must installed as a free standing unit e Objects must not be placed on or anywhere above the braking resistor e The braking resistor should not be installed underneath fire detection systems CA
186. d 6 7 7 6 AOP Setpoint Settings Menu Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Save AOP setpoint factory setting no e Yes In LOCAL mode the last setpoint once you have released the INCREASE or DECREASE key or confirmed a numeric entry is saved The next time you switch the system on in LOCAL mode the saved value is selected This is also the case if you switched to REMOTE in the meantime or the power supply was switched off When the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is switched on motor is running the actual value that was last present is set as the output value for the AOP setpoint and saved If the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is switched off the AOP setpoint that was last saved is used SINAMICS G150 6 58 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 7 7 7 e No When you switch the system on in LOCAL mode setpoint 0 is always selected When the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is switched on motor is running the actual value that was last present is set as the output value for the AOP setpoint AOP ramp up time factory setting 20 s AOP ramp down time factory setting 30 s e Recommendation set as ramp up ramp down time p1120 p1121 Changing the ramp up ramp down times does not affect the settings for parameters p1120 and p1121 because this is an AOP specific setting NOTE The internal d
187. d connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 17 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 6 Replacing the Control Interface Board Type FX Replacing the Control Interface Board Fig 11 8 Replacing the control interface board type FX SINAMICS G150 11 18 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the fan e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 8 1 Remove the CU320 mounts 1 screw and 2 nuts If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the electronics slide in unit 2 screws When removing the electronics slide in unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 below CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables 5 The control interface board can then be removed from the electronics slide in unit Installation To re insta
188. d fault F7900 are generated 0 00 210 000 00 1 min p2175 120 00 p1300 gt 20 gt vector controls p1300 lt 20 gt V f characteristics Control mode p1300 Speed controller at limit Motor blocked Current limit reached 1305 12 p2177 1 000 0 000 65 000 s ON delay Fig 9 11 Block protection Function Diagram FD 8012 Parameters e p2175 Motor blocked speed threshold e p2177 Motor blocked delay time SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 37 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 4 4 Stall Protection Vector Control Only Description If a stalled drive is detected 91408 12 set fault 7902 is output after the delay time set in P2178 EMF fault Motor stalled Motor stalled 1408 12 p2178 0 010 0 000 1 000 s ON delay Fig 9 12 Stall protection Function Diagram FD 8012 Parameter e p2178 Motor stalled delay time SINAMICS G150 9 38 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 5 Thermal Motor Protection Description The priority of thermal motor protection is to identify critical situations If alarm thresholds are exceeded the user can set parameterizable response options p0610 that enable continued operation e g with reduced power and prevent immediate shutdown The signal characteristic is shown in plan 902 Effective protection is also possible without a temperature sensor p4100 0 The t
189. d in Maintenance and Servicing SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 3 3 Mechanical Installation 06 05 3 3 A Installation WARNING To ensure that the devices operate safely and reliably they must be properly installed and put into operation by qualified personnel taking into account the warning messages provided in this operating manual In particular both the general and national installation and safety guidelines for high voltage installations e g VDE the Union of German Technical Engineers and the guidelines relating to the professional use of tools and the use of personal protective equipment must be observed Death serious injury or substantial material damage can result if these factors are not taken into account 3 3 1 Mechanical Installation Checklist Use the following checklist to guide you through the mechanical installation procedure for the cabinet unit Read the safety notes at the start of this operating manual before you start working on the device NOTE Check the boxes accordingly in the right hand column if the activity applies to the cabinet unit in your scope of supply In the same way check the boxes once you have finished the installation procedure to confirm that the activities are complete Item Activity Fulfilled Complete 1 The ambient conditions must be permissible See Technical Data O O General Technical Data The cabinet unit must be firmly attached
190. de eisiieveeees i aE a EEE EE e T Ea 6 29 6 5 3 Fixed Speed Setpoints iieii i ae data tanta eaa e aa oe aiid 6 30 6 6 PROFIBUS painama oe aa i el ea au ee a 6 31 6 6 1 PROFIBUS COmM Ctl OM sci tee caste ces chegecencopesses deep hestcenes sun capes cunecpestuedevdbereespestdesesroeemesgeecee 6 31 6 6 2 Control via PROFIBUS r eerti enee aeree ien ee Sees en leas Shey areenaa eaaa eeki akae 6 34 6 6 2 1 General information ieii ieaiai ietin d diie ded udii dais 6 34 6 6 2 2 Setting the PROFIBUS Address 0 eccceeeeceeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeeeesenteneaeeeeas 6 34 6 6 2 3 Setting the PROFIBUS Ident NUMbE ee eee ce enneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeenneaeesenaeeeeeeaas 6 35 6 6 3 Telegrams and Process Data 0 cccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeenneeeeee 6 35 6 6 4 Description of Control Words and Setpoints eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeenenaes 6 37 6 6 5 Description of Status Words and Actual Values 0 0 0 eecceeeenneeeeeeneeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeenees 6 40 6 7 Control via the Operator Panel ccccceccecsecceceeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeeeeseeeacaeeaeeeeeeeeees 6 46 6 7 1 Operator Panel AOP30 Overview 20 0 0 eeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeseeaaeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeenas 6 46 6 7 2 Menu Structure of the Operator Panel eecceeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 6 47 6 7 3 Operation Screen MENU ceeecceeeeeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeec
191. dized bus protocol and the Profibus interface Here the information data exchange the information contents and the device reactions and responses are defined in the communication and device profile Connection Table 4 48 Terminal block A1 X2 24 V supply voltage connection Terminal Name Default Comment M Reference conductor P24 V 24 V DC supply Protected internally with fuse 1 A P24 V 24 V DC outgoing circuit Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 Table 4 49 Terminal A1 X2 connection NAMUR control terminal strip Terminal Name Default Comment 15 DI Interlock OFF2 19 P24 V 17 a Line disconnection EMERGENCY STOP circuit Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 Table 4 50 Terminal block A1 X3 connection for the motor PTC thermistor sensor Terminal Name Default Comment 90 91 Al Connection for a PTC detector Shutdown if limit value is exceeded Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 i SINAMICS G150 4 58 Operating Instructions Commissioning 5 5 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on the following e An overview of the operator panel functions e Initial commissioning of the cabinet initialization Entering the motor data drive commissioning Entering the most important parameters basic commissioning concluding with the motor ID e Data backup e Parameter reset to factory settings ii Closed loop Setpoint channel control Monitoring functions Functio
192. e e Operation via PROFIBUS Set bit 3 of control word 1 operation enable permanently to 0 Switch on the converter by means of an ON signal bit 0 of the control word all the other bits must be set in such a way that the converter can be operated Once the waiting time has elapsed switch off the converter and restore the original PROFIBUS setting e Operation via terminal block Set p0852 to 0 factory setting is 1 Switch on the converter via digital input 0 on the customer terminal block Once the waiting time has elapsed switch off the converter and restore the original setting for p0852 NOTE Reforming cannot be carried out in LOCAL mode via the AOP30 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 41 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 6 Messages after replacing DRIVE CLiQ components After DRIVE CLiQ components are replaced Control Interface Board TM31 SMCxx when service is required generally after power up a message is not output The reason for this is that an identical component is detected and accepted as spare part when running up If unexpectedly a fault message of the topology fault category is displayed then when replacing a component one of the following faults errors should have occurred e A Control Interface Board with different firmware data was installed e When connecting up DRIVE CLiQ cables connections were interchanged 11 7 Upgrading the Cabinet Unit Fi
193. e 6 3 4 By parameterizing several command data sets and switching between them the drive can be operated with different pre configured signal sources A command data set contains the following examples e Binector inputs for control commands digital signals ON OFF enable signals p0844 etc Jog p1055 etc e Connector inputs for setpoints analog signals Voltage setpoint for V f control p1330 Torque limits and scaling factors p1522 p1523 p1528 p1529 Two command data sets are available The following parameters are available for selecting command data sets and for displaying the currently selected command data set Table 6 1 Command data set selection and display Selection Displays Bit 0 Selected Active CDS p0810 r0836 r0050 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 If a command data set which does not exist is selected the current data set remains active Example Switching between command data set 0 and 1 CDS CDS selected a r0836 0 10836 1 gt 2 h t i lt Switchover time CDS effective r0050 0 r0050 1 bia Fig 6 4 Switching command data sets example SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 9 Operation 06 05 DDS Drive Data Set CDS A drive data set contains various adjustable parameters that are relevant with respect to open and closed loop drive control e Numbers of the assigned motor and encoder data sets p0186 assi
194. e L HAN X521 Alo 1 M E are 1_Alo 2 2 G tM Alt 3 2 l re 7 Al Loo 5 i ne NO Me i N10 Te M gt X520 X522 QC t pi AO we 1 N i VY Wen SG 2 on A0 0 42 N _ ue e DI 2 aooc 3 NO O Ta sat NN ot DI3 Ao 1V 44 N SeN i m nor 5D L M ao 10 O 1 Temp NO z X540 temp 1259 wa oo eo 24V __ _e 5 OAV X541 AL 24V gt 1 4e 3 SG 24 V DI DO 8 ye S gt 24 poo 9 3 Q SC g 24 V DI DO 10 1 Q S Th 24v Dino 11 4 Q ol 24V M 1 NO X530 1 x542 JN S 1 pla Dol NO ESENE Bones an el SC i NO 4 O L OPT morj p2 V Z SS M2 N i O L_ etl uv a YO ee Le a ee ee eee Fig 4 7 Connection overview for customer terminal block TM31 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 25 Electrical Installation 06 05 NOTE The digital inputs terminals X520 and X530 in the example are powered by the internal 24 V supply of the customer terminal block terminal X540 The two groups of digital inputs optocoupler inputs have a common reference potential ground reference M1 or M2 In order to close the circuit when the internal 24 V supply is used the ground references M1 M2 must be connected to internal ground M If power is
195. e TM31 Inversion via p4048 is taken into account Additional diagnostic parameters for cabinet units with power rating for details refer to the List Manual For the following cabinet units there are additional diagnostic parameters that provide detailed information about individual Power Modules for a parallel circuit configuration e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 r7000 r7322 Special parameters for Power Modules in a parallel circuit configuration SINAMICS G150 10 8 Operating Instructions 06 05 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 10 2 3 Indicating and Rectifying Faults The cabinet unit features a wide range of functions that protect the drive against damage if a fault occurs faults and alarms Indicating Faults and Alarms If a fault occurs the drive indicates the fault and or alarm on the cabinet operator panel Faults are indicated by the red FAULT LED and a fault screen is automatically displayed You can use the F1 Help function to call up information about the cause of the fault and how to remedy it To acknowledge a stored fault choose F5 Ack Any alarms are displayed by the yellow flashing ALARM LED The system also displays a note in t
196. e battery ensures that the data in the database and the current time are retained When the battery voltage is represented as a percentage a battery voltage of lt 2 V is equal to 0 and a voltage of lt 3 V to 100 The data is secure up to a battery voltage of 2 V e lf the battery voltage is lt 2 45 V the message Replace battery is displayed in the status bar e lf the battery voltage is lt 2 30V the system displays a popup window with the following information Warning weak battery e Ifthe battery voltage is lt 2 V the system displays a popup window with the following information Warning battery is empty e lf the time and or database are not available after the system has been switched off for a prolonged period due to the voltage being too low the loss is established by means of a CRC check when the system is switched on again This triggers a message instructing the user to replace the battery and then load the database and or set the time For instructions on replacing batteries see Chapter 11 Maintenance and Servicing Communication In this menu you can call up information on the communications status between the AOP and the drive Keyboard In this screen you can check that the keys are functioning properly Keys that you press are represented on a symbolic keyboard on the display You can press the keys in any order you wish You cannot exit the screen F5 back until you have pressed
197. e changed before the measurement is started The speed controller is set to the symmetrical optimum in accordance with dynamic factor p1967 If any problems occur during the measurement the dynamic response is reduced automatically and the result displayed in r1969 The drive must also be checked to ensure that it is stable across the entire range If necessary the dynamic response may have to be reduced or Kp Tn adaptation for the speed controller parameterized accordingly see FP 6050 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 5 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 If the motor Power Module combination is operated in the field weakening range this characteristic should be determined for vector control in particular The magnetization characteristic can be used to calculate the field generating current in the field weakening range more accurately thereby increasing torque accuracy NOTE Speed controller optimization p1960 allows the rated magnetization current and magnetization characteristic to be determined more accurately Flux F 0 p0366 p0367 100 p0368 p0369 iu iu A EE Wl 0334 iy magnetization characteristic Fig 9 2 Magnetization characteristic Carrying out Rotating Measurement The following measurements are carried out when the enable signals are set and a switch on command is issued 9 6 Measurement of the magnetization characteristic 00362
198. e confronted with any system conditions in online mode that are beyond your control you are advised to delete the drive project from the project navigator and carefully create a new project in STARTER using the appropriate configuration data for your application SINAMICS G150 5 30 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning 5 4 The Operator Panel AOP30 Description An operator panel is located in the cabinet door of the cabinet unit for operating monitoring and commissioning tasks It has the following features e Graphical LCD with backlighting for plain text display and a bar display of process variables e LEDs for displaying the operational statuses e Help function describing causes of and remedies for faults and alarms e Keypad for controlling drives during operation e LOCAL REMOTE switchover for selecting the control terminal master control assigned to operator panel or customer terminal block PROFIBUS e Numeric keypad for entering setpoint or parameter values e Function keys for prompted navigation through the menus e Two stage security concept to protect against accidental or unauthorized changes to settings e Degree of protection IP 54 when installed Operating status Display LEDs e ON green K Alarm yellow o P be a a a 5 function keys Pr fefefe Master control Menu key a select E mgs 4 Ee Direction reversal Keyboard lock i Ga oq Fault
199. e incoming rectifier of a cabinet unit or the DC link connections could be damaged NOTICE When resetting restoring the parameterization to the factory setting this setting must be again made after the drive unit has been re commissioned SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Settings for a 12 pulse infeed and connected to a motor with a one winding system Before the commissioning a motor with several winding systems is automatically defined The setting for a single winding system is made before commissioning by setting parameter p7003 to 0 Settings via the AOP30 p0010 2 Set the drive commissioning filter to Power unit commissioning lt MENU gt lt Parameter gt lt All parameters gt lt Selection gt p0010 lt change gt set 2 lt OK gt p7003 0 Set the winding system to One winding p7003 lt change gt set 0 lt OK gt y p0010 1 Set the drive commissioning filter to Quick commissioning 4 p0010 lt change gt set 1 lt OK gt Continue drive commissioning menu Press OK Sees lt MENU gt lt Drive commissioning gt lt Selection gt NOTICE If the motor with a one winding system is not set using p7003 0 then the drive is powered down tripped during motor identification routine with an overcurrent fault message NOTICE When resetting restoring the parameterization to the factory setting this setting must be again m
200. e motor type plate Fig 5 32 Example of a motor type plate Table 5 1 Motor data p0305 p Mor 1LA8 315 4PM80 315 No N 1107840010001 2002 IMB3 cos 1 min la In Te s Certif aor A 0 87 1485 No 690 y SQU CAGE KE 13 EWIEC p0341_Gew t_1 3t 1 ee TAN S SE EEEE E E E MADE JN GERMANY ae es p0307 p0308 p0311 Gew Wt 1 3t Rated voltage Rated current Rated output Rated frequency Rated speed Rated power factor Cos at p0100 0 only Rated efficiency at p0100 1 only p0304 p0305 p0307 p0308 p0309 p0310 p0311 Parameter no Values Unit System of units for line frequency and entering p0100 0 IEC 50 Hz kW motor data 1 NEMA 60 Hz hp Motor V A kW hp Hz min 1 rpm SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 33 Commissioning 06 05 Basic Commissioning Selecting the Motor Type and Entering the Motor Data For the following cabinet units possible additional settings must be made before the following sequence refer to Chapter 5 5 3 e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 po100 Motortype select IEC NEMA IEC 50 Hz kW F1 F2 F3 F4 L
201. e object 32 DDS SINAMICS G150 6 10 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation EDS Encoder Data Set An encoder data set contains various adjustable parameters describing the connected encoder for the purpose of configuring the drive e Adjustable parameters e g Encoder interface component number p0141 Encoder component number p0142 Encoder type selection p0400 The parameters that are grouped together in the encoder data set are identified in the SINAMICS parameter list by Data Set EDS and are assigned an index 0 n A separate encoder data set is required for each encoder controlled by the control unit Up to 3 encoder data sets are assigned to a drive data set via parameters p0177 p0178 and p0179 One drive object can manage up to 3 encoder data sets The number of encoder data sets configured is specified in p0140 When a drive data set is selected the assigned encoder data sets are selected automatically NOTE All of the drive data sets of a drive object can only be assigned to the same encoder data sets It is not possible to toggle between various encoder data sets MDS Motor Data Set A motor data set contains various adjustable parameters describing the connected motor for the purpose of configuring the drive It also contains certain visualization parameters with calculated data e Adjustable parameters e g Motor component number p0131 Motor type selection p0300 Rated mo
202. e opposition when the drive is being restarted there is a delay while the motor demagnetizes t 2 3 x motor magnetization time constant Once this time has elapsed the inverter is enabled and the motor is supplied with power SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 13 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 2 4 Flying Restart Description The Flying restart function enabled via p1200 allows the converter to switch to a motor that is still rotating Switching on the converter without the flying restart function would not allow any flux to build up in the motor while it is rotating Since the motor cannot generate any torque without flux this can cause it to switch off due to overcurrent F07801 The flying restart function first determines the speed of the drive with which V f or vector control is initialized so that the converter and motor frequency can be synchronized During the standard start up procedure for the converter the motor must be at a standstill The converter then accelerates the motor to the setpoint speed In many cases however the motor is not at a standstill Two different situations are possible here a The drive rotates as a result of external influences such as water pump drives or air fan drives In this case the drive can also rotate against the direction of rotation b The drive rotates as a result of a previous shutdown e g OFF 2 or a power failure The drive slo
203. e p2285 Tn Determine by optimization e p2200 1 Technology controller enabled SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 29 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 3 2 9 3 2 1 9 3 2 2 Extended Braking Control Description The extended braking control function module allows complex braking control for motor holding brakes and operational brakes The brake is controlled as follows the sequence reflects the priority e Via parameter p1215 e Via binector parameters p1219 0 3 and p0855 e Via zero speed detection e Via a connector interconnection threshold value Commissioning The extended braking control function module can be activated by running the commissioning Wizard Parameter r0108 14 indicates whether the function module has been activated Parameter p1215 must be set to 3 and the brake activated via a digital output on customer terminal block TM31 Function Diagrams 9 3 2 3 FD 2704 Zero speed detection FD 2707 Release apply brake FD 2711 Signal outputs Examples Starting Against Applied Brake 9 30 When the device is switched on the setpoint is enabled immediately if other enable signals are issued even if the brake has not yet been released p1152 1 The factory setting p1152 r0899 15 must be separated here The drive first generates torque against the applied brake The brake is not released until the motor torque or motor current p1220 has exceeded braking t
204. e values between 1 KQ 10 MQ can be set If a response value in undershot a warning is output to the terminal A system fault is output via the signaling relay system When the cabinet unit is delivered from the plant the plant configuration one or several loads in one electrically connected network and the protection philosophy immediate shutdown in the event of an insulation fault or restricted continued motion can vary This means that the signaling relays of the insulation monitor are not integrated in the fault and warning train These relay outputs would have to be integrated in the fault warning train of the cabinet unit on the system side providing the plant configuration and protection philosophy permit this NOTE When the insulation monitor is used the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor must be removed see Section 4 7 6 IMPORTANT Only one insulation monitor can be used in an electrically connected network Connection Table 4 37 Terminal block A1 A101 connection for one insulation monitor Terminals Technical specifications 11 Signaling relay ALARM 1 mid position contact 12 Signaling relay ALARM 1 NC contact 14 Signaling relay ALARM 1 NO contact 21 Signaling relay ALARM 2 mid position contact 22 Signaling relay ALARM 2 NC contact 24 Signaling relay ALARM 2 NO contact M External kQ display analog output 0 uA 400 uA M External kQ display analog output 0 uA 400 uA R1 Exter
205. eds remotely using switching signals keys It is activated via terminals or PROFIBUS As long as a logical 1 is present at signal input MOP raise setpoint higher the internal numerator integrates the setpoint You can set the integration time time taken for the setpoint to increase using parameter p1047 In the same way you can decrease the setpoint using signal input MOP lower The deceleration ramp can be set using parameter p1048 Configuration parameter p1030 0 1 default setting 0 is used to activate that the actual motorized potentiometer is saved in a non volatile fashion when powering down the drive unit When powering up the drive unit the starting initial value of the motorized potentiometer is set to the last actual value that was present when the drive unit was powered down Requirements The default setting for the motorized potentiometer was chosen during commissioning e STARTER Motorized potentiometer e AOP30 Motorized potentiometer Signal Flow Diagram MOP higher Ramp up tim Ramp down time MOP lower p1047 p1048 MOP setp after RFG Motor pot max 7 r1050 p1037 Motor pot min K y p1038 Motorized potentiometer implemented via internal ramp function generator Fig 6 20 Signal flow diagram Motorized potentiometer Function diagram FD 3020 Parameters e p1030 Motorized potentiometer configuration e p1037 Motorized potentiometer maximum speed e p1038 Motorized potenti
206. eeaeeeceeeeeeesaeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 6 48 6 7 4 Parameterization Menu s vecsc ccncte sesh creieeeei te eebleideetnee nee te tieecupev yess thesteeeceeeeeee t 6 49 6 7 5 Fault Memory Alarm Memory cceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeesneeeeeesneeeeeeaaes 6 50 6 7 5 1 Faults 6 7 5 2 Alarms 6 7 6 Commissioning Service Menu cc ceeeeeeeeceeneeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeesnaeeeseeaeeeenneeeeneaa 6 51 6 7 6 1 Dive ComMisSiOning isi pesia ga a a a a i aa deities 6 51 6 7 6 2 Device Commissioning s i nirien iaie i aa ea alaani dee 6 51 6 7 6 3 AOP30 Se ttinGS e hoak nna enaa ea e aae aaa aaran araa eade aaea eens 6 51 6 7 6 4 Lists of Signals for the Operation Screen sseeieerissreiiesrrireerinsrriresriitesrinreerrnsreens 6 52 6 7 6 5 AOP30 DiaQnoSis sinos i a eE aa aa e aadatan 6 55 6 7 7 Operation via the Operator Panel LOCAL Mode sessesssssiesriisesrissrrriesrirresrienesrrssrees 6 56 6 7 61 COCALREMOTE K yiii a E E EA E o A e N E is 6 56 Ol L ONI OFF KEY aterea ae data eN ar E ee e Teao AOE naea area AS 6 57 6 7 7 3 Switching Between Clockwise and Counter Clockwise Rotation eccencene 6 57 6 7 7 4 Jog 6 58 6 7 7 5 Increase Setpoint Decrease Setpoint eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeseaaes 6 58 6 7 7 6 AOP Setpa ee aN e ected ete a ee died aia hae ete 6 58 6 7 7 7 Timeout Monitoring esserne ee ceeeeeeeeneeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeecesaaeeeseneeeeesnaeeeee
207. eeeeeesteeeeeees 6 30 LE DSi oriai e eed 10 2 Fixed Speed Setpoints 0 008 6 30 Parameters 22 ctinseceincteeeenisee teins 10 6 Flying Restart cccceesseeeeeeseeeeeees 9 14 Digital Inputs eee eeeeeeeeees 4 26 4 27 Flying Restart Without Encoder 9 15 Digital Inputs Outputs 00 0 ee 4 29 Friction characteristic 0cccee 9 22 Digital OUtpuUtS eee eeeereeeeeeteeeeees 8 5 Fuse Direction Reversal seirena 7 4 HA VSF 21 yoo eee ak ree ee 11 38 Drive Data Set 6 10 Fuses Drive FuUncCtNS ennaii asas 9 3 Auxiliary Power Supply A1 F11 A1 Drive Obj6Cts j i vac edi aai 6 6 E12 EE E A ee ata 11 38 Droop FUNCOM ccsa aa 7 29 Fan U1 F10 U1 F11 o 11 38 E G EDS Encoder Data Set ee 6 11 G61 Ai iain T 4 54 Electrically connecting separately shipped H UNIS E A T E E E A 4 11 High Overload ee S 12 7 Electromagnetic Compatibility l EMC Compliant Installation 4 9 Increase Key 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeaees 6 58 INtPOGUCTION e oria A 4 7 Increasing the Output Frequency 9 24 Noise Emissions cceeeeeeeenee 4 7 Initial Commissioning c eeeeeeeee 5 32 Operational Reliability and Noise Installation cc ceccccceeeessseeeeeeeeeees 3 4 3 6 UII ce sacs EE AEEA 4 7 Canopies and Hoods ceeeee 3 7 EMERGENCY OFF Button Option L45 4 Canopy to Increase the Degree of 35 Protection to IP21 eect 3 8 EMER
208. eeenaeeeeneaaees 9 25 9 2 9 Simulation OPSratiOn essien iia eee tence estes edu e dads a etete deidad diaa 9 26 9 3 Extended Functions a28 n a el ie ieee ae es ede id eee 9 27 9 3 1 Technology Controlletiic ccccheedececetensescicnetecee sens sieeendectze cotucceequduenevenunseessocnanedesteee abuceest 9 27 9 3 1 17 DESPON yia ition iia Wide oats 9 27 9 35152 COMMISSIONING EEEE E E E 9 28 9 3 1 3 Example Liquid Level Control ngriheni api eda Eaa 9 29 9 3 2 Extended Braking Control anain nii bieeesi tn terion eaten ene et 9 30 9 32 DESCKIPTON essai fenceecateichtvscucnteessehest eeivedsuceadnerteneeentucs ivbeatonueatetdeavbusteesecctaeeavhestesaeemere 9 30 9 3 2 2 COMMISSIONING esie iad ee deece cng eee Abea tic ae ea eii eaa ae aa a ae ia r eiia 9 30 9322 3 e T eE E EE A A E A AT TAT 9 30 9 3 3 Extended Monitoring Functions sesseseesssiesiiiiesiisrrtiissiitiesiinnttiinntiitnsiiiteniinteeinnnrtn nant 9 32 9 3 371 Descriptions seeaeediccbestled auenvbeloessh ie eseo deepens oodavien aston Deki auenr dines 9 3 3 2 Commissioning 9 4 Monitoring and Protection FUnctions ccececeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeneeeeeneaees 9 34 9 4 1 Protecting Power Components General 0 eeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeseneeeeeenaeeeeeeneees 9 34 9 4 2 Thermal Monitoring and Overload RESPONSES cee cceeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeens 9 35 9 4 3 Block Protection job ee an eea cies bcee Aa EAA aE EA A RA taste
209. efined by the standards association for measurement and control systems in the chemical industry NAMUR recommendation NE37 that is certain device functions are assigned to fixed terminals The inputs and outputs assigned to the terminals fulfill PELV protective extra low voltage and protective separation requirements The terminal block only contains the necessary functions Unlike the NAMUR recommendation optional terminals are not available The 24 V DC is supplied on the system side via terminals A1 X2 1 3 protected with 1 A within the converter You must ensure that the PELV safety requirements protective extra low voltage with protective separation are fulfilled To monitor the temperature of explosion proof motors option BOO features a PTC thermistor release mechanism with PTB approval Shutdown if limit value is exceeded The associated PTC sensor is connected to terminal A1 X3 90 91 The terminal block is divided into three sections e X1 X2 for the power connections e A1 X2 for signal cables which must fulfill PELV requirements with electrical separation e A1 X3 for connecting the motor PTC thermistor detector Connection Table 4 44 Terminal block A1 X2 connection for 24 V supply Terminal 1 Designation Preassignment Comments M Reference conductor 2 P24 V 24 V DC supply Protected internally with fuse 1 A 3 P24 V 24 V DC outgoing circuit Ma
210. egory 1 24 V AC controlled stop L83 Thermistor motor protection unit with PTB approval warning L84 Thermistor motor protection unit with PTB approval shutdown e L86 PT100 evaluation unit for 6 PT100 sensors L87 Insulation monitoring M60 Additional shock hazard protection e Increase in degree of protection M21 IP21 degree of protection e M23 IP23 degree of protection e M54 IP54 degree of protection e Mechanical options MOG Plinth 100 mm high RAL 7022 M07 Cable wiring compartment 200 mm high RAL 7035 e d M13 Line connection from above M78 Motor connection from above e M90 Top mounted crane transport assembly for cabinets e Miscellaneous options G61 Customer terminal block extension TM31 e K50 Sensor Module SMC30 for detecting the actual motor speed L19 Connection for external auxiliary equipment controlled max 10 A L50 Cabinet illumination with service socket L55 Cabinet standstill heating L61 25 kW braking unit L62 50 kW braking unit e Yo09 Special paint finish for cabinet e Languages D58 Documentation in English French e D60 Documentation in English Spanish D80 Documentation in English Italian e T58 Type plate and operator panel in English French e e T60 Type plate and operator panel in English Spanish e e T80 Type plate and operator panel in English Italian e Industry specific options chemicals BOO NAMUR terminal bl
211. emperatures of different motor components stators core rotors can be determined indirectly using a temperature model Connecting temperature sensors KTY84 or PTC100 to the customer terminal block TM31 terminal X522 7 8 allows the motor temperature to be determined directly In this way accurate start temperatures are available immediately when the motor is switched on again or after a power failure Temperature Measurement via KTY The device is connected to terminals X522 7 anode and X522 8 cathode on the customer terminal block in the forward direction of the diode The measured temperature is limited to between 48 C and 248 C and is made available for further evaluation SINAMICS G150 Set the KTY temperature sensor type p4100 2 Activate motor temperature measurement via the external sensor p0600 10 When the alarm threshold is reached set via p0604 factory setting 120 C alarm A7910 is triggered Parameter p0610 can be used to set how the drive responds to the alarm triggered 0 No response only alarm no reduction of _max 1 Alarm with reduction of _max and fault F701 1 2 Alarm and fault F7011 no reduction of _max When the fault threshold is reached set via p0605 factory setting 155 C fault F7011 is triggered in conjunction with the setting in p0610 Operating Instructions 9 39 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 Temperature Measurement via PTC
212. en the cabinet Disconnect the 24 V DC power supply and communications line on the operator panel Open the cover of the battery compartment Remove the old battery Insert the new battery Close the cover of the battery compartment Reconnect the 24 V DC power supply and communications line Close the cabinet WARNING AN To ensure that no data is lost when you replace the battery you must replace the battery within one minute SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 39 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 Fig 11 18 Replacing the backup battery in the cabinet operator panel SINAMICS G150 11 40 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing 11 5 Reforming the DC Link Capacitors Description If the cabinet unit is kept in storage for more than 2 years the DC link capacitors have to be reformed If this is not carried out the cabinet may be damaged when the supply voltage is switched on If the cabinet is commissioned within two years of its date of manufacture the DC link capacitors do not need to be reformed The date of manufacture is indicated in the serial number on the type plate see Device Overview NOTE It is important that the period of storage is calculated as of the date of manufacture and not as of the delivery date Procedure The DC link capacitors are reformed by applying the rated voltage without load for at least 30 minutes at room temperatur
213. enaeeesnneaeenenaeeeesenaes 6 59 6 7 7 8 Operator Input Inhibit Parameterization Inhibit 2 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeeeees 6 59 6 7 8 Faults and Alarm iieiea aitei a a apie a eiar addien 6 61 6 7 9 Saving the Parameters Permanently 0 ccc eeeseeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeenneeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeenneeeeneaa 6 63 6 7 10 Parameterization Errors icc iiccecessedscdeastaetay raae pa ia yeas devtiedevbveeiendetheedea iets 6 63 7 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 1 7 1 Chapter Contentn evi E Anette es A 8 Sate TE 7 1 7 2 Setpoint Channel evcess fans cass pesca aea ea Sekgalacecnagchccecsdasadteiassscecuaaveastacaed beats 7 3 7 2 4 SEIPOMAE Addit ON esie ceed sss tts dasea ben a a g teegeadentbieieodedditnenpustacts tcozeddehyees cnseugtets the 7 3 7 2 2 Direction of Rotation ChangQeover eeeccceceecceceeseeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeaeeeenneeeentnaeeeeneaeees 7 4 7 2 3 Suppression Speed and Minimum Speed eecceeeeseeeeeeeceeeseneeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeaes 7 5 7 2 4 Speed Limitation imeni n R eagles need o i 7 6 7 2 5 Ramp Function Generator 2 0 2 2 cccceececeeeeeeceaececeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeesescaaeeeeeeeseseequeaeeeeesesensneaees 7 7 7 3 WA COMUON EEE E EAT E EE EA E E AE T 7 9 7 3 1 Voltage BOOS cirie ah ea n a a a a a a a aiaiai 7 12 7 3 2 Slip COMpensSation sanis aie ia tence da eaae e ad A EEEa iiaae dada 7 15 7 4 Vector Speed Torque Control With Without Encoder cceteeeeees 7 16 74 1 Vector Control W
214. ent and Speed Controller Optimization ee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeee 9 5 9 2 2 WG Gomtrol REEE ER EEE T uadedense uses tonte sed edsnsene N T 9 8 9 2 3 Automatic ReStatts 5 cs an alanine eter ee teenie ieee eevee 9 13 9 2 4 Flying Restat oaair n aeaa doen pel TAa A a eA PN baer 9 14 9 2 4 1 Flying Restart Without Encoder eeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeesnaeeeeeenaeeeenneeeeees 9 15 9 2 4 2 Flying Restart with Encoder eccceesseeeeseeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeseneeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeesneeeenenaeeeeneeeees 9 16 9 24 39 Par mtefS inos ces gees ected eee eedi tea diaa sede diced t Eada dude leeedan te goeeodneedsnegbescdedsteectnedteecderd 9 16 9 2 5 Motor Changeover cs ssecctiev esses n a a as 9 17 922 5751 DESC PHOM ccs secneccstoen i bedeasie a EE aiaa a Neea dates a oaeiai i o aiei 9 17 9 2 5 2 Example of changing over between two MOtOTS 0 eee eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeenes 9 17 9 2 5 3 Example of a star delta Changeover eee ce eeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeenneeeene 9 19 9 2 5 4 FUNCTION GIA GrAIM 22 2 ieri aeie ieii a aa taaa e a ddaa 9 21 9 2 5 5 Paramete S a a a AE a A A A E AE A aa a a aat 9 21 9 2 6 Friction Characteristics sirri pee aae a aie aa aa Aeae eaaa aas 9 22 9 2 7 Increasing the Output Frequency ee eeeeeeeseeeeeneeeceeneeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeaeeesneeeeeenaeeeenenaees 9 24 9 2 8 Runtime Operating Hours Counter 0 ceeceeeseeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeeeaeeesneee
215. eplacing 11 24 Extended Functions eeeeeee 9 27 Control via PROFIBUS ee 6 34 Extended Monitoring Functions 9 32 Control word 1 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 37 6 38 External fault Tisei 10 11 Customer terminal block 4 23 External Fault 3 10 11 Customer Terminal Block Extension Option External Supply cceeeceseeeecereeeees 4 21 G61 A E EAT 4 54 External Warning 1 eese 10 10 D F Data Backup 0 c cccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 41 F7860 External Fault 3 000 0 10 11 Data Sets erein heidi 6 8 F7862 External Fault 3 10 11 Date of Manufacture 2 13 Factory Settings 2 5 42 DDS Fan COPYING nR E R 6 12 Type FX Replacing 11 26 Decrease Key isssseerriersrrierrerinsrrrnesees 6 58 Type GX Replacing eee 11 28 Defining the operation screen 6 51 Type HX Replacing ceeee 11 30 Definitions Safety cceeeeeteeeees 1 1 Type JX Replacing ceeee 11 34 Derat wesc aa T 12 3 Fan Voltage Adjusting 4 17 Derating Data ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 3 Paule rea a heidi tiae 10 10 Current Derating as a Function of the Faults and Alarms 0006 6 61 10 10 Pulse Frequency n e 12 5 Features a a adenine 2 2 Desa E T 2 3 Filter Mats Replacing cceeeee 11 5 Device OvervieW ssssesreserrrensrrreser 2 1 Firmware Upgrading 0 ccceeece 11 42 DidGnOSis 2 nii een 10 2 Fixed Setpoint cc eeee
216. er of the command data to which the data is to be copied target 3 p0809 2 1 Start copying Copying is finished when pO0809 2 0 Copying the Drive Data Set DDS Set parameter p0819 as follows 1 p0819 0 Number of the drive data set to be copied source 2 p0819 1 Number of the drive data set to which the data is to be copied target 3 p0819 2 1 Start copying Copying is finished when p0819 2 0 SINAMICS G150 6 12 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation Copying a motor data set MDS Set parameter p0139 as follows 1 p0139 0 Number of the motor data set to be copied source 2 p0139 1 Number of the motor data set which should be copied into target 3 p0139 2 1 Start copying Copying is finished when p0139 2 0 Function Diagrams e 8560 Command data set CDS e 8565 Drive data set DDS e 8570 Encoder data set EDS e 8575 Motor data set MDS Parameters e p0120 Power module data sets PDS number e p0130 Motor data sets MDS number e p0139 0 2 Copy motor data set MDS e p0140 Encoder data sets EDS number e p0170 Command data set CDS number e p0180 Drive data set DDS number e p0809 0 2 Copy command data set CDS e p0810 Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 0 e p0811 Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 1 e p0812 Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 2 e p0813 Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 3 e p0819 0 2 Copy drive data set DDS e p0820 BI Drive data se
217. erating Instructions 6 45 Operation 06 05 6 7 Control via the Operator Panel 6 7 1 Operator Panel AOP30 Overview Description The operator panel can be used for the following activities Parameterization commissioning Monitoring status variables Controlling the drive Diagnosing faults and alarms All the functions can be accessed via a menu Your starting point is the main menu which you can always call up using the yellow MENU key Mia Re ce el The dialog screen for the main menu can be called Operation display up at any time using the MENU key Fault memory alarm memory To navigate within the main menu options choose Commissioning Service F2 or F3 Help A v Select Fig 6 26 Main menu 6 46 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 7 2 Menu Structure of the Operator Panel en Operation display Parameterization Act Faults List of previous faults Act Alarms DO selection All parameters Parameter groups Fault memory Alarm memory Faults Faults History Alarms Alarms History Commissioning Service Control settings Display settings Define operating screen Help texts are available Set date time for all alarms and faults Language switch AOP settings Reset AOP settings Software database AOP diagnosis version Battery status Communication Safety locks Operat lock Keyboard Parameteriz lock Access
218. erating Instructions 7 33 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 These cyclical values therefore limit the torque setpoint at the speed controller output torque input or indicate the instantaneous max possible torque If the torque setpoint is limited then this is displayed using parameter p1407 e 1407 8 Upper torque limit active e 1407 9 Lower torque limit active Function diagram FP 6060 6630 6640 SINAMICS G150 7 34 Operating Instructions Output Terminals 8 8 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on e Analog outputs e Digital outputs tf Closed loop Setpoint channel control Monitoring functions Functions Protection functions Function Diagrams To supplement this operating manual the documentation folder contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle of the SINAMICS G150 The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating manual The page numbers 8xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the documentation CD in the SINAMICS G List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 8 1 Output Terminals 06 05 8 2 Analog Outputs Description The customer terminal block features two analog outp
219. erature monitoring for the heat sink and inlet air is set to 5 C that is the Overtemperature overload alarm is triggered at 15 C or 5 C below the shutdown threshold The parameterized responses are induced via p0290 simultaneously when the alarm is output Possible responses include e Reduction in pulse frequency p0290 2 3 This is a highly effective method of reducing losses in the power section since switching losses account for a high proportion of overall losses In many applications a temporary reduction in pulse frequency is tolerable in order to maintain the process Disadvantage Reducing the pulse frequency increases the current ripple which in turn can increase the torque ripple on the motor shaft with low inertia load thereby increasing the noise level Reducing the pulse frequency does not affect the dynamic response of the current control circuit since the sampling time for the current control circuit remains constant SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 35 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 Reducing the output frequency p0290 0 2 This variant is recommended when you do not need to reduce the pulse frequency or the pulse frequency has already been set to the lowest level The load should also have a characteristic similar to a fan that is a quadratic torque characteristic with falling speed Reducing the output frequency has the effect of significantly reducing the converter o
220. erface X524 electronics power supply X520 TTL with open circuit monitoring HTL TTL without X521 open circuit monitoring X531 Shield connection PE conductor connection M4 1 8 Nm Fig 4 15 SMC30 sensor module SINAMICS G150 4 50 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 15 2 Connection X520 Encoder Connection 1 for TTL Encoder with Open Circuit Monitoring Table 4 41 Encoder connection X520 Pin Signal name Technical specifications 1 Reserved do not use 2 Reserved do not use A 3 Reserved do not use Q 4 P_Encoder 5 V 24 V Sensor power supply fead 5 P_Encoder 5 V 24 V Sensor power supply O O 6 P_Sense Sense input sensor power supply z O 7 M_Encoder M Ground for sensor power supply O 8 Reserved do not use 5 O 9 M_Sense Ground sense input O 10 R Reference signal R eee 7 11 R Inverted reference signal R Q 12 B Inverted incremental signal B 113 B Incremental signal B 14 A Inverted incremental signal A 15 A Incremental signal A Plug type 15 pin socket CAUTION The sensor power supply can be parameterized to 5 V or 24 V The sensor may be destroyed if you enter the wrong parameters SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 51 Electrical Installation 06 05 X521 X531 Encoder Connection 2 for HTL TTL Encoder Wit
221. es 4 9 46 Electrically connecting separately shipped transport units eeee 4 11 46 1 Connecting the PE DUSCS Zeisler napona Ni dadasarna da eatp tiiri aerau giia 4 11 4 6 2 Connecting the DC link CONNECTIONS 0 0 eee cette ee etneeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeneeeeneaa 4 11 46 3 Connecting up the power supply and the signal Cables ce eeeeeeeseeeeeereeeeenneeeeeenes 4 12 4 6 4 Connecting up the DRIVE CLIQ topOlogy eee eeeceeeeeneeeeeereeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeseenaeeeenneeeeee 4 12 4 7 Power Connections irean bebe ee nade dl Epa aaea EEA EaR eaea deena 4 13 4 7 1 Connection Cross Sections Cable Lengths cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeesennaees 4 13 4 7 2 Opening and closing the disconnect SWitCN cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 4 14 4 7 3 Connecting the Motor and Power Cables 00 cceccceessneeeeeeeeeeenneeeeesaeeeseeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 4 15 4 7 4 Adjusting the Fan Voltage U1 T10 ecccceeccceeeeeceecneceeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeesesenaeaeeeeeeneeesnaeees 4 17 4 7 5 Adjusting the Internal Power Supply A1 T10 Version A Only 4 19 4 7 6 Removing the Connection Bracket for the Interference Suppression Capacitor with Operation from an Ungrounded Supply eccccceeeeeceeeeneeeeeeenneeeeneeeeeesneeeseeneeeenneeeeneaa 4 20 48 External Supply of the Auxiliary Supply from a Secure Line eee 4 21 4 8 1 230 VAC Auxiliary Supply esn
222. ess encountered during transit and in the recipient country The notes on the packaging for transportation storage and proper handling must be observed The devices must be carried on a wooden palette when transported with fork lift trucks When the devices are unpacked they can be transported using the optional transport eyebolts option M90 or rails on the cabinet unit The load must be distributed evenly Heavy blows or impacts must be avoided during transit and when the devices are being set down for example Permissible ambient temperatures Ventilation 25 C to 70 C class 2K3 to IEC 60 721 3 2 Up to 40 C for max 24 hours NOTES regarding built in system side components If built in system side components are to be installed on doors or side panels you must take into account the following points The degree of protection IP20 IP21 IP23 IP54 must not be reduced as a result The electromagnetic compatibility of the cabinet unit must not be adversely affected When control elements are installed on side or rear panels the panels must be grounded separately SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Mechanical Installation NOTES regarding damage in transit e Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the device before accepting the delivery from the transportation company e Ensure that you have received all the items specified on the delivery note e Notify the transportation company i
223. et units before selecting the motor and entering the motor data via the operator panel e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Settings to monitor the feedback signal from the main contactor or circuit breaker for 12 pulse infeed and connected DC link The feedback signal contacts of the main contactors and the circuit breakers are connected in series in the factory and connected to digital input 7 of the CU320 Control Unit After the drive unit has been commissioned the feedback signal monitoring function must be activated This is realized using parameter p0860 Vector 722 7 Control_Unit Settings via the AOP30 Select parameter p0860 Line contactor feedback signal eters and connect to digital input DI7 A 5 38 lt MENU gt lt Parameter gt lt All parameters gt lt Selection gt select p0860 lt change gt select 01 CU lt OK gt lt Key F2 gt lt Key F2 gt lt Key F3 gt lt OK gt select r0722 lt OK gt select 07 DI 7 X132 4 lt OK gt DANGER If you do not activate the monitoring function of the feedback signal of the main contactors or the circuit breaker then the drive can be powered up even if the main contactor or circuit breaker fails In this case th
224. evel An expert level which must only be used by expert personnel is required for certain actions You need a password to activate this level To activate expert mode enter code number 47 The Expert access level is not stored permanently which means that it must be reactivated every time the power is switched on SINAMICS G150 6 60 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 7 8 Faults and Alarms Indicating Faults and Alarms If a fault occurs the drive displays the fault and or alarm on the operator panel Faults are indicated by the red FAULT LED and a fault screen is automatically displayed You can use the F1 Help function to call up information about the cause of the fault and how to remedy it To acknowledge a stored fault choose F5 Ack Any alarms are displayed by the yellow ALARM LED The system also displays a note in the status bar providing information on the cause What is a Fault A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional unwanted status This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered for example by the winding temperature monitor for the motor The faults are displayed and can be reported to a higher level control system via PROFIBUS In the factory default setting the message converter fault is also sent to a relay output Once you have rectified the cause of the fault you have to acknowledge the fault message What is an
225. f causes and possible remedies choose F1 Help The fault value which allows more effective diagnosis is specified in the second line in Help To acknowledge the fault choose F5 Ack Once you have successfully acknowledged the fault the system returns to the calling screen If the fault cannot be acknowledged the fault screen continues to be displayed To display the last eight faults choose F3 Old The system then displays seven acknowledged faults 1st 7th fault Alarms Displays the current content of the alarm buffer Alarms present at the time the screen was opened are displayed accordingly The display can be refreshed with F5 Refresh To delete the alarm buffer and rebuild it so that it only contains the currently active alarms choose F3 Delete SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 7 6 Commissioning Service Menu 6 7 6 1 Drive Commissioning This option enables you to re commission the drive from the main menu 6 7 6 2 Device Commissioning In this menu you can enter the device commissioning status directly This is the only way that you can reset parameters to the factory setting for example You can use this menu to create motor data sets in subsequent drive software versions 6 7 6 3 AOP30 Settings Control Settings This defines the settings for the control keys in LOCAL mode See 6 7 7 Display Settings In this menu you set the lighting brightness and contra
226. free free free free free STW 1 free free free free free free free free free SINAMICS G150 6 36 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 6 4 Description of Control Words and Setpoints Overview Table 6 8 Overview of control words and setpoints Abbreviation Description Parameter Function diagram CTW 1 Control word 1 Interface Mode SINAMICS See Table 6 9 FP2442 MICROMASTER p2038 0 CTW 1 Control word 1 Interface Mode PROFIdrive See Table 6 10 FP2441 VIK NAMUR p2038 2 N_setp Speed setpoint p1070 FP3030 PCS7_x PCS7 specific setpoints Control Word 1 CTW 1 Interface Mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 Table 6 9 Control word 1 Interface Mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 Bit Meaning Explanation Operating BICO condition 0 Deceleration on the deceleration ramp 0 OFF1 OFF1 p1121 then pulse block main contactor if 0 fitted is opened 1 BI p0840 1 ON 0 Coast to stop OFF2 0 Pulse block main contactor if fitted is BI p0844 opened 1 1 BI p0845 1 Do not coast to stop Note Control signal OFF2 is generated by ANDing BI p0844 and BI p0845 0 Deceleration on the rapid stop ramp 0 Fast stop OFF3 p1115 then pulse block main contactor if 2 fitted is opened 1 BI p0848 1 No emergency stop Note Control signal OFF3 is generated by ANDing BI p0848 and BI p0849 1 Enable inverter pulse ena
227. function module has been activated Function Diagrams FD 7950 Technology controller fixed values FD 7954 Technology controller motorized potentiometer FD 7958 Technology controller closed loop control SINAMICS G150 9 28 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 1 3 Example Liquid Level Control The objective here is to maintain a constant level in the container This is carried out by means of a variable speed pump in conjunction with a sensor for measuring the level The level is determined via an analog input e g AIO TM31 and sent to the technology controller The level setpoint is defined in a fixed setpoint The resulting controlled variable is used as the setpoint for the speed controller In this example a terminal module TM31 is used Sensor Fig 9 8 Liquid level control application Tec_reg Kp Tec_reg Tn p2280 p2285 Ramp function generator Tec_reg setpoint p2253 Tec_reg type p2263 Xs tp n_setp1 7 p1155 aN Xact Actual value p2264 Fig 9 9 Liquid level control controller structure Key control parameters e p1155 12294 n_setp1 downstream of RFG FD 3080 e p2253 12224 Technology controller setpoint effective via fixed setpoint FD 7950 e p2263 1 D component in fault signal FD 7958 e p2264 r4055 Actual value signal Xactua via AIO of TM31 FD 9566 e p2280 Kp Determine by optimization
228. g BICO parameter p1503 CI torque setpoint or p1511 Cl supplementary torque setpoint The supplementary torque acts both for closed loop torque as well as for the closed loop speed control As a result of this characteristic a pre control torque can be implemented for the closed loop speed control using the supplementary torque setpoint NOTE For safety reasons assignments to fixed torque setpoints are currently not possible If energy is regenerated and cannot be injected back into the line supply then a Braking Module with connected braking resistor must be used PI nN 4 C speed Speed setpoint controller Ti Torque Speed actual value setpoint M_set 7503 C 0 p1300 Mctrl 1 M_ctrl active p1501 1 M_ctrl active 1407 2 FP2520 7 1406 12 M_supplementary 1 1515 1511 C M_supplementary1 scal 1512 C M_supplementary2 scal M_supplementary 2 1513 C Fig 7 16 Closed loop speed torque control SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 31 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 The total of the two torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the speed control torque setpoint Above the maximum speed p1082 a speed limiting controller reduces the torque limits in order to prevent the drive from accelerating any further A real closed loop torque control with a speed that automatically sets itself is only possible in the closed loop control range but not in t
229. g component Setpoints can be specified via two connector inputs The setpoints can be scaled via parameters p2255 and p2256 A ramp function generator in the setpoint channel can be used to set the setpoint ramp up ramp down time via parameters p2257 and p2258 The setpoint and actual value channel each have a smoothing element The smoothing time can be set via parameters p2261 and p2265 The setpoints can be specified via separate fixed setpoints p2201 to p2215 the motorized potentiometer or via the field bus e g PROFIBUS Pre control can be integrated via a connector input The output can be scaled via parameter p2295 and the control direction reversed It can be limited via parameters p2291 and p2292 and interconnected as required via a connector output r2294 The actual value can be integrated for example via an analog input on the TM31 If a PID controller has to be used for control reasons the D component is switched to the setpoint actual value difference p2263 1 unlike in the factory setting This is always necessary when the D component is to be effective even if the reference variable changes The D component can only be activated when p2274 gt 0 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 27 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 3 1 2 Commissioning The technology controller function module can be activated by running the commissioning Wizard Parameter r0108 16 indicates whether the
230. g the motor identification 31 Select the required data Technological application Pumps and fans edge modulation is enabled default setting Standard drive VECTOR edge modulation is not enabled Motor identification In most cases Motor data identification for rotating motor is the correct default setting for SINAMICS G150 32 Click Continue gt SINAMICS G150 5 24 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Selecting the PROFIBUS Telegram Configuration Drive_unit_0 PROFIBUS process data exchange drive Free telegram configuration with BILY M Motor holding brake MEncoder MDefaults of the setp MDrive functions Fig 5 26 Selecting the PROFIBUS telegram 33 Under PROFIBUS PZD telegram select the PROFIBUS telegram type Telegram types Standard telegram 1 VIK NAMUR telegram 20 PCS7 telegram 352 Free telegram configuration with BICO 34 Click Continue gt SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 25 Commissioning 06 05 Entering Key Parameters Configuration Drive_unit_0 Important parameters MControl structure Drive setting Calculation of the rr M Motor holding brake MEncoder MDefaults of the setp MDrive functions IMJPROFIBUS process Fig 5 27 Key parameters 35 Enter the required parameter values NOTE STARTER provides tool tips if you position your cursor on the required field without cl
231. gh injection the speed setpoint rO062 is delayed with the same smoothing time p1442 or p1452 as the actual value r1445 This ensures that no target actual difference r0064 occurs at the controller input during acceleration which would be attributable solely to the signal propagation time When speed pre control is activated the speed setpoint must be specified continuously or without a higher interference level avoids sudden torque changes An appropriate signal can be generated by smoothing the setpoint or activating the rounding off function of the ramp function generator p1130 p1131 SINAMICS G150 7 24 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control The starting time r0345 Tstart is a measure for the total moment of inertia J of the motor and defines that time in which the unloaded drive can accelerate from standstill up to the rated motor speed p0311 Mmot rated with the rated motor torque r0333 Nmot rated 2n n 10345 Totar J lt motrated _ p0341 p0342 2 POStt 60 Mmot rated 60 r0333 If these basic conditions are in line with the application the starting time can be used as the lowest value for the ramp up or ramp down time NOTE The ramp up and ramp down times p1120 p1121 of the ramp function generator in the setpoint channel should be set accordingly so that the motor speed can track the setpoint during acceleration and braking This ensures that speed controller pre c
232. gned motor data set MDS p0187 to p0189 up to 3 assigned encoder data sets EDS e Various control parameters e g Fixed speed setpoints p1001 to p1015 Speed limits min max p1080 p1082 Characteristic data of ramp function generator 91120 ff Characteristic data of controller p1240 ff The parameters that are grouped together in the drive data set are identified in the SINAMICS parameter list by Data Set DDS and are assigned an index 0 n It is possible to parameterize several drive data sets You can switch easily between different drive configurations control type motor encoder by selecting the corresponding drive data set One drive object can manage up to 32 drive data sets The number of drive data sets is configured with p0180 Binector inputs p0820 to p0823 are used to select a drive data set They represent the number of the drive data set 0 to 31 in binary format where p0823 is the most significant bit e p0820 BI Command data set selection CDS bit 0 e p0821 BI Command data set selection CDS bit 1 e p0822 BI Command data set selection CDS bit 2 e p0823 BI Command data set selection CDS bit 3 Supplementary conditions and recommendations e Recommendation for the number of drive data sets for a drive The number of drive data sets for a drive should correspond to the options for switchover The following must therefore apply p0180 DDS 2 p0130 MDS e Max number of DDS for one driv
233. h linear characteristic V f control with linear characteristic and FCC V f control with parabolic characteristic V f control with parameterizable characteristic V f control with independent voltage setpoint 9 Click Continue gt SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Configuring the Drive Unit Properties Configuration Drive_unit_0 Drive setting Motor holding brake Encoder 400 Defaults of the setpoint Drive functions IPROFIBUS process da JI mportant parameters Summary Fig 5 15 Configuring the drive unit properties 10 In Standard choose the appropriate standard for your motor The following standards are defined IEC motor 50 Hz kW Line frequency 50 Hz motor data entry in kW NEMA 60 Hz hp Line frequency 60 Hz motor data entry in hp 11 Under Supply voltage enter the appropriate voltage of the cabinet unit 12 Click Continue gt SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 15 Commissioning 06 05 Configuring the Motor and Selecting the Motor Type 5 16 Configuration Drive_unit_0 Motor Control structure S a 2 Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the setpoin Drive functions J Read out motor again IPROFIBUS process da ed ah parameters 1LA8 standard induction motor ha ummary Fig 5 16 Configuring the motor and selecting the motor type 13 In Name enter a name for the motor
234. h positively driven auxiliary switches 1 NC contact 1INO contact 10830 rosso J CAD DME p083110 i k2 p083111 _ i a Fig 9 6 Example motor changeover SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 17 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 Table 9 1 Settings for the motor changeover example Parameter Settings Comment p0130 2 Configure 2 MDS p0180 2 Configure 2 DDS p0186 0 1 0 1 The MDS are assigned the DDS p0820 Digital input DDS selection The digital input to change over the motor is selected p0821 to p0824 0 via DDS selection Binary coding is used p0820 bit 0 etc p0827 0 1 0 1 The bits from p0830 are assigned to the MDS If e g p0827 0 0 then when selecting MDSO bit p0830 0 is set via DDSO p0830 0 and Digital outputs auxiliary The digital outputs for the auxiliary contactors are p0830 1 contactors assigned bits p0831 0 1 Digital inputs auxiliary The digital inputs for the feedback signal of the motor switches contactors are assigned p0833 0 1 0 0 The drive controls the contactors and the pulse cancellation Motor changeover sequence 1 9 18 Pulse cancellation The pulses are cancelled after selecting a new drive data set using p0820 to p0824 Open the motor contactor Motor contactor 1 is opened r0830 0 and the status bit Motor changeover active r0835 0 is set
235. he DC links must be connected with one another the disconnect switch Q98 Q99 must be closed The feedback signal contacts of the main contactors and the circuit breakers are connected in series in the factory and are connected to digital input 7 of the Control Unit When commissioning the drive the monitoring function of the feedback signals must be activated This is realized using parameter p0860 Vector 722 7 Control Unit Motors with two electrically isolated winding systems and also motors with one winding system can be used SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Device Overview When connecting a motor with one winding system the following special features apply The motor connections of the Power Modules can be connected to one another per phase Parameter p7003 winding system must be set to 0 one winding systems Ifa motor reactor is not being used option L08 the minimum motor cable lengths must be used refer to Chapter 4 Edge modulation is not possible When connecting a motor with separate winding systems the following special points apply Every motor connection of a Power Module must be connected to its own winding system Parameter p7003 winding system must be set to 1 several separate winding systems or motors Edge modulation is not possible SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 2 7 Device Overview 06 05 2 3 2 2 8 Version C This version is pa
236. he open loop control range of the sensorless closed loop vector control In the open loop controlled range the torque setpoint changes the setpoint speed via a ramp up integrator integrating time p1499 x p0341 x p0342 This is the reason that sensorless closed loop torque control close to standstill is only suitable for applications that require an accelerating torque there and no load torque e g traversing drives Closed loop torque control with encoder does not have this restriction If a quick stop command OFF3 is issued when torque control is active a switchover is made automatically to speed control and the drive is decelerated For closed loop torque control 91501 1 when a stop command is issued OFF1 a changeover is not made Instead the system waits until a higher level closed loop control decelerates the drive to a standstill so that the pulses can be inhibited This is necessary in order to allow master and slave drives to stop together in a coordinated fashion For p1300 22 or 23 when an OF F1 is issued then the drive is drive is directly powered down the same as for OFF 2 Function diagram FP 6060 Parameters e p0341 Motor moment of inertia e p0342 Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia e p1300 Open loop closed loop control mode e p1499 Accelerating for torque control scaling e p1501 Change over between closed loop speed torque control e p1503 Torque setpoint e p1511 Supplementary torque 1 e p1
237. he status bar providing information on the cause Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault alarm buffer along with time the error occurred and the time it was rectified The time stamp relates to the relative system time in milliseconds r0969 What is a Fault A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional unwanted status This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered for example from the winding temperature monitor for the asynchronous motor The faults are displayed and can be reported to a higher level control system via PROFIBUS In the factory default setting the message converter fault is also sent to a relay output Once you have rectified the cause of the fault you have to acknowledge the fault message What is an Alarm An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive It does not result in the drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged Alarms are self acknowledging that is they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been eliminated SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 10 9 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 06 05 10 3 10 3 1 Causes Remedy 10 10 Overview of Faults and Alarms If a fault occurs the drive indicates the fault and or alarm Faults and alarms are listed in a fault alarm list together with the following information e Fault alarm number e Standard drive res
238. hed BO r1407 7 l M or P limit reached 0 1 M or P limit reached 12 Reserved a Alarm motor 1 Motor overtemperature alarm active BO overtemperature 0 Motor overtemperature alarm not active r2135 14 1 Motor rotates forwards 14 Motor rotates forwards BO r2197 3 n_act gt 0 0 Motor not rotating forwards 1 No alarm present 0 Alarm power module 0 Alarm power module thermal overload BO 13 th l load 2135 15 SITAS Neuen The overtemperature alarm for the power module is i active Status Word 1 Interface Mode PROFIdrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 Table 6 13 Status word 1 Interface Mode PROF Idrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 Bit Meaning Explanation BICO 1 Ready to power up Power supply on electronics initialized line i 0 Ready to power up contactor released if necessary pulses inhibited BO r0899 0 0 Not ready to power up 1 Ready to run Voltage at line module i e line contactor closed if 1 Ready to run used field being built up BO r0899 1 0 Not ready to power up Cause No ON command has been issued 6 42 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation Bit Meaning Operation enabled Explanation Operation enabled Enable electronics and pulses then ramp up to active setpoint Operation inhibited BICO BO r0899 2 Fault present Fault present The drive is faulty and is therefore out of service The drive switches to Power on inh
239. hold e p0606 Motor overtemperature timer e p0607 Temperature sensor fault timer e p0610 Response to motor overtemperature condition e p4100 TM31 temperature evaluation sensor type SINAMICS G150 9 40 Operating Instructions Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 1 0 10 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on the following e Troubleshooting e Service and support offered by Siemens AG Closed loop control Setpoint channel PROFIBUS A ig eT pe tte Ye ead aan fe Input terminals A60 TM31 BEK _ Output terminals A60 Namur terminals X2 ENR ERR IEI E EI AEN EI AARAA A E EAE OET E E R i Diagnosis Faults alarms Monitoring functions Functions Protection aama SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 10 1 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 06 05 Diagnosis This section describes procedures for identifying the causes of problems and the measures you need to take to rectify them If errors or malfunctions occur in the cabinet unit you must carefully check the possible causes and take the necessary steps to rectify them If you cannot identify the cause of the problem or you discover that components are defective your regional office or sales office should contact Siemens Service and describe the problem in more detail 10 2 Description NOTE 10 2 1 Diagnosis Using LEDs CU320 Control Unit A10 T
240. holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 320 390 390 Power block type FX GX GX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 800 x 2000 x600 800 x 2000x600 800 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 240 6 3NA3 244 6 3NA3 252 6 Rated current A 200 250 315 Size to DIN 43 620 1 2 2 2 Cond semi cond protection without option L26 3NE1 225 2 3NE1 227 2 3NE1 230 2 Rated current A 200 250 315 1 1 L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 24 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Table 12 25 Version A 660 V 690 V 3AC part 3 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GH32 6AA0 1GH33 3AA0 1GH34 1AA0 Rated motor output kW 250 315 400 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V
241. hort time current 160 aa Limiting short time current 150 Rated current continuous Base load current for high overload H Fig 12 2 High overload SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 12 7 Technical Data 06 05 12 3 12 8 Technical Data NOTE The current voltage and output values specified in the following tables are rated values The cables to the cabinet unit are protected with fuses with gL characteristic The connection cross sections are calculated for three core copper cables installed horizontally in free air at an ambient temperature of 30 C 86 F in accordance with DIN VDE 0298 Part 2 Group 5 and the recommended line protection in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 Part 430 AWG American Wire Gauge for cross sections lt 120 mm MCM Mille Circular Mil American wire gauge for cross sections gt 120 mm SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data 12 3 1 Cabinet Unit Version A 380 V 480 V 3AC Table 12 9 Version A 380 V 480 V 3AC part 1 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GE32 1AA0 1GE32 6AA0 1GE33 1AA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 110 132 160 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 150 200 250 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 239 294 348 Rated output current A 210 260 310 Base load current A 205 250 302 Base load current In A 178 23
242. hout Open Circuit Monitoring Table 4 42 Encoder connection X521 Terminal Signal name Technical specifications a i er A Incremental signal A N 2 A Inverted incremental signal A w amp 3 B Incremental signal B ms 4 B Inverted incremental signal B A 5 R Reference signal R 6 R Inverted reference signal R gt 7 CTRL Control signal 8 M Ground via inductivity Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 NOTE When unipolar HTL encoders are used A B and R on the terminal block must be jumpered with M_Encoder X531 Table 4 43 Encoder connection X531 Terminal Signal name Technical specifications a 1 P_Encoder 5 V 24 V Sensor power supply N 2 M_Encoder Ground for sensor power supply w 3 Temp Motor temperature sensing KTY84 1C130 Temperature sensor connection KTY84 gt 4 T we 1C130 PTC on 5 Reserved do not use x 6 Reserved do not use oo 7 Reserved do not use 8 Reserved do not use Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 NOTE Ensure that when the sensor is connected via terminals the cable shield must be placed on the module 4 52 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 15 3 Connection Examples Connection Example 1 HTL Encoder Bipolar Without Zero M
243. hreshold 1 p1221 This configuration is used for example when the drive is connected to a belt that is under tension loop accumulator in the steel industry SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions Emergency Brake If emergency braking is required electrical and mechanical braking is to take place simultaneously This can be achieved if OFF3 is used as a tripping signal for emergency braking p1219 0 r0898 2 OFF3 to apply brake immediately This is often used for example in calendar stacks cutting tools running gears and presses SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 31 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 3 3 Extended Monitoring Functions 9 3 3 1 Description The extended monitoring functions function module enables additional monitoring functions e Speed setpoint monitoring n_set lt p2161 e Speed setpoint monitoring n_set gt 0 e Load monitoring Load Monitoring This function monitors power transmission between the motor and the working machine Typical applications include V belts flat belts or chains that loop around the belt pulleys or cog wheels for drive and outgoing shafts and transfer the peripheral speeds and forces Load monitoring can be used here to identify blockages in the working machine and interruptions to the power transmission During load monitoring the current speed torque curve is compared
244. ibit once the fault has been acknowledged and the cause has been remedied The active faults are stored in the fault buffer No fault present No active fault in the fault buffer BO 12193 3 No OFF2 active coasting active OFF2 No OFF2 active Coasting active OFF2 An OFF2 command is present BO r0899 4 0 Fast stop active OFF3 No OFF3 active Coasting active OFF3 An OFF3 command is present BO r0899 5 Power on inhibit Power on inhibit A restart is only possible through OFF 1 followed by ON No power up inhibit Power up is possible BO r0899 6 Alarm present Alarm present The drive is operational again No acknowledgement necessary The active alarms are stored in the alarm buffer No alarm present No active alarm is present in the alarm buffer BO 12139 7 Speed setpoint actual value deviation within tolerance bandwidth Setpoint actual value monitoring within tolerance bandwidth Actual value within a tolerance bandwidth dynamic overshoot or shortfall permitted for t lt tmax n Nsetpt f fsetpt etc tmax can be parameterized Setpoint actual value monitoring not within tolerance band BO 12197 7 Control requested for PLC A 1 is always present Control from the PLC Local operation BO r0899 9 10 f or n comparison value reached or exceeded f or n comparison value reached or exceeded
245. ich if not avoided could result in death serious injury or substantial damage to property CAUTION Used together with the safety alert symbol this indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 1 1 Safety Information 06 05 CAUTION Used without the safety alert symbol this indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in damage to property IMPORTANT Used without the safety alert symbol this indicates a potential situation which if not avoided may lead to an undesirable result or state NOTE This symbol always appears in this documentation where further explanatory information is provided WARNING AN Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation Non observance of the warnings can result in severe personal injury or property damage Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and maintenance procedures described in this documentation The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on correct transport proper storage and installation as well as careful operation and maintenance National safety guidelines must be observed Certification The following certificates can be found under Safety and Operating
246. icking in the field 36 Click Continue gt SINAMICS G150 5 26 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Summary of the Drive Unit Data Configuration Drive_unit_0 Summary M Options MControl structure Drive setting Motor Motor holding brake MEncoder MDefaults of the setp Fig 5 28 Summary of the drive unit data 37 You can use the Copy function to copy the summary of the drive unit data displayed on the screen to a word processing program for subsequent use 38 Click Finish 39 Save your project to the hard disk by choosing Project gt Save SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 27 Commissioning 06 05 5 3 3 Additional and necessary settings for cabinet units with a high power rating After commissioning the drive units using STARTER for the following cabinet units additional settings must be made e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Settings to monitor the feedback signal from the main contactor or circuit breaker for 12 pulse infeed and connected DC link The feedback signal contacts of the main contactors and the circuit breakers are connected in series in the factory and are connected to digital input 7 of the Control Unit
247. il the drive object has been configured and you have switched from configuration mode to parameterization mode NOTE Each installed drive object is allocated a number between 0 and 63 during initial commissioning for unique identification Parameters e p0101 Drive object numbers e p0107 Drive object type e p0108 Drive object configuration e 10102 Number of drive objects SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 7 Operation 06 05 6 3 3 Data Sets Description For many applications it is beneficial if more than one parameter can be changed simultaneously by means of one external signal during operation when the system is ready for operation This can be carried out using indexed parameters whereby the parameters are grouped together in a data set according to their functionality and indexed Indexing allows several different settings which can be activated by switching the data set to be defined in each parameter NOTE The command and drive data sets can be copied in STARTER Drive gt Configuration gt Command data sets or Drive data sets tab The displayed command and drive data set can be selected in the appropriate STARTER screens SINAMICS G150 6 8 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation CDS Command Data Set CDS The BICO parameters binector and connector inputs are grouped together in a command data set These parameter are used to interconnect the signal sources of a drive se
248. in e eden sein aii 4 22 4 8 2 24 V DC Auxiliary SUPP Vi s92eccev ienne eee tobi snesd aa aR E EE sein ects 4 22 SINAMICS G150 IV Operating Instructions 06 05 Contents 4 9 Signal Connections 24ariu awd aalvien nie ed ahd hed ed 4 23 4 9 1 Customer Terminal Block AGO ccccceeeesecceceeeeeeeeeaeae cesses seeeanaeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 23 4 10 OME D CONMECUONS neeaae cceta see tegubieticentsta rests aedugecbidetidertseigete sete 4 30 4 10 1 Main Contactor Option L13 eee eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeseeaaeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeneaas 4 30 4 10 2 Sinusoidal Filter Option L15 oo ec ee eeneeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeenneeeeee 4 31 4 10 3 Connection for External Auxiliary Equipment Option L19 4 33 4 10 4 Main Circuit Breaker Incl Fuses Circuit Breaker Option L26 4 34 4 10 5 EMERGENCY OFF Button Option L45 0 cece ceceeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeseaeeees 4 35 4 10 6 Cabinet Illumination with Service Socket Option L50 0 eee eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaes 4 36 4 10 7 Cabinet Anti Condensation Heating Option L55 i eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeneeeenneeeeneaa 4 36 4 10 8 EMERGENCY OFF Category 0 230 V AC or 24 V DC Option L57 0 cee eeeeeeee 4 37 4 10 9 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1 230 V AC Option L59 ce eeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 4 38 4 10 10 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1 24 V DC Option L60 ee eeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 4 39
249. inamics tutorial lt Back Continue gt Fig 5 8 Inserting a drive unit 8 Choose the following data from the list fields Device Sinamics Type G150 Version v2 3 Bus address The corresponding bus address for the converter Entry in the Name field As required SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 9 Commissioning 06 05 5 10 9 Click Insert The selected drive unit is displayed in a preview window in the project Wizard Project Wizard Starter a i al 3 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drives Summary new project interface Please enter the drive unit data Preview m Drive unit amp Project Device Sinamics flo Drive_unit_0 Type amp 150 Version v2 3 Bus addr 34 os Name Drive_unit_1 Sinamics tutorial Insert Continue gt Cancel Fig 5 9 Inserting a drive unit 10 Click Continue gt A project summary is displayed Project Wizard Starter is 2 ai 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drives Summary new project interface The following settings have been selected Project name Project Storage location C Siemens Step7 S proj Interface CP5511 PROFIBUS Drive units Drive_unit_O SINAMICS_G150 Addr 33 vil Cancel Fig 5 10 Summary 11 Click Complete to finish creating a new drive unit project SINAMICS G150 Opera
250. ing 110 V 230 V AC must be provided externally and fused at max 16 A DANGER When the supply voltage for the cabinet anti condensation heating is connected dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit even when the main circuit breaker is open Connection 4 36 Table 4 25 Terminal block X240 connection for cabinet anti condensation heating Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 L1 110 V 230 V AC 2 N Power supply 3 PE Protective earth conductor Max connectable cross section 4 mm AWG 10 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 10 8 EMERGENCY OFF Category 0 230 V AC or 24 V DC Option L57 Description EMERGENCY OFF category 0 for uncontrolled stop to EN 60 204 This function involves disconnecting the cabinet from the supply via the line contactor bypassing the electronics by means of a safety combination to EN 60 204 1 The motor then coasts to a stop To prevent the main contactor from switching under load an OFF2 is triggered simultaneously The operational status is indicated by means of three LEDs A120 In the factory setting this version is set with a 230 V AC button circuit NOTE When the EMERGENCY OFF button is pressed the motor coasts to a standstill and the main motor voltage is disconnected to EN 60204 1 VDE 0113 Auxiliary voltages e g for separately driven fans or anti condensation heating may still
251. ing Resistor 0 6 32 Connection ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 31 CONNECIOS iin cde i nde 6 32 Ident NUMDET cccececeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 35 PROF Idrive NAMUR option B04 4 58 Protecting Power Components 9 34 Protection Functions c c cceeeeeee 9 34 PT100 Evaluation Unit Option L86 4 45 Q Qualifications Personnel Requirements 1 1 Qualified Personnel cccsccceeeerees 1 1 Quality ie ia a e atin 2 3 R Ramp Function Generator 05 7 7 Reference model ccceeeeettees 7 26 Reforming the DC Link Capacitors 11 41 Relay Outputs eeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeees 4 29 Removing the Interference Suppression Capacitors odene E tees 4 20 Replacement Fault messages eeen 11 42 Replacing Control Interface Board Type FX 11 18 Control Interface Board Type GX 11 20 Control Interface Board Type HX 11 22 Control Interface Board Type JX 11 24 Fan Type FX cccccecceeceeecseeeeeees 11 26 Fan Type GX cccccececesseeeceeeeeeees 11 28 Fan Type HX ccecceseeeceeeeeeees 11 30 Fan Type JX ccccceeeeeseeeeceereeeees 11 34 Filter Mats cccecceeeeeeeesecteeeeees 11 5 Power Block Type FX cen 11 6 Power Block Type GX 11 8 Power Block Type HX 11 10 Power Block Type JX 11 14 Replacing Component 08 11 5 Replacing the Backup Battery of the Cabinet Operator Pa
252. ing restrictions must be taken into account when a sinusoidal filter is used e The output frequency is limited to max 115 Hz at 500 600 V or 150 Hz at 380 480 V e The modulation type is permanently set to space vector modulation without overmodulation This reduces the maximum output voltage to approx 90 of the rated output voltage e Maximum permissible motor cable lengths Unshielded cable max 150 m Shielded cable max 100 m NOTE If a filter cannot be parameterized p0230 3 this means that a filter has not been provided for the cabinet unit In this case the cabinet unit must not be operated with a sinusoidal filter Table 4 19 Technical specifications for sinusoidal filters with SINAMICS G150 Order no Voltage Pulse frequency Output current SINAMICS G150 V kHz A 6SL3710 1GE32 1AA0 3AC 380 480 4 172A 6SL3710 1GE32 6AA0 3AC 380 480 4 216A 6SL3710 1GE33 1AA0 3AC 380 480 4 273 A 6SL3710 1GE33 8AA0 3AC 380 480 4 331A 6SL3710 1GE35 0AA0 3AC 380 480 4 382 A 6SL3710 1GF31 8AA0 3AC 500 600 2 5 152A 6SL3710 1GF32 2AA0 3AC 500 600 2 5 187A The values refer to operation with a sinusoidal filter and do not correspond to the rated current as specified on the type plate SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 31 Electrical Installation 06 05 Table 4 20 Parameter settings for sinusoidal filters with SINAMICS G150
253. ion 4 10 18 Separate 24 V DC Power Supply for NAMUR Option B02 Description If the customer cannot provide a separate 24 V DC supply PELV this option enables a second power supply to be installed for ensuring the PELV Terminal assignment identical to option BOO no 24 V supply at terminals A1 X1 1 2 3 4 10 19 Outgoing Section for External Auxiliary Equipment for NAMUR Option B03 Description If power is to be supplied to a motor fan on site option BO3 provides an uncontrolled fuse protected 10 A outgoing section As soon as the supply voltage is present at the converter input it is also present at these terminals The voltage is the same as the converter input voltage You must take this into account when configuring the separately driven fan Connection Table 4 47 Terminal block A1 X1 uncontrolled outgoing power section 10 A for supplying a separately driven motor fan Terminal Preassignment Comments 1 2 3 PE Outgoing section for separately driven motor fan V Vsupply Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 57 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 10 20 PROFldrive NAMUR option B04 Description In this case communications to the higher level master control level are not realized via the standardized analog interface terminal strip but via a standar
254. ipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data 12 3 2 Table 12 13 Version C 380 V 480 V 3AC part 1 Cabinet Unit Version C 380 V 480 V 3AC Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GE32 1CA0 1GE32 6CA0 1GE33 1CA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 110 132 160 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 150 200 250 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 239 294 348 Rated output current A 210 260 310 Base load current A 205 250 302 Base load current IH A 178 233 277 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 2 9 3 8 4 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 23 0 36 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 67 68 69 73 69 73 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2 x 50 2x70 2x95 AWG MCM 2 x 00 2 x 000 2 x 4 0 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 600 2 x 600 2 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 50 2x 70 2x95 AWG MCM 2 x 00 2 x 000 2 x 4 0 Maximum DIN
255. iro daca 6 2 Selecting the Motor Type 5 34 Command Sources n 6 19 Basic information NAMUR vet eon tects 6 23 Copying a motor data set MDS 6 13 PROFIBUS ostoi eee ee ed 6 19 Basic Information PROF ldrive NAMUR eee 6 25 BICO technology ccceeeeeereeeeenees 6 14 TM31 Terminals ccceeeeeeeeeeeee 6 21 Binector Input BI 6 14 Connecting the DC link connections 4 11 Binector Output BO eee 6 14 Connecting the PE buses 08 4 11 Command Data Set CDS 6 9 Connecting up the DRIVE CLiQ topology 4 Connector Input Cl eee 6 15 12 Connector Output CO 0 005 6 15 Connecting up the power supply and the Copying the Command Data Set CDS 6 12 Copying the Drive Data Set DDS 6 12 Datasets stencil 6 8 Drive Data Set DDS 6 10 Drive ODjects r ee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 6 6 Encoder Data Set EDS 0 0 6 11 Interconnecting Signals 20 6 15 Motor Data Set MDS 6 11 Parameter Categories 6 4 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Signal cables 4 12 Connection Cross Sections 200 4 13 Connection for External Auxiliary Equipment Option L19 0 4 33 Connector Input Cl eee eeeeeeeeee 6 15 Connector Output CO eee 6 15 Control Interface Board Type FX Replacing 11 18 Type GX Replacing 11 20 Type HX Replacing cceeeeee 11 22 Index 1 Index 06 05 Type JX R
256. it ol Set A interface CP5511 PROFIBUS lt Back Continue gt Cancel Fig 5 4 Setting up the interface NOTE The online connection to the drive unit can only be established via PROFIBUS 5 Click Change and test and set up the interface in accordance with your device configuration The Properties Diagnostics Copy and Select pushbuttons are now active Access Path Access Point of the Application S7ONLINE STEP gt CP5511 PROFIBUS vy Standard for STEP 7 Interface Parameter Assignment Used CP5511 PROFIBUS EA lt None gt Diagnostics HA CP5511fAuto Copy a CP5511 MPI H3 CP5511 PP1 Delete HA CP5511 PROFIBUS d Parameter assignment of your communications processor CP5511 for a PROFIBUS network Interfaces Add Remove Select OK Cancel Help Fig 5 5 Setting the interface SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 7 Commissioning 06 05 5 8 NOTE To parameterize the interface you must install the appropriate interface card e g CP5511 Properties CP5511 PROFIBUS PROFIBUS rm Station Parameters IV PG PC is the only master on the bus Address 0 J Check address Timeout 1s ba m Network Parameters Transmission Rate 1 5 Mbps F Highest Station Address 126 z Profile Standard Universal DP FMS User Defined Bus Parameters
257. it The load current must not exceed 10 A and must be set in accordance with the connected consumer see Section 4 10 3 O O Set value C 14 Option L50 Cabinet illumination with socket The 230 V auxiliary supply for the cabinet illumination with an integrated service socket must be connected to terminal X390 and on the system side protected with a fuse max 10 A see Section 4 10 6 E E 15 Option L55 Anti condensation heating for cabinet The 230 V auxiliary supply for the anti condensation heating for the cabinet 230 V 50 Hz 100 W or 230 V 50 Hz 2 x 100 W for cabinets with a width of 800 to 1200 mm must be connected to terminals X240 1 to 3 and protected with fuses max 16 A see Section 4 10 7 Signal Connections 16 Cabinet unit operation by higher level controller control room The control cables must be connected in accordance with the interface assignment and the shield applied Taking into account electrical interference and the distance from power cables the digital and analog signals must be routed with separate cables When the analog inputs on the customer terminal block are used as current or voltage inputs selectors 85 0 and S5 1 must be set accordingly see Section 4 9 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 3 Electrical Installation 06 05 Item Activity Fulfilled Complete
258. ithout Sensor oo eee eceeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesnneeeeeenaeeeeeenaes 7 17 7 4 2 Vector Control With Encodef siisii a aaia reaa 7 19 7 4 3 Solto karo AIia E A E E E E 7 20 vi SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Contents 7 4 3 1 Speed controller pre control integrated pre control with balancing ceeeeeeeeeeees 7 23 T 4 3 2 Reference Model cvs xinidin eeina iade iak etaa aN iaki Tai diTi 7 26 7 4 3 3 Speed controller adaptation 0 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeseneeeeenes 7 27 TASA Droop FUNCOM isiin estes dept oteesteeneed vhiedie a a tied ion taeda ee aeh cates 7 29 TAA Closed loop torque CONtPOL eee eeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeesnaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 7 31 7 4 5 Torque imiting ccc iei sage eee wl ern A E i en R 7 33 8 Output Terminals 8 1 8 1 Chapter Contentitsteisneve a is aden ender a adits 8 1 8 2 Analog OUIS a cadet ide eth aad tinted E EA 8 2 8 3 Digital Outputs saora teeta titan eae ee ae des et ee eked 8 5 9 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 1 9 1 Chapter Contents ic 2ct4 tenn dadcceaald aedte nate aaa aa aeaaaee 9 1 9 2 Drive Functions arera AEA devacacbveragabs A AEE 9 3 9 2 1 Motor Identification and Automatic Speed Controller Optimization eee 9 3 9 2 1 1 Standstill MeaSUreMent ee eee ceeeee ee eeee ee eeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseneeeeesaeeeeeeaeeesneeeeeee 9 4 9 2 1 2 Rotating Measurem
259. ition of environments 1 and 2 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 7 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 8 Environment Environment l Fig 4 2 Definition of categories C1 to C4 Definition of environments 1 and 2 Environment 1 Residential buildings or locations at which the drive system is connected to a public low voltage supply without a transformer Environment 2 Industrial locations supplied by a medium voltage network via a separate transformer Definition of categories C1 to C4 Category C1 Rated voltage lt 1000 V unrestricted use in environment 1 Category C2 Rated voltage for stationary drive systems lt 1000 V for use in environment 2 For use in environment 1 only when sold and installed by skilled personnel Category C3 Rated voltage lt 1000 V use in environment 2 only Category C4 Rated voltage 1000 V or for rated currents 400 A in complex systems in environment 2 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 5 EMC Compliant Installation The following section provides some basic information and guidelines that will help you comply with the EMC and CE guidelines Cabinet Assembly e Connect painted or anodized metal components using toothed self locking screws or remove the insulating layer e Use unpainted de oiled mounting plates e Establish a central connection between ground and the protective conductor system ground Shield Gaps e B
260. l Sensorless Vector Number of phases to be p1911 identified Vector 3 3 phases Vector Cl PROFIBUS PZD send p2051 0 word Vector r2089 0 ZSW1 Vector Cl PROFIBUS PZD send p2051 1 word Vector r0063 n act Vector Cl PROFIBUS PZD send p2051 2 word Vector r0068 l act Vector Cl PROFIBUS PZD send p2051 3 word Vector r0080 M act Vector Cl PROFIBUS PZD send p2051 4 word Vector r0082 P act Vector Cl PROFIBUS PZD send p2051 5 word Vector r2131 FAULT Vector Bl PROFIBUS send status p2080 0 word 1 Vector r0899 0 Ready to power up Vector BI PROFIBUS send status p2080 1 word 1 Vector r0899 1 Ready to run Vector BI PROFIBUS send status p2080 2 word 1 Vector r0899 2 Warning Vector BI PROFIBUS send status p2080 3 word 1 Vector r2139 3 Fault Vector BI PROFIBUS send status p2080 4 word 1 Vector r0899 4 OFF2 inactive Vector Bl PROFIBUS send status p2080 5 word 1 Vector r0899 5 OFF3 inactive Vector BI PROFIBUS send status p2080 6 word 1 Vector r0899 6 Power on inhibit Vector Bl PROFIBUS send status p2080 7 word 1 Vector r2139 7 Alarm present Vector Bl PROFIBUS send status No setpoint actual value p2080 8 word 1 Vector r2197 7 deviation Vector BI PROFIBUS send status p2080 9 word 1 Vector r0899 9 Control from the PLC Vector Parameter Macros 2 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05
261. l tion DEVICE ziii e eiae i E Aa a aa Eea EEEE Tae gg deaa E Ea Ei aae 11 4 11 4 Replacing Components cccccececeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeanaeceeeeeseesesaeaeeeeeeeeeeennanes 11 5 11 4 1 Replacing the Filter Mats Options M23 and M54 sseesiisesiissrrrissrrirerrrineerissrrnss 11 5 11 4 2 Replacing the Power Block Type FX c cessceesteeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeenneeeesenaeeeeneeeeesnaeeeenenaes 11 6 11 4 3 Replacing the Power Block Type GX ccceecceesseeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeenaeeeenenaes 11 8 11 4 4 Replacing the Power Block Type HX eecseeeeeeceeeeecteeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeseenaeeeenneeeeneaa 11 10 11 4 5 Replacing the Power Block Type JX ccceesseeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeenneeeeneaa 11 14 11 4 6 Replacing the Control Interface Board Type FX eecceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeenneeeeneaa 11 18 11 4 7 Replacing the Control Interface Board Type GX o oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerneeeeeeneeeenneeeenead 11 20 11 4 8 Replacing the Control Interface Board Type HX eeeecceeesseeeeneeeeeseneeeseeneeeenneeeenend 11 22 11 4 9 Replacing the Control Interface Board Type JX 0 eee eeecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeenneeeeneaa 11 24 11 4 10 Replacing the Fan Type FX 0 ccc ces enian aeg aa a 11 26 11 4 11 Replacing the Fan Type GX o c ccccccscccccsseseccessecenebsceen cesceedesenccnees dud cnesscbecnevesnedeesseneenent 11 28 11 4 12 Replacing the Fan Type AX cciccccccsscccesec
262. le duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 25 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12 26 Version A 660 V 690 V 3AC part 4 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GH34 7AA0 1GH35 8AA0 1GH37 4AA0 Rated motor output kW 450 560 710 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 493 608 774 Rated output current A 465 575 735 Base load current 7 A 452 560 710 Base load current In A 416 514 657 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 9 1 10 8 13 5 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 72 75 72 75 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2 x 240 3 x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 600 3 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 4x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2 x 15
263. level LED test Fig 6 27 Menu structure of the operator panel SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 47 Operation 06 05 6 7 3 Operation Screen Menu Description The operation screen displays the most important status variables for the cabinet unit In its condition on delivery it displays the operating status of the drive the direction of rotation the time as well as four drive variables parameters numerically and two in the form of a bar display for continuous monitoring You can call up the operation screen in one of three ways 1 After the power supply has been switched on and the system has ramped up 2 If you do not make any entries for five minutes the system calls up the operation screen automatically 3 By pressing the MENU key twice and then F5 OK 12 25 30 S 1450 000rpm F_OFF 50 0Hz 235 0kKW U_DC 620 0V If a fault occurs the system automatically displays the fault screen see 6 7 8 In LOCAL control mode you can choose to enter the setpoint numerically F2 setpoint Settings When you choose Commissioning service gt AOP settings gt Define operation screen you can adjust the display type and the values displayed as required See 6 7 6 3 SINAMICS G150 6 48 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 7 4 Parameterization Menu You can adjust the cabinet unit settings in the parameterization menu The drive software is modular The individual modules are called D
264. lied from below through raised floors or air ducts for example To allow this you have to create openings in the 3 section bottom plate According to EN 61800 3 the cabinet units are not suitable for use in low voltage public networks that supply residential buildings High frequency interference may occur if they are used in this type of network Unpacking the Cabinets Check the delivery against the delivery note to ensure that all the items have been delivered Check that the cabinet is intact The packaging material must be discarded in accordance with the applicable country specific guidelines and rules Required Tools To install the cabinet you will require e Spanner or socket spanner w f 10 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 13 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 16 17 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 18 19 Hexagon socket spanner size 8 Torque spanner max 50 Nm Screwdriver size 2 Screwdriver Torx T20 Screwdriver Torx T30 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 3 5 Mechanical Installation 06 05 3 3 3 Installation Lifting the Cabinet off the Transport Palette The applicable local guidelines regarding the transportation of the cabinet from the transport palette to the installation location must be observed A crane transport assembly option M90 can also be fitted on the top of the cabinet Installation 3 3 4 3 6 Four holes for M12 screws are provided on each cabinet panel to secure the cabine
265. ll the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 19 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 7 Replacing the Control Interface Board Type GX Replacing the Control Interface Board amp O OrOe m i 5 aa Pe qh i lo Oro e s Fig 11 9 Replacing the control interface board type GX SINAMICS G150 11 20 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the fan e Remo
266. ltage 380 480 V 3AC 1GE32 1_A0 110 210 82 1GE32 6_A0 132 260 87 1GE33 1_A0 160 310 87 1GE33 8_A0 200 380 87 1GE35 0_A0 250 490 83 Table 12 8 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for devices with a rated pulse frequency of 1 25 kHz Order no Power Output current at Derating factor at Derating factor at 6SL3710 kW 1 25 kHz A 2 5 kHz 5 kHz Supply voltage 380 480 V 3AC 1GE36 1_A0O 315 605 72 60 1GE37 5 AO 400 745 72 60 1GE38 4 AO 450 840 79 60 1GE41 0_ AO 560 985 87 60 2GE41 1AA0 630 1120 72 60 2GE41 4AA0 710 1380 72 60 2GE41 6AA0 900 1560 79 60 Supply voltage 500 600 V 3AC 1GF31 8 AO 110 175 87 60 1GF32 2_A0 132 215 87 60 1GF32 6 AO 160 260 88 60 1GF33 3_A0 200 330 82 55 1GF34 1_A0O 250 410 82 55 1GF34 7_A0 315 465 87 55 1GF35 8 AO 400 575 85 55 1GF37 4_A0O 500 735 79 55 1GF38 1_A0O 560 810 72 55 2GF38 6AA0 630 860 87 55 2GF41 1AA0 710 1070 85 55 2GF41 4AA0 1000 1360 79 55 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 12 5 Technical Data 06 05 Order no Power Output current at Derating factor at Derating factor at 6SL3710 kW 1 25 kHz A 2 5 kHz 5 kHz Supply voltage 660 690 V 3AC 1GH28 5 AO 75 85 89 60 1GH31 0_A0O 90 100 88
267. lution tailored to actual requirements In addition factors have been considered to ensure easy handling of the drive from the planning and design phase through to operation These factors include e Compact modular service friendly design e Straightforward planning and design e Ready to connect to facilitate the installation process e Quick menu driven commissioning with no complex parameterization e Clear and convenient operation via a user friendly graphical operator panel with measured values displayed in plain text or in a quasi analog bar display e SINAMICS is an integral part of Totally Integrated Automation TIA The TIA concept offers an optimized range of products for automation and drive technology This concept is characterized by planning design communication and data management procedures that are consistent throughout the product range SINAMICS is totally integrated in the TIA concept Separate S7 PCS7 blocks and faceplates for WinCC are available SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Device Overview Quality Service 2 3 The SINAMICS G150 drive converter cabinet units are manufactured to meet high standards of quality and exacting demands This results in a high level of reliability availability and functionality for our products The development design and manufacturing processes as well as order processing and the logistics supply center have been independently certified to DIN
268. m signal cable length in m TTL 100 HTL unipolar 100 HTL bipolar 300 NOTE 4 48 For HTL encoders in order to reduce the effect of interference a bipolar connection is recommended For encoders with a 5 V supply at X521 X531 the cable length is dependent on the encoder current this applies cable cross sections of 0 5 mm7 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 100 90 80 70 E 60 50 2 40 8 30 20 10 0 0 0 05 0 1 0 15 0 25 0 35 0 4 Encoder current drain A Fig 4 13 Signal cable length as a function of the encoder current drain Properties of encoders that can be connected Table 4 40 Properties of encoders that can be connected Parameter Name Unit Min Max Signal level high Uy V 2 TTL bipolar at X520 or X521 X531 Signal level low UL V 2 TTL bipolar at X520 or X521 X531 Signal level high HTL unipolar Uy V 10 Vec Signal level low HTL unipolar UL V 2 Signal level high HTL bipolar Uy V 3 Vcc Signal level low HTL bipolar UL V 3 Signal frequency fs kHz 500 Identification range a1 a2 Degrees 50 270 The encoder supply voltage Vcc is max 30 V SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 49 Electrical Installation 06 05 Fig 4 14 Time between two edges for pulse encoders The minimum time tmin between two edges is 250 ns X500 DRIVE CLiQ int
269. mA r4052 1 V mA V 100 V mA 100 mA Analog input 0 scaled r4055 0 V 100 V mA 100 mA Analog input 1 scaled r4055 1 V 100 V mA 100 mA Setting the Date Time In this menu you set the date and time Setting the Language In this menu you can select the active language You have a choice between the two languages currently stored in the operator panel If the language you require is not available you can load it separately see Chapter 11 Resetting AOP Settings This menu option allows you to reset the following settings to the AOP factory settings e Language e Display brightness contrast e Operation screen e Control settings The settings are not effective until the power supply is next switched on IMPORTANT When you reset parameters all settings that are different to the factory settings are reset immediately This may cause the cabinet unit to switch to a different unwanted operational status For this reason you should always take great care when resetting parameters SINAMICS G150 6 54 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 7 6 5 AOP30 Diagnosis Software Database Version You can use this menu to display the firmware and database versions The database version must be compatible with the drive software status you can check this in parameter r0018 Battery Status In this menu you can display the battery voltage numerically in Volts or as a bar display Th
270. mal Monitoring and Overload Responses Description Example The priority of thermal monitoring for power components is to identify critical situations If alarm thresholds are exceeded the user can set parameterizable response options that enable continued operation e g with reduced power and prevent immediate shutdown The parameterization options however only enable intervention below the shutdown thresholds which cannot be changed by the user The following thermal monitoring options are available e j t monitoring A07805 F30005 it monitoring is used to protect components that have a high thermal time constant compared with semi conductors Overload with regard to i t is present when the converter load r0036 is greater than 100 load in in relation to rated operation e Heat sink temperature A05000 F30004 Monitoring of the heat sink temperature r0037 of the power semi conductor IGBT e Chip temperature A05001 F30025 Significant temperature differences can occur between the IGBT barrier junction and the heat sink These differences are taken into account and monitored by the chip temperature r0037 If an overload occurs with respect to any of these three monitoring functions an alarm is first output The alarm threshold p0294 i t monitoring can be parameterized relative to the shutdown trip values The factory setting for the alarm threshold for chip temperature monitoring is 15 C Temp
271. ment Do you want to perform rotating To switch on the drive choose LOCAL wait until the measurement for optimize closed loop LED in the LOCAL key lights up and then press the control ON key If motor identification is aborted with lt F4 gt motor Help Cancel control uses the characteristic motor values calculated from the type plate data rather than the F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 measured values The rotating measurement determines the data required e g moment of inertia for setting the Motor ID rotating measurement speed controller It also measures the magnetization characteristic and rated magnetization current of the Send an OFF command and then an ON motor command to the drive to start rotating measurement Help F F2 F Fa F5 NOTE When motor identification is complete you must press the OFF key to cancel the power on inhibit Fig 5 36 Basic commissioning Rotating Measurement DANGER AX During the rotating measurement the drive triggers movements in the motor that can reach the maximum motor speed The emergency OFF functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 37 Commissioning 06 05 5 5 3 Additional and necessary settings for cabinet units with a high power rating Additional settings must be made for the following cabin
272. meter settings made since the system was delivered are reset Resetting Parameters via AOP30 Extended access level P0009 30 p0976 1 Press OK Setting the Extended access level on the operator panel Set lt key pushbutton gt lt access level gt lt Extended gt Setting parameter filter to parameter reset lt MENU gt lt Commissioning Service gt lt Device Commissioning gt lt Selection gt In the next dialog screen set p0009 30 Resetting all the parameters to the factory setting All the cabinet unit parameters are reset to the SINAMICS G150 factory setting Saving the parameters To set all the parameters to the factory setting and save them on the CompactFlash card choose F5 OK Saving is complete when the message Being processed in the status bar is no longer displayed Fig 5 37 Procedure for resetting parameters to the factory settings with AOP30 5 42 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Resetting Parameters via STARTER With STARTER the parameters are reset in online mode The required steps are described below Step Selection in toolbar Choose Project gt Connect to target system Click the drive unit whose parameters you want to reset to the factory settings and click the Restore factory settings icon in the toolbar Taka Click OK to confirm this Restore Factory Settings Do y
273. missing or lies outside permissible tolerance range Off The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ communication is taking place Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ Green communication is taking place The DC link voltage is present Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ communication is taking place The DC link voltage is too high Orange Orange DRIVE CLiQ communication is being established Red At least one fault is present in this component 2 Hz flashing light Firmware is being downloaded Green red 2 Hz flashing light Component detection using LED is activated p0124 Green orange Note or Both options depend on the LED status when component recognition is red orange activated via p0124 1 CAUTION AN Independent of the state of LED H201 hazardous DC link voltages can always be available The warning information on the components must be carefully observed SINAMICS G150 10 4 Operating Instructions 06 05 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms SMC30 Encoder Evaluation A81 Table 10 4 Description of the LEDs on the SMC30 LED Color Status Description OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside permissible tolerance range Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ communication is taking place Orange Steady light DRIVE CLiQ communication i
274. missioning e STARTER Project Wizard The commissioning steps are listed below in numerical order SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Accessing the STARTER Project Wizard Pee STARTER EEE eee Project Target system View Options Window Help otal 22 2 eee Sf EEEE E Starter Help gt 5B Ausblenden Zur ck Vorw rts Aktualisieren Drucken Inhalt Index Suchen Ef Getting Started with Commissioning Drives AAE How to use the project wizard e Using the project wizard To commission the following drives Commissioning a MICROMASTER 4 generation drive e Commissioning a ET200S drive e ONLINE commissioning of a SINAMICS S G e OFFLINE commissioning of a SINAMICS S G e Commissionig of several SINSMICS S G drives Short description of the tree structure in the project navigator e Project tree MICROMASTER drives o Project tree SINAMICS G110 drive e Project tree SINAMICS S G drives e Project tree ET200 drive Short tutorials for drives Press F1 to open Help display I Fig 5 1 Main screen for the STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool 1 Close the STARTER Getting Started Drive Commissioning screen by choosing HTML Help gt Close NOTE When you deactivate the Display Wizard during start checkbox the project Wizard is no longer displayed the next time you start STARTER You ca
275. mmediately of any missing components or damage e If you identify any hidden deficiencies or damage contact the transportation company immediately and ask them to examine the device e If you fail to contact them immediately you may lose your right to claim compensation for the deficiencies and damage e f necessary you can request the support of your local Siemens branch WARNING Lv Damage in transit indicates that the device was subject to unreasonable stress The electrical safety of the device can no longer be ensured It must not be connected until a thorough high voltage test has been carried out Death serious injury or substantial material damage can result if these factors are not taken into account Storage The devices must be stored in clean dry rooms Permissible temperatures between 25 C and 70 C Temperature variations greater than 20 K per hour are not permitted If the device is stored for a prolonged period once it has been unpacked cover it or take other appropriate measures to ensure that it does not become dirty and that it is protected against environmental influences If such measures are not taken the guarantee becomes invalid in the event of a claim for damages WARNING A The storage period should not exceed two years If the device is stored for more than two years the DC link capacitors of the devices must be reformed during commissioning The reforming procedure is describe
276. mmissioned the supply voltage 5 24 V set for the encoder is activated on the SMC30 module If a 5 V encoder is connected and the supply voltage has not been set correctly via p0404 bit 20 Yes bit 21 No the encoder may be damaged SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 35 Commissioning 06 05 Basic Commissioning Entering the Basic Parameters Basic Commissioning Back p0640 Current limit p0700 Macro BI p1000 Macro CI n_set p1080 Minimum speed Help A Vv c 0 p0230 Drv filt type O No filter 607 50 Aeff 6 S G6150 TM31 2 7TM31_AI0 0 000 rpm Change Continue Basic Commissioning Back p1082 Maximum speed p1120 RFG ramp up time p1121 RFG ramp down time p1135 RFG OFF3 t_ramp dn Help A v Final confirmation Help c 0 1500 000 rpm 20 000 s 30 000 s 10 000 s Change Continue l Apply parameters permanently with OK Back OK Entering the basic commissioning parameters If a sinusoidal filter option L15 is connected then it must be activated in p0230 Otherwise the filter could be destroyed p0700 Default command source setting 5 S G150 PROFIBUS 6 S G150 TM31 7 S G150 NAMUR 10 S G150 PROF Idrive NAMUR p1000 Default setpoint source setting 1 PROFIBUS 2 TM31_Al0 3 Motorpoti 4 Fixed setpoint To select the basic parameters choose lt F3 gt and lt F2 gt Change the values with lt F4 gt A screen is displayed in which you can enter
277. motor section 3 screws 2 Unscrew the connection to the mains supply 4 screws 3 Remove the retaining screws at the top 2 screws 4 Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws 5 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 6 Remove the CU320 mounts 1 screw and 2 nuts If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and remove the CU320 7 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 8 Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple 9 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the installation device for the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 7 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 3 Replacing the Power Block Type GX Replacing the Power Block
278. mp down times each refer to the maximum speed p1082 The rounding times that can be set can prevent the actual speed value from being overshot when the setpoint is approached thereby improving control quality Notice if rounding times are too long this can cause the setpoint to be overshot if the setpoint is reduced abruptly during ramp up Rounding is also effective in the zero crossover in other words when the direction is reversed the ramp function generator output is reduced to zero via initial rounding the ramp down time and final rounding before the new inverted setpoint is approached via start rounding the ramp up time and end rounding Rounding times that can be set separately are active in the event of a fast stop OFF3 The actual ramp up ramp down times increase with active rounding Signal Flow Diagram RFG ramp up time RFG t_start_round RFG t_end_delay RFG ramp down time 0 00 999999 00s 0 00 30 00s 0 00 30 00 s 0 00 999999 00 s p1120 10 00 p1130 0 00 p1131 0 00 p1121 10 00 RFG setpt at input RFG n_set at outpt 1119 So Fig 7 3 Signal flow diagram ramp function generator SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 7 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Function Diagram FD 3060 3070 Parameters 7 8 e p1120 e p1121 e p1130 e p1131 e p1135 e p1136 e p1137 Ramp function generator ramp up time Ramp function generator ramp down time Ramp function generator ini
279. mple with options L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 16 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data Table 12 17 Version A 500 V 600 V 3AC part 2 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GF33 3AA0 1GF34 1AA0 1GF34 7AA0 Rated motor output kW 200 250 315 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 500 V to 600 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 353 436 493 Rated output current A 330 410 465 Base load current A 320 400 452 Base load current In A 280 367 416 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 5 4 6 9 7 8 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 78 0 78 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 72 75 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 120 2x 185 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 300 2 x 500 2 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE
280. must cross at right angles especially if they carry sensitive signals that are subject to interference Class 1 unshielded cables for lt 60 V DC unshielded cables for lt 25 V AC shielded analog signal cables shielded bus and data cables operator panel interface incremental absolute encoder lines Class 2 unshielded cables for gt 60 V DC and lt 230 V DC unshielded cables for gt 25 V AC and lt 230 V AC Class 3 unshielded cables for gt 230 V AC DC and lt 1000 V AC DC Shield Connection e Shields must not be used to conduct electricity In other words they must not simultaneously act as neutral or PE conductors e Apply the shield so that it covers the greatest possible surface area You can use ground clamps ground terminals or ground screw connections e Avoid extending the shield to the grounding point using a wire pigtail because this will reduce the effectiveness of the shield by up to 90 e Attach the shield to a shield bar directly after the line inlet into the cabinet Insulate the entire shielded cable and route the shield up to the device connection but do not connect it again I O Connection e Create a low impedance ground connection for additional cabinets system components and distributed devices with the largest possible cross section at least 16 mm e Ground unused lines at one end in the cabinet e Choose the greatest possible clearance between the power and signal cables at
281. must normally only be operated in one direction In the operation status in LOCAL mode the current direction of rotation is indicated by an arrow next to the operating mode NOTE You have to make additional settings when switching between CW CCW rotation SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 57 Operation 06 05 6 7 7 4 Jog JOG The jog key is effective in the LOCAL mode in the state ready to power up not in operation The speed that is set in parameter p1051 is approached 6 7 7 5 Increase Setpoint Decrease Setpoint You can use the increase and decrease keys to set the setpoint with a resolution of 1 of the maximum speed E g if the resolution is 15 min at p1082 1500 min You can also enter the setpoint numerically To do so press F2 in the operation screen The system displays an inverted edit field for entering the required speed Enter the required value using the numeric keypad Press F5 OK to confirm the setpoint When you enter values numerically you can enter any speed between the minimum speed p1080 and the maximum speed p1082 Setpoint entry in LOCAL mode is unipolar You can change the direction of rotation by pressing the key see 6 7 7 3 e CW rotation and Increase key mean The displayed setpoint is positive and the output frequency is increased e CCW rotation and Increase key mean The displayed setpoint is negative and the output frequency is increase
282. n call up the project Wizard by choosing Project gt New with Wizard To deactivate the online help for Getting Started follow the instructions provided in Help You can call up the online help at any time by choosing Help gt Getting Started STARTER features a detailed online help function SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 5 Commissioning 06 05 The STARTER Project Wizard Project Wizard Starter ip 2 3 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drives Summary new project interface Arrange drive units offline Find drive units online Open existing project offline dil IV Display Wizard during start Fig 5 2 The STARTER project Wizard 2 Click Arrange drive units offline in the STARTER project Wizard Project Wizard Starter is 22 2 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drives Summary new project interface Please enter the project data Project name Proet Author Comment g Cancel Fig 5 3 Creating a new project 3 Enter the project name and if necessary the author and a comment 4 Click Continue gt to set up a PROFIBUS interface in the PG PC SINAMICS G150 5 6 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning Project Wizard Starter ix a 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drives Summary new project interface Specify the online connection to the drive un
283. nal reset key NC contact or wire jumper otherwise the fault code is not stored R2 External reset key NC contact or wire jumper T1 External test button T2 External test button Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 Diagnostics Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on A101 are described in Additional Operating Instructions in the operating manual SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 47 Electrical Installation 06 05 4 10 15 Sensor Module SMC30 for Detecting the Actual Motor Speed Option K50 4 10 15 1 Description The SMC30 sensor module is used for determining the actual motor speed The signals emitted by the rotary pulse encoder are converted here and made available via the DRIVE CLiQ interface of the closed loop control for evaluation purposes The following encoders can be connected to the SMC30 sensor module e TTL encoder e HTL encoder e KTY temperature sensor Table 4 38 Encoders that can be connected with supply voltage Sensor type Remote X520 D Sub X521 X531 Interrupted cable sense terminal terminal monitoring HTL bipolar 24 V No Not possible Yes Yes Not possible HTL unipolar 24 V No Not possible Yes Yes Not possible TTL bipolar 24 V No Yes Yes Yes Only at X520 TTL bipolar 5 V Only at Yes Yes Yes Only at X520 X520 TTL unipolar Not possible Table 4 39 Max signal cable lengths Sensor type Maximu
284. nclude 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 23 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12 24 Version A 660 V 690 V 3AC part 2 Size to DIN 43 620 1 1 1 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GH31 5AA0 1GH31 8AA0 1GH32 2AA0 Rated motor output kW 132 160 200 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 168 201 234 Rated output current A 150 175 215 Base load current 7 A 142 170 208 Base load current In A 134 157 192 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 2 8 3 8 4 2 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 67 68 69 73 69 73 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 95 120 2x70 AWG MCM 4 0 300 2 x 000 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 4x 240 4x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 70 95 120 AWG MCM 000 4 0 300 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2 x 150 2 x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2 x 400 2 x 400 Fastening screw M12 2
285. nection Overview 4 25 TM31 Front ViW ccccccceesssseeeeeees 4 24 TOOS it eon el dada avctven beled 3 5 4 5 Torque limiting eeaeee 7 33 Transport units Connecting PE buses ceeee 4 11 Connecting the DC link connections 4 11 Connecting up the DRIVE CLiQ topology EENE E T E A E E ES 4 12 Connecting up the power supply 4 12 Connecting up the signal cables 4 12 Electrical connection 0 08 4 11 Mechanical connection 06 3 6 Transportation cccccceceeeeesereeeeeees 3 2 Type Plateau aa ae 2 13 Dalai cetiteetatie a dig 2 14 V V E Control srati 7 9 Vdc Controller eecceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 8 Vdc_max Closed Loop Control 9 11 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Vdce_min Control ceeeceeeeteeeeeeeees 9 9 Vector Control with Encoder 7 19 Vector Control Without Encoder 7 17 Vector Speed Torque Control With Without Encodet cccceceeeeeees 7 16 Version A Design seeeeeeteeeees 2 4 Version C Design 2 ceeeeteeeteeeees 2 8 Voltage Boost eceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 12 At Acceleration c cccccccceeeeeeeeeees 7 14 Permane nh ccceeseeeceeeceeaeeeeeeees 7 13 Ww Warning Information 1 1 Wiring Principle aseeseen 2 9 xX X520 coed inten Ades 4 26 SMC380 fa aceite ics 4 51 MO 2 T aeiia antar ia
286. nector Bo Binector Output input signal source SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Operation Connectors Cl Connector Input CO Connector Output A connector is an analog signal Connectors are subdivided into connector inputs signal sink and connector outputs signal source The options for interconnecting connectors are restricted to ensure that performance is not adversely affected Connector Input signal sink Table 6 3 Connectors Abbreviation and Name Description symbol Connector Input Can be interconnected to a connector Cl gt output as source The number of the connector output must be entered as a parameter value Connector Output co gt Connector Output signal source Can be used as a source for a connector input Interconnecting Signals Using BICO Technology To interconnect two signals a BICO input parameter signal sink must be assigned to the desired BICO output parameter signal source The following information is required in order to connect a binector connector input to a binector connector output e Binectors Parameter number bit number and drive object ID e Connectors with no index Parameter number and drive object ID e Connectors with index BO Binector output CO Connector output Signal source BO Parameter number index and drive object ID BI Binector input Cl Connector input Signal sink
287. nel 11 39 Replacing the Cabinet Operator Panel11 39 Resetting Parameters c cee 5 42 Rotating Measurement 9 5 RUNTIME 2 a6 eae nee age nee 9 25 S S5 Selector for Voltage Current AlO Al14 28 Safety Definitions 1 0 0 0 1 1 Safety Operating Instructions 1 3 Safety Warning Information 1 1 Index 4 Saving the Parameters Permanently 6 63 Sensor Module SMC30 for Detecting the Actual Motor Speed Option K50 4 48 Separate 24 V DC Power Supply for NAMUR Option BO2 88 4 57 SERVICE boas tek ivtaut nisl eaae 2 3 Service and Support ee 10 12 SEMVICING 4 et etd dnt 11 3 Setpoint Addition 0 0 ceeeeeeeereees 7 3 Setpoint Channel 0 ccceeeeeeeeeees 7 3 Setpoint sources General ihctietietee aed ade aed 6 2 Setpoint SOUICES ccceceeeeeeeeeeees 6 27 Analog Inputs o n 6 27 Fixed Speed Setpoints 2 05 6 30 Motorized Potentiometer 6 29 Setting the Language 6 54 Setting the PROFIBUS Address 6 34 Signal Connections cece 4 23 Simulation operation ceceeee 9 26 Sinusoidal Filter Option L15 4 31 Slip Compensation ceeeeee 7 15 SMC S30 bs ecinsstaed ation 4 48 SMC30 Connection Examples 4 53 Speed Controller 0 ccccceseeeeeeees 7 20 Speed controller adaptati
288. nes and working near them This operating manual is intended for qualified personnel and only contain information and notes relating to the intended purpose of the machines The operating manual and machine documentation are written in different languages as specified in the delivery contracts NOTE The services and support provided by the SIEMENS service centers are recommended for planning installation commissioning and servicing work SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 1 3 Safety Information 06 05 Components that can be Destroyed by Electrostatic Discharge ESD CAUTION AN The board contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge These components can be easily destroyed if not handled properly If you do have to use electronic boards however please observe the following You should only touch electronic boards if absolutely necessary When you touch boards however your body must be electrically discharged beforehand Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials such as plastic parts insulated desktops articles of clothing manufactured from man made fibers Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging such as metalized plastic boxes or metal containers If the packaging material is not conductive the boards must be wrapped with a conductive packaging material
289. net Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2 x 240 3 x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 600 3 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Recommended DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2x 185 3 x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2 x 500 3 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 6 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes PE conductor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 18 holes Approx weight standard version kg 1700 1700 2620 Power block type HX HX JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 2400 x 2000 x 600 2400 x 2000 x 600 3200 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet with option L26 3NA3 255 6 3NA3 354 6 3NA3 365 6 Rated current A 2x 315 2 x 355 2 x 500 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 3 Cond semi cond protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet without option L26 3NE1 435 2 3NE1 447 2 3NE1 448 2 Rated current A 560 670 850 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example
290. net unit is switched off and the DC link capacitors are discharged SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 43 Electrical Installation 06 05 Table 4 33 Response thresholds for the braking units Nominal voltage Response threshold Switch position Comments 380 V 480 V 774 V 673 V 774 V is the default factory setting With supply voltages of between 380 V and 400 V the response threshold can be set to 673 V to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and converter This does however reduce the possible peak power P15 with the square of the voltage 673 774 0 75 The possible peak power is therefore max 75 of P15 500 V 600 V 967 V 841 V 967 V is the default factory setting With a supply voltage of 500 V the response threshold can be set to 841 V to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and converter This does however reduce the possible peak power P15 with the square of the voltage 841 967 0 75 The possible peak power is therefore max 75 of P15 660 V 690 V 1158 V 1070 V 1158 V is the default factory setting With a supply voltage of 660 V the response threshold can be set to 1070 V to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and converter This does however reduce the possible peak power P15 with the square of the voltage 1070 1158 0 85 The possible peak power is therefore max 85 of P15 4 44 S
291. ng Vector Response to motor Display fault with alarm p0610 overtemperature condition Vector 1 Imax red Vector p0700 0 Preset binector input Vector 70006 S G150 terminal block Vector p0864 Infeed operation Vector 1 p1000 0 Preset connector input Vector 10002 TM31_Al0 Vector p1001 CO Fixed speed setpoint 1_ Vector 300 RPM Vector p1002 CO Fixed speed setpoint 2 Vector 600 RPM Vector p1003 CO Fixed speed setpoint 3 Vector 1500 RPM Vector CO Speed limit in positive p1083 direction of rotation Vector 6000 RPM Vector CO Speed limit negative p1086 direction of rotation Vector 6000 RPM Vector Ramp function generator Extended ramp function p1115 selection Vector 1 generator Vector SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Parameter Macros 1 Parameter Macros 06 05 Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO Ramp function generator p1120 ramp up time Vector 20s Vector Ramp function generator p1121 ramp down time Vector 30s Vector p1135 OFF3 ramp down time Vector 10s Vector p1200 FlyRest oper mode Vector 0 Flying restart inactive Vector p1240 Vdc controller configuration Vector 0 Vdc max controller enabled Vector Vdc controller configuration p1280 V f Vector 0 Vdc max controller enabled Vector Open loop closed loop p1300 control operating mode Vector 20 Speed contro
292. ng products systems and solutions in drive and automation technology In special cases help is available from professional trained and experienced specialists via teleservice and video conferencing Free Contact providing you with free technical support e In Europe Africa Tel 49 0 180 50 50 222 Fax 49 0 180 50 50 223 Internet http Awww siemens com automation support request e in America Tel 14232622522 Fax 14232622289 E mail simatic hotline sea siemens com e Asia Pacific region Tel 86 1064 757575 Fax 86 1064 747474 E mail adsupport asia siemens com SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 10 13 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 06 05 SINAMICS G150 10 14 Operating Instructions Maintenance and Servicing 1 1 11 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on the following e Maintenance and servicing procedures that have to be carried out on a regular basis to ensure the availability of the cabinet unit e Exchanging device components when the unit is serviced e Reforming the DC link capacitors e Upgrading the cabinet unit firmware e Load the new operator panel firmware and database from the PC DANGER AN Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work on the de energized cabinet unit wait for 5 minutes after switching off the supply voltage This allows the capacitors to discharge to a harmless level lt 25 V after the supply voltage has been switched off Before
293. ning torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 25 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 10 Replacing the Fan Type FX Replacing the Fan 2 O PEO Fig 11 12 Replacing the fan type FX 11 26 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables including ambient temperature and the degree of cabinet protection and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory Steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Open the cabinet door e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 12 1 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 2 screws 2 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order
294. ns the hoods are delivered separately and must be mounted on site With options M23 and M654 plastic ventilation grilles and filter mats are also supplied A5mm aluminum mounting plate with no holes is fitted in the roof of the cover for feeding in the cables Depending on the number of cables and the cross sections used holes for attaching cable glands for feeding in the cables must be drilled in this mounting plate on site NOTE The control cables and optional brake resistors are connected as before from below Attaching the Hood 1 Remove the crane transport assembly if fitted 2 For option M54 only Secure the contact surfaces of the hood on top of the cabinet using the sealing tape provided 3 Fit the hood to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified fixing points for the crane transport assembly 4 To secure the power cables remove the front panel of the hood SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions ical Installation chan Me 06 05 provided here for wide hoods Additional screw fittings are M8 from Insert the enclo and plain wash below ting plate fi bl M Fig 3 3 Attaching the hood with M13 M78 3 11 Mechanical Installation 06 05 SINAMICS G150 3 12 Operating Instructions Electrical Installation 4 4 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on the following SINAMICS G150 Establishing the electrical connections for the cabinet unit
295. ns Protection un A SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 1 Commissioning 06 05 5 2 The STARTER Commissioning Tool Description You can use the STARTER commissioning tool to configure and commission SINAMICS drives and drive systems The drive can be configured using the STARTER drive configuration Wizard NOTE This chapter shows you how to carry out commissioning using STARTER STARTER features a comprehensive online help function which provides detailed explanations of all the processes and available system settings This chapter will therefore only look at commissioning Prerequisites for Installing STARTER 5 2 1 5 2 Minimum hardware requirements e PG or PC with e Pentium IlI 400 MHz Windows NT 2000 e Pentium Ill 500 MHz Windows XP e 256 MB RAM e 1024 x 768 pixel screen resolution Minimum software requirements e Either Windows NT 4 0 SP6 e or Windows 2000 SP3 e or Windows XP Professional SP1 e and Internet Explorer V5 0 1 Installing STARTER STARTER is installed using the setup file on the CD supplied When you double click the setup file the installation Wizard guides you through the process of installing STARTER SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Commissioning 5 2 2 The STARTER User Interface STARTER features four operating areas Project Target system Yiew Options Window Help osea ea fe ne Slt eR daa O0 T
296. nstructions in the status window of the program and connect the power supply for the AOP30 while pressing the red key O The load procedure is started automatically If a current database has not been loaded the system switches to the loading database screen once the loading procedure has finished Depending on the language you require choose a file e g AOP30_DB V02 30 20 E D CBIN and open it to start loading the database 10 Once this is complete Database loaded is displayed on the AOP30 11 Switch the power on switch the power supply off and then back on 11 44 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Technical Data 1 2 12 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on the following e General and specific technical data for the SINAMICS G150 cabinet units e Information on restrictions that apply when the cabinets are used in unfavorable ambient conditions derating SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 12 1 Technical Data 06 05 12 2 Table 12 1 General Data General technical data Electrical specifications Line frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz Output frequency 0 Hz to 300 Hz Power factor Fundamental mode gt 0 98 Total 0 93 to 0 96 Converter efficiency gt 98 Switching at input Once every 3 minutes Mechanical data Degree of protection IP 20 higher degrees of protection up to IP 54 optional Class of protection To EN 5017
297. nt IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 9 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12 10 Version A 380 V 480 V 3AC part 2 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GE33 8AA0 1GE35 0AA0 1GE36 1AA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 200 250 315 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 300 400 500 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 405 519 639 Rated output current A 380 490 605 Base load current A 370 477 590 Base load current I A 340 438 460 Maximum output frequency a Hz 160 160 100 Power loss kW 5 3 6 4 8 2 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 69 73 70 73 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 120 2x 185 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 300 2 x 500 2 x 600 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2 x 150 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 4 0 2 x 400 2 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2
298. o individual digital signals e p2099 0 1 Cl PROFIBUS PZD selection receive bit serial SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 17 Operation 06 05 Fixed Values for Interconnection Using BICO Technology The following connector outputs are available for interconnecting any fixed value settings e p2900 0 n CO Fixed value_ _1 e p2901 0 n CO Fixed value_ _2 e p2930 0 n CO Fixed Value_M_1 Example These parameters can be used to interconnect the scaling factor for the main setpoint or to interconnect an additional torque SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 4 Command Sources 6 4 1 PROFIBUS Default Setting Requirements The PROFIBUS default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER Profibus e AOP30 G S150 Profibus Command Sources r0807 Master control active LOCAL REMOTE key REMOTE PROFIBUS LOCAL operator panel Internal control Input terminals A60 TM31 Fig 6 9 Command sources AOP30 lt gt PROFIBUS Priority The priority of the command sources is shown in Fig 6 9 NOTE The emergency OFF and motor protection signals are always active regardless of the command source For LOCAL master control all of the supplementary setpoints are de activated SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 19 Operation 06 05 TM31 Terminal Assignment with PROFIBUS Default Setting When you choose the PROFIBUS default setting u
299. ock e B02 Separate 24 V power supply PELV B03 Outgoing section for external auxiliary equipment uncontrolled B04 PROFIdrive NAMUR indicates that this option is available for that version indicates that this option is not available for that version SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 2 15 Device Overview 06 05 SINAMICS G150 2 16 Operating Instructions Mechanical Installation 3 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on the following e The conditions for transporting storing and installing the cabinet unit e Preparing and installing the cabinet unit SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 3 1 Mechanical Installation 06 05 3 2 Transportation and Storage Transportation A 3 2 WARNING The following must be taken into account when the devices are transported The devices are heavy Their center of gravity is displaced and they can be top heavy Suitable hoisting gear operated by trained personnel is essential due to the weight of the devices The devices must only be transported in the upright position indicated The devices must not be transported upside down or horizontally Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are not lifted or transported properly NOTES regarding transportation The devices are packaged by the manufacturers in accordance with the climatic conditions and str
300. oint value For vertical loads and acceleration parameters p1610 constant torque boost and p1611 acceleration torque boost must be modified in order to generate the static or dynamic load torque of the drive If 1610 is set to 0 only the magnetizing current r0331 is injected when the value is 100 the rated motor current p0305 is injected To ensure that the drive does not stall during acceleration p1611 can be increased or acceleration pre control for the speed controller can be used This is also advisable to ensure that the motor is not subject to thermal overload at low speeds SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 17 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Vector control without a speed sensor has the following characteristics at low frequencies e Closed loop operation up to approx 1 Hz output frequency e Start up in closed loop operation directly after drive is energized e Passes through low frequency range 0 Hz in closed loop operation NOTE In this case the speed setpoint upstream of the ramp function generator must be greater than p1755 Closed loop operation up to approx 1 Hz settable via parameter p1755 and the ability to start or reverse at 0 Hz directly in closed loop operation settable via parameter p1750 result in the following benefits e No switchover required within closed loop control smooth operation no dips in frequency e Steady state speed torque control up to
301. oltage switchgear must also be connected with the required torques For very high power ratings the disconnect switches Q98 Q99 of the DC link connections must be closed or opened together refer to Chapter 4 7 2 The cables between the low voltage switchgear and the cabinet unit must be protected with line fuses for conductor protection VDE 636 Part 10 With version C combined fuses must be used for conductor and semi protection VDE636 Part 40 EN60269 4 See Technical Data for the appropriate fuses For strain relief the cables must be clamped on the cable clamping bar C bar When EMC shielded cables are used screwed glands that connect the shield to ground with the greatest possible surface area must be provided on the motor terminal box On the cabinet the cables must be grounded with the clips supplied with the EMC shield bus with the greatest possible surface area Shield bar supplied with option LOO or can be ordered separately with option M70 See Section 4 5 The cable shields must be properly applied and the cabinet properly grounded at the appropriate points see Section 4 5 The voltage for the fan transformer U1 T10 for versions A and C and the internal power supply A1 T10 for version A options L13 L26 L83 L84 L86 and L87 only must be adapted to the supply voltage for the cabinet unit see Section 4 7 4 4 2 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instruction
302. ometer minimum speed e p1047 Motorized potentiometer ramp up time e p1048 Motorized potentiometer ramp down time e r1050 Motorized potentiometer setpoint after the ramp function generator SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 29 Operation 06 05 6 5 3 Fixed Speed Setpoints Description Three settable fixed speed setpoints are available They can be selected via terminals or PROFIBUS Requirements The default setting for the fixed speed setpoints was chosen during commissioning e STARTER Fixed setpoint e AOP30 Fixed setpoint Signal Flow Diagram F_set bit 0 F_set bit 1 Fixed speed Fixed speed setpoint 01 setpoint effective p1001 11024 Fixed speed setpoint 02 p1002 Fixed speed setpoint 03 p1003 Fig 6 21 Signal flow plan Fixed speed setpoints Function diagram FD 3010 Parameters e p1001 Fixed speed setpoint 1 e p1002 Fixed speed setpoint 2 e p1003 Fixed speed setpoint 3 e 11024 Fixed speed setpoint effective SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 30 06 05 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS 6 6 1 PROFIBUS Connection PROFIBUS Connection Position Address Switch and Diagnostic LED The PROFIBUS connection address switch and diagnostics LED are located on the control unit X126 PROFIBUS PROFIBUS connection diagnosis LED isang 77 PROFIBUS address switch Dae Fig 6 22 View of the control unit with PROFIBUS interface
303. on 7 27 Speed Controller Optimization 9 5 Speed controller pre control 7 23 Speed Limitation ceeeeeeeees 7 6 Stall Protection ccceceeteeeeeees 9 38 Standstill Measurement 0 9 4 STARTER rear r wie ets 5 2 COMMISSIO eire a 5 4 Configuring the Drive Unit 5 11 Creating Your Project 5 4 Installation ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 2 Project Wizard oeseri eiei ritenete 5 6 Settings for cabinet units with a high power rating ceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 5 28 Starting the Drive Project 0 5 29 User Interface neee 5 3 Status word 1 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 41 6 42 SIOTAGE a a OTOT 3 3 Suppression Speed ecceeeeeeeeeees 7 5 Switching Between Clockwise and Counter Clockwise Rotation ceee 6 57 T Technical Data cceececeeeeeeeeeeees 12 8 Technologieregler ccccecceeeseeeeeeee 9 27 Telegram Selection User Defined 6 36 Telegrams and Process Data 6 35 Temperature Sensol ccceceeeees 4 28 Thermal Monitoring 9 35 Thermal Motor Protection 2 9 39 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Index Thermistor Motor Protection Unit Option 63 L84 2 receiver incor eaneetneeete ie 4 45 Timeout Monitoring 6 59 TMS cccsctnaceevctdoe el ncee a nig evecare 4 23 TM31 Con
304. on Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 18 holes M12 18 holes Approx weight standard version kg 670 940 980 Power block type HX JX JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 600 x 2000 x600 1000 x 2000 x 600 1000 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 447 2 3NE1 448 2 Circuit breaker Rated current A 670 850 Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 22 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Technical Data 12 3 5 Cabinet Unit Version A 660 V 690 V 3AC Table 12 23 Version A 660 V 690 V 3AC part 1 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GH28 5AA0 1GH31 0AA0 1GH31 2AA0 Rated motor output kW 75 90 110 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 103 119 141 Rated output current A 85 100 120 Ba
305. ontrol is functioning optimally The acceleration pre control using a connector input p1495 is activated by the parameter settings p1400 2 1 and p1400 3 0 p1428 dead time and p1429 time constant can be set for balancing purposes Function diagram FP 6031 Parameters e p0311 Rated motor speed e r0333 Rated motor torque e p0341 Motor moment of inertia e p0342 Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia e r0345 Nominal motor starting time e p1400 2 Acceleration pre control source e p1428 Speed pre control balancing deadtime e p1429 Speed pre control balancing time constant e p1496 Acceleration pre control scaling e r1518 Accelerating torque SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 25 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 7 4 3 2 Reference model Description The reference model becomes operative when p1400 3 1 and p1400 2 0 The reference model is used to emulate the speed control loop with a P speed controller The loop emulation can be set in p1433 to p1435 It becomes effective if p1437 is connected to the output of the model r1436 The reference model delays the setpoint actual value deviation for the integral component of the speed controller so that settling stabilizing operations can be suppressed The reference model can also be externally emulated and the external signal entered via p1437 Reference model pre control Speed setpoint Speed actual value
306. oost total SINAMICS G150 7 14 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 3 2 Slip Compensation Description The slip compensation means that the speed of induction motors is essentially kept constant independent of the load Fig 7 8 Slip compensation Function Diagram FD 1665 6310 Parameters e p1335 Slip compensation p1335 0 0 slip compensation is deactivated p1335 100 0 Slip is fully compensated e p1336 Slip compensation limit value e 11337 Actual slip compensation SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 15 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 7 4 Vector Speed Torque Control With Without Encoder Description Compared with V f control vector control offers the following benefits Stability vis a vis load and setpoint changes Short rise times with setpoint changes gt better command behavior Short settling times with load changes gt better disturbance characteristic Acceleration and braking are possible with maximum available torque Motor protection due to variable torque limitation in motor and regenerative mode Drive and braking torque controlled independently of the speed These benefits are available without speed feedback Vector control can be used with or without an encoder The following criteria indicate when an encoder is required Maximum speed accuracy is required Maximum dynamic response requirement
307. or 0 p1035 MOP raise Vector r2090 13 PZD 1 Bit 13 Vector p1036 MOP lower Vector r2090 14 PZD 1 Bit 14 Vector p1055 Jog bit 0 Vector 0 p1056 Jog bit 1 Vector 0 p1113 Direction reversal Vector r2090 11 PZD 1 Bit 11 Vector p1140 Enable RFG Vector r2090 4 PZD 1 Bit 4 Vector p1141 Start RFG Vector r2090 5 PZD 1 Bit 5 Vector p1142 Enable speed setpoint Vector r2090 6 PZD 1 Bit 6 Vector p2103 1 acknowledge faults Vector r2090 7 PZD 1 Bit 7 Vector p2104 ile acknowledge faults Vector r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p2106 External fault 1 Vector r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p2107 External fault 2 Vector 1 p2112 External alarm 1 Vector r0722 0 CU DIO CU p2116 External alarm 2 Vector 1 p0738 DI DO8 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU 0 not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0739 DI DO9 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 0 not inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 Output CU Parameter Macros 4 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Parameter Macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 not inverted p0728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0741 DI DO11 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 1 1 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 not inverted p0728 11 Set DI DO11 input or o
308. or optional Line reactor Uk 2 Rectifier Connected voltage DC link Inverter Motor connection Motor with one winding system 1 From an output current of gt 800 A the functions main switch fuses and main contactor are implemented using a circuit breaker Fig 2 6 Circuit principle Version A parallel circuit 12 pulse infeed connected to one motor with one winding system SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Device Overview 06 05 Circuit principle for a parallel circuit with 12 pulse infeed motor with separate winding systems 12 pulse infeed Line connection Main switch optional 1 Fuses optional Main contactor optional Line reactor Uk 2 Rectifier Connected voltage DC link Inverter Motor connection Motor with separate winding systems 1 From an output current of gt 800 A the functions main switch fuses and main contactor are implemented using a circuit breaker Fig 2 7 Circuit principle for a parallel circuit 12 pulse infeed connected to a motor with separate winding systems SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Device Overview IMPORTANT The motor earth must be fed back directly to the cabinet unit 2 5 Type Plate SINAMICS G AC DRIVE FREQUENZUMRICHTER 9 lt Device designation input aC 380 480 239A Eingang Output aac O 480V 210A Duty Class l Ausgang Bal Klasse Tem
309. or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 21 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12 22 Version C 500 V 600 V 3AC part 3 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GF35 8CA0 1GF37 4CA0 1GF38 1CA0 Rated motor output kW 400 500 560 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 500 V to 600 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 608 774 852 Rated output current A 575 735 810 Base load current I A 560 710 790 Base load current I A 514 657 724 Maximum output frequency 2 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 8 7 12 7 14 1 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 1 48 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 72 75 72 75 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 3 x 185 4x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 600 3 x 500 4 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 8 x 600 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 185 3 x 150 3x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 500 3 x 400 3 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 6 x 600 6 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 3 holes M12 3 holes PE conductor connecti
310. or Setpoints Command Sources Configuration Drive_unit_0 Defaults of the setpoints command sources Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Drive unit Options Control structure Select the default macros for your command sources Drive setting eee epso Terminal TM31 M n data Command sources Calculation of the rr Noselection Motor holding brake ZIEN acd HSK KN KR KIS Encoder All binector inputs BI of the corresponding command data set CDS will be interconnected accordingly Drive functions PROFIBUS proces Important paramete ag ba ath Select the default macros for your setpoint sources epso Terminal TM31 Setpoint sources cosi Noselecton x a gt All connector inputs C1 of the corresponding command AS ra data set CDS will be interconnected accordingly lt Back Cancel Help Fig 5 24 Default settings for setpoints command sources 29 In Command sources and Setpoint sources choose the appropriate settings for your device configuration The following command and setpoint source options are available Command Sources PROFIBUS TM31 terminals NAMUR PROFIdrive NAMUR Setpoint Sources PROFIBUS TM31 terminals Motorized potentiometer Fixed setpoint SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 23 Commissioning 06 05 NOTE
311. or a PTC thermistor are connected the temperature of the thermal motor model is displayed r0632 r0037 Power module temperatures Displays the measured temperatures in the power module r0046 Missing drive enable signals Displays missing enable signals that are preventing commissioning SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 10 7 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 06 05 r0050 Active command data set CDS Displays the active command data set CDS r0206 Rated power module power Displays the rated power module power for various load duty cycles r0207 Rated power module current Displays the rated power module power for various load duty cycles r0208 Rated line supply voltage of power module Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power module TM31 Key Diagnostic Parameters Details in List Manual r0002 Operating display Operating display for the TM31 r4021 Digital inputs actual terminal value Displays the actual value on the digital input terminals on the TM31 This parameter shows the actual value uninfluenced by simulation mode of the digital inputs r4022 Status of digital inputs Displays the status of the digital inputs on the TM31 This parameter shows the status of the digital inputs under the influence of simulation mode of the digital inputs r4047 Digital outputs status Displays the status of the digital outputs on th
312. or any recommendations or suggestions We reserve the right to make technical changes Siemens AG SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Contents Preface User documentation PAN WARNING Before installing and commissioning the converter make sure that you read all the safety notes and warnings carefully including the warning labels on the equipment itself The warning labels must always be legible Missing or damaged labels must be replaced Further information is available from Technical support Tel 49 0 180 50 50 222 Fax 49 0 180 50 50 223 Internet http Awww siemens com automation support request Internet Address Information about SINAMICS can be found on the Internet at the following address http www siemens com sinamics SINAMICS G150 p Operating Instructions IH Contents 06 05 Contents 1 Safety Information 1 1 1 1 Definitions and Warning Information 0 ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeetneeeeees 1 1 1 2 Safety and Operating Instructions ceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaees 1 3 2 Device Overview 2 1 2 1 Chapter Content rae a ea elle eat cee ae 2 1 2 2 Applications Features and Design c ccccceececececeeeeeeeceeeaaeeeeeeeeeteesnaeeeeees 2 2 2 2 1 ADpliCAatlOns esa E S E E EAE A E E EA E eny Hoaloeleee E 2 2 2 2 2 Feat res ige a a a aE a aaae ae aae A a Ta aa E ebesadiiney 2 2 2 3 BESIG Aana A T 2 3 2 3 1 EO a E E R
313. ou really want to restore the factory settings Bus address and baud rate will not be reset Restore factory settings V Save factory settings to ROM Cancel Choose Target system gt Copy from RAM to ROM Jej NOTE The Copy from RAM to ROM icon is only active when the drive unit is selected in the project navigator When the parameters have been reset to the factory settings initial commissioning needs to be carried out SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 43 Commissioning 06 05 SINAMICS G150 5 44 Operating Instructions Operation 6 1 Chapter Content This chapter provides information on the following J e PROFIBUS Terminal block NAMUR terminal block Basic information about the drive system Selecting command sources via e inputting setpoints via PROFIBUS Analog inputs Motorized potentiometer Fixed setpoints e i Setpoint channel Control via the AOP30 operator panel Closed loop control Monitoring functions Functions Protection un EA SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 1 Operation 06 05 6 2 General Information About Command and Setpoint Sources Description Three default settings are available for selecting the command sources and four for selecting the setpoint sources for the SINAMICS G150 cabinet unit Command Sources e PROFIBUS e TM31 terminals e NAMUR Setpoint Sources e PROFIBUS e Analog inputs e Motorized
314. ounding shutdown disconnection and overcurrent protection If an item of protective gear trips in a branch circuit a leakage current may have been disconnected To reduce the risk of fire or an electric shock the current carrying parts and other components in the cabinet unit should be inspected and damaged parts replaced When an item of protective gear trips the cause of the trip must be identified and rectified NOTE The standard cabinet units are equipped with shock hazard protection to BGV A 2 formerly VBG 4 in accordance with DIN 57 106 Part 100 VDE 0106 Part 100 The version with option M60 features additional protective covers that offer a higher level of shock hazard protection for current carrying parts when the cabinet doors are open These protective covers may have to be removed during installation and connection procedures Once work has been completed the protective covers must be properly refitted SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation 4 4 Introduction to EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EMC describes the capability of an electrical device to function satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without itself causing interference unacceptable for other devices in the environment EMC therefore represents a quality standard for the following e Internal noise immunity resistance against internal electrical disturbances e External noise immunity re
315. output present at terminal 1 ground is at terminal 2 p4076 0 4 Set TM31 AO_type analog output 0 to 10 10 V p4077 0 0 00 Set TM31 AO_char x1 to 0 00 p4078 0 0 000 Set TM31 AO_char y1 to 0 000 V p4079 0 100 00 Set TM31 AO_char x2 to 100 00 p4080 0 10 000 Set TM31 AO_char y2 to 10 000 V Fig 8 3 Example Setting analog output 0 and the characteristic SINAMICS G150 8 4 Operating Instructions 06 05 Output Terminals 8 3 Digital Outputs Description Four bi directional digital outputs terminal X541 and two relay outputs terminal X542 are available These outputs are for the most part freely parameterizable Signal Flow Diagram 1 ready to start r0899 0 1 ready to operate r0899 0 1 Operation enabled r0899 2 1 Ramp up ramp down completed 12199 5 Inversion p4048 8 11 DI DO 8 Fig 8 4 Signal flow diagram Digital outputs Factory setting DIDO 9 DIDO 10 5Q DIDO 11 6 Mo SE pe Digital output Terminals Factory setting DOO X542 2 3 Enable pulses DO1 X542 5 6 No fault DI DO8 X541 2 Ready to power up DI DO9 X541 3 DI DO10 X541 4 DI DO11 X541 5 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 8 5 Output Terminals 06 05 Selection of Possible Connections for the Digital Outputs Signal Bit in status P
316. p0350 M p0356 M p0358 M p0354 M A p0360 M fl Fig 9 1 Equivalent circuit diagram for induction motor and cable SINAMICS G150 9 4 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions Carrying out Motor Identification e Enter p1910 1 Alarm A07991 is displayed e Identification starts when the motor is switched on e p1910 resets itself to 0 successful identification or fault FO7990 is output NOTE To set the new controller setting permanently the data must be saved with p0977 or p0971 on the non volatile CompactFlash card WARNING AN During motor identification the drive may cause the motor to move The emergency OFF functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed The following parameters are determined by means of motor identification e p1910 1 p0350 p0354 p0356 p0358 p0360 p1825 p1828 p1829 p1830 9 2 1 2 Rotating Measurement and Speed Controller Optimization Description Speed controller optimization determines the data required e g moment of inertia for setting the speed controller It also measures the magnetization characteristic and rated magnetization current of the motor Speed control can be optimized via p1960 or p1900 1 If the rotating measurement is not to be carried out using the speed set in p1965 this parameter can b
317. peed controller Speed setpoint r1547 1 r1539 setpoint Speed actual 1 Only effective for p1400 2 1 T ve paa praso pie 2 Only effective for p1400 2 0 Fig 7 411 Speed controller with pre control When correctly adapted when accelerating the speed controller must compensate for disturbances in its control loop This is achieved with a relatively low controlled variable change at the controller output On the other hand speed setpoint changes are routed past the speed controller and are therefore more quickly executed The effect of the pre control variable can be adapted according to the application via the evaluation factor p1496 For p1496 100 the pre control is calculated according to the motor and load moment of inertia 00341 p0342 In order that the speed controller does not work against the entered torque setpoint a balancing filter is automatically used The time constant of the balancing filter corresponds to the equivalent delay time of the speed control loop The speed controller pre control is correctly set 01496 100 calibration using p0342 if the component of the speed controller r1482 does not change while ramping up or ramping down in the range n gt 20 x p0310 Thus the pre control allows a new speed setpoint to be approached without overshoot prerequisite the torque limiting does not act and the moment of inertia remains constant If the speed controller is pre controlled throu
318. peed lower Speed controller P gain adaptation speed upper Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed lower Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed upper Speed controller adaptation speed lower Speed controller adaptation speed upper Speed controller P gain scaling Dynamic response reduction field weakening SLVC only p1400 0 Speed control configuration Automatic Kp Tn adaptation active SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 4 3 4 Droop Function Description The droop function enabled via p1492 ensures that the speed setpoint is reduced proportionately as the load torque increases Drooping is the most straightforward way of controlling load balancing This type of control can only be applied however if the drives are operated in motor mode and the speed is more or less constant This method is only suitable to a limited extent for drives that are accelerated and braked with significant changes in speed This simple type of load balancing control is used for example in applications in which two or more motors are connected mechanically or operate with a common shaft and fulfill the above requirements In this case the droop compensates corrects torque differences that can occur as a result of the mechanical coupling by appropriately modifying the speeds of the individual motors individual drive is relieved when the torque becomes too great
319. peed controller CO Torque setpoint before supplementary torque SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 4 3 1 Speed controller pre control integrated pre control with balancing Description The command behavior of the speed control loop can be improved by calculating the accelerating torque from the speed setpoint and connecting it on the line side of the speed controller This torque setpoint mv is applied to the current controller the current controller is pre controlled using adaptation elements directly as additive reference variable enabled via p1496 The torque setpoint mv is calculated from mv p1496 J a p1496 p0341 p0342 a The motor moment of inertia p0341 is calculated when commissioning the drive system The factor p0342 between the total moment of inertia J and the motor moment of inertia must be determined manually or by optimizing the speed controller The acceleration is calculated from the speed difference over the time dn dt NOTE When speed controller optimization is carried out the ratio between the total moment of inertia and that of the motor p0342 is determined and acceleration pre control scaling p1496 is set to 100 If 1400 2 p1400 3 0 then the pre control balancing is automatically set SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 23 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Acceleration pre control MENA p0341 p0342 S
320. perature Ranga o 400 Cooling method AF Tamperaturbereich Kuhlart Degree of protection IP20 Weight kg Schutzart Gewicht Order number 1P 68L3710 1GE32 1A AQ Z Bestetinummar Serial Number F brik Nummer Varsion Varsion Fig 2 8 400 L13 L26 L45 150 159 i83 L84 L36 N 752249230014 Mada in EU Germany Date of Manufacture The date of manufacture can be ascertained as follows Type plate for the cabinet unit KE ON UAM COOUR ANDOA OONA U WU MUOU T cE List of device options aaa o Month of manufacture A Year of manufacture Table 2 1 Year and month of manufacture Letter Year of manufacture Letter Month of manufacture number number S 2004 1to9 January to September T 2005 O October V 2006 N November Y 2007 D December SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 2 13 Device Overview 06 05 Type Plate Data from Type Plate on Previous Page Table 2 2 Type plate data Specification Value Explanation Input 3AC Three phase connection 380 480 V Rated input voltage 239A Rated input current Output 3AC Three phase connection 0 480 V Rated output voltage 210A Rated output current Temperature range 0 40 C Ambient temperature range within which the cabinet unit can operate under 100 load Degree of protection IP20 Degree of protection Duty class l I Duty class to EN 60146 1 1 100 continuously
321. pical cause The drive is operating in regenerative mode and is supplying too much energy to the DC link Remedy Reduce the regenerative torque to maintain the DC link voltage within permissible limits e Undervoltage in the DC link Typical cause Failure of the supply voltage or supply for the DC link Remedy Specify a regenerative torque for the rotating drive to compensate the existing losses thereby stabilizing the voltage in the DC link kinetic buffering Kinetic buffering is only possible as long as energy is generated by the movement of the drive Properties e Vdc control This comprises Vdc_max control and Vdc_min control kinetic buffering which are independent of each other It contains a joint PI controller The dynamic factor is used to set Vdc_min and Vdc_max control to a smoother or harder setting independently of each other e Vdc_min control kinetic buffering With this function the kinetic energy of the motor is used for buffering the DC link voltage in the event of a momentary power failure thereby delaying the drive e Vdc_max Closed Loop Control This function can be used to control a momentary regenerative load without shutdown with overvoltage in DC link Vdc_max control is only recommended with a supply without active closed loop control for the DC link and without feedback SINAMICS G150 9 8 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Func
322. ponse e Description of the possible cause of the fault alarm e Description of the procedure for rectifying the problem e Standard fault acknowledgement after it has been rectified NOTE The fault alarm list is contained on the documentation CD supplied It also contains descriptions of the responses OFF 1 OFF2 etc External Warning 1 Warning A7850 External Warning 1 is triggered by the following optional protection devices in the cabinet unit e Thermistor motor protection unit alarm option L83 e PT100 Evaluation Unit Option L86 When a fault is indicated the following procedure is recommended 1 Identify the cause by examining the specified devices display or LEDs 2 Check the fault display on the relevant protection device and establish the fault 3 Rectify the displayed fault with the help of the appropriate operating instructions provided in Additional Operating Instructions SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 10 3 2 External Fault 1 Causes Fault code F7860 External Fault 1 is triggered by the following optional protection devices in the cabinet unit e Thermistor motor protection unit shutdown option L84 e PT100 Evaluation Unit Option L86 Remedy When a fault is indicated the following procedure is recommended Identify the cause by examining the specified devices display or LEDs 4 Check the fault display on the relevant protection devi
323. put voltage V 3 AC 500 V to 600 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 201 234 280 Rated output current A 175 215 260 Base load current A 170 208 250 Base load current I A 157 192 233 Maximum output frequency 4 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 3 5 3 9 4 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 68 73 69 73 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 120 2x 70 2x95 AWG MCM 300 2 x 000 2 x 4 0 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4x 240 4 x 240 4x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 95 120 2x70 AWG MCM 4 0 300 2 x 000 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2 x 150 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 400 2 x 400 2 x 500 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 390 390 390 Power block type GX GX GX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 800 x 2000 x600 800 x 2000x600 800 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 244 6 3NA3 252 6 3NA3 354 6 Rated current A 250 315 355 Size to DIN 43 620 1 2 2 3 Cond semi cond protection without option L26 3NE1 227 2 3NE1 230 2 3NE1 331 2 Rated current A 250 315 350 Size to DIN 43 620 1 1 1 2 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for exa
324. quirement m s 2 96 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 75 78 Line connection Per sub cabinet Recommended DIN VDE mm 4x 150 AWG MCM 4 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 8 x 240 AWG MCM 8 x 600 Fastening screw M12 4 holes Motor connection Per sub cabinet Recommended DIN VDE mm 3 x 185 AWG MCM 3 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 6 x 240 AWG MCM 6 x 600 Fastening screw M12 3 holes PE conductor connection Per sub cabinet Fastening screw M12 18 holes Approx weight standard version kg 2700 Power block type JX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 3200 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection Per sub cabinet with option L26 Circuit breaker Rated current A Size to DIN 43 620 1 Cond semi cond protection Per sub cabinet without option L26 Circuit breaker Rated current A 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 12 28 The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05
325. r One power module at least one motor and up to three sensors are assigned to drive control e Control unit inputs outputs The I Os on the control unit are evaluated within a drive object High speed inputs for probes are processed here in addition to bidirectional digital I Os Properties of a drive object 6 6 Separate parameter space Separate window in STARTER Separate fault alarm system Separate PROFIBUS telegram for process data SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation Optionally installed drive objects e Option board evaluation A further drive object handles evaluation of an installed option board The specific method of operation depends on the type of option board installed e Terminal module evaluation A separate drive object handles evaluation of the respective optional terminal modules Configuring Drive Objects When you commission the system for the first time using the STARTER tool you will use configuration parameters to set up the software based drive objects which are processed on the control unit Various drive objects can be created within a control unit The drive objects are configurable function blocks and are used to execute specific drive functions If you need to configure additional drive objects or delete existing ones after initial commissioning the drive system must be switched to configuration mode The parameters of a drive object cannot be accessed unt
326. reaker Circuit breaker Size to DIN 43 620 1 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 11 Technical Data 06 05 Table 12 12 Version A 380 V 480 V 3AC part 4 Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 2GE41 4AA0 2GE41 6AA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 630 710 900 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 900 1000 1250 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 1174 1444 1624 Rated output current A 1120 1380 1560 Base load current A 1092 1340 1516 Base load current I A 850 1054 1294 Maximum output frequency Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 16 4 19 2 20 2 Cooling air requirement m s 1 56 1 56 1 56 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 73 76 73 76 73 76 Line connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Recommended DIN VDE mm 2 x 2
327. redominantly used to simulate the drive without a motor being connected and without a DC link voltage In this case it should be noted that the simulation mode can only be activated under an actual DC link voltage of 40 V If the voltage lies above this threshold the simulation mode is reset and a fault message F07826 is issued Communications with a higher level automation system can be tested using the simulation mode If the drive is also to return actual values then it must be ensured that during simulation operation sensorless operation V f should be selected This means that large parts of the SINAMICS software such as software channel sequence control communications technology function etc can be tested in advance without requiring a motor Another application is to test the correct functioning of the Power Module Especially for drive units with higher power ratings 754 kW 690 V and 110 kW 400 V after repairs it is necessary to test the gating of the power semiconductors This is done by injecting a low DC voltage as DC link voltage e g 12 V The drive unit is then powered up and the pulses enabled It must be possible to run through all of the pulse patterns of the gating unit software This means that the software must allow the pulses to be switched in and various frequencies approached If a speed encoder is not being used then this is generally implemented using V f control or sensorless closed loop speed cont
328. resistance 19 Independent The user can define the output voltage of the power module independently voltage of the frequency using BICO parameter p1330 via the interfaces e g setpoint analog input AlO of the TM31 gt p1330 r4055 0 Function Diagram FD 1665 6300 Parameter e p1300 Open loop closed loop control operating mode SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 11 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 7 3 1 Voltage Boost Description With low output frequencies the V f characteristics yield only a small output voltage With low frequencies too the ohmic resistance of the stator windings has an effect and can no longer be ignored vis a vis the machine reactance With low frequencies therefore the magnetic flux is no longer proportional to the magnetization current or the V f ratio The output voltage may however be too low in order to e Magnetize the induction motor e Maintain the load e Compensate for the voltage drops ohmic losses in the winding resistors in the system e Generate a breakaway acceleration braking torque You can choose whether the voltage boost is to be active permanently or only during acceleration INF _abs val perm r0067 U_boost total Permanent voltage boost 11315 U_boost perm Mot _rated 0 p0305 R_stator active 10395 V_boost accelerate p13i1 Ramp up active Voltage boost at acceleration Fig 7 5 Total voltage boost
329. ridge shield gaps at terminals circuit breakers contactors and so on with minimum impedance and the greatest possible surface area Using Large Cross Sections e Use underground and grounding cables with large cross sections or better still with litz wires or flexible cables Laying the Motor Supply Cable Separately e The distance between the motor supply cable and signal cable should be gt 20 cm Do not lay power cables and motor supply cables in parallel to each other Securing the Potential to Ground Between Modules with Widely Differing Interference Potential e Lay an equalizing cable parallel to the control cable the cable cross section must be at least 16 mm e lf relays contactors and inductive or capacitive loads are connected the switching relays or contactors must be provided with anti interference elements Cable Installation e Cables that are subject to or sensitive to interference should be laid as far apart from each other as possible e Noise immunity increases when the cables are laid close to the ground potential For this reason you are advised to lay these cables in corners and on the ground potential e Ground the spare cables on at least one end e Long cables should be shortened or laid in noise resistant areas to avoid additional connecting points SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 9 Electrical Installation 06 05 e Conductors or cables that carry signals of different classes
330. ristic f characteristic e Energy saving because the low voltage also results in small currents and drops SINAMICS G150 7 10 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 1315 Parameter Meaning Application Property values 3 Programmable Characteristic that takes into characteristic account motor machine torque A curve Vl ie nee et ade ce Pea Be r0071 i Ee p1325 f 7 p1323 5 p1321 t 3 i f1 f2 f3 f4 fmax p1320 p1322 p1324 p1326 p1082 5 Precise Characteristic see parameter value 0 that takes into account the frequency technological particularity of an application e g textile applications drives e Whereby the current limitation Imax controller only affects the output voltage and not the output frequency e By disabling slip compensation 6 Precise Characteristic see parameter value 1 that takes into account the frequency technological particularity of an application e g textile applications drives with flux e Whereby the current limitation Imax controller only affects the output current control voltage and not the output frequency FCC e By disabling slip compensation Voltage drops in the stator resistance for static dynamic loads are also compensated flux current control FCC This is particularly useful for small motors since they have a relatively high stator
331. rive ramp function generator is always active Timeout Monitoring Settings Menu Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings 6 7 7 8 Timeout monitoring factory setting 3000 ms The monitoring time continuously monitors communication between the operator panel and drive If when the drive is in LOCAL mode no communication signal has been received once the monitoring time has elapsed the drive is stopped with OFF1 and fault F1030 control priority monitoring sign of life failure is displayed Operator Input Inhibit Parameterization Inhibit To prevent users from accidentally actuating the control keys and changing parameters you can activate an operator input parameterization inhibit using a key pushbutton Two key icons appear in the top right of the display when these inhibit functions are enabled Table 6 18 Display for operator input parameterization inhibit Inhibit type Online operation Offline operation No inhibit Operator input inhibit j j ro Parameterization inhibit a Sn m Operator input inhibit parameterization inhibit Ai SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 59 Operation 06 05 Settings Operator input inhibit factory setting no e Yes The parameters can still be viewed but a parameter value cannot be saved message in the status bar Operator input inhibit parameterization disabled The OFF key red i
332. rmware When you upgrade the cabinet unit firmware by installing a new CompactFlash Card with a new firmware version for example you may also have to upgrade the firmware for the components in the cabinet unit When you implement new firmware on the CompactFlash card the firmware for the CU320 is upgraded automatically when you install it and switch it on The cabinet unit components power section customer terminal block and optional SMC30 are supplied with the firmware by means of the procedure described below The firmware versions for the individual components can be read in the following parameters e 10128 Firmware version of the power module e 10148 Firmware version of the sensor module SMC30 e 10158 Firmware version of the customer terminal block TM31 NOTE The power supply to the components must not be interrupted while the firmware is being upgraded CAUTION New firmware should only be installed if there is a problem with the cabinet unit Problems with the cabinet unit cannot be ruled out after the firmware has been upgraded SINAMICS G150 11 42 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing Upgrading the Firmware for the Cabinet Unit Components Setting the Expert on the operator panel lt Key pushbutton gt lt Access level gt Set Expert and confirm enter activation code 47 Select the number of the DRIVE CLiQ node Expert access level p7828
333. rol NOTE The following functions are de activated in the simulation mode e Motor data identification e Motor data identification rotating without encoder e Pole position identification No flying restart is carried out for V f control and sensorless closed loop vector control Commissioning Simulation is activated using p1272 1 the following pre requisites must be fulfilled e The drive unit must have been commissioned for the first time default Standard induction motors e The DC link voltage must lie below 40 V observe the tolerance of the DC link voltage sensing Alarm A07825 simulation mode activated must be output during simulation operation Parameter e p1272 Simulation operation SINAMICS G150 9 26 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended Functions 9 3 1 Technology Controller 9 3 1 1 Description The technology controller function module allows simple control functions to be implemented e g e Liquid level control e Temperature control e Dancer position control e Pressure control e Flow control e Simple control without higher level control e Tension control The technology controller is designed as a PID controller whereby the differentiator can be switched to the control deviation channel or the actual value channel factory setting The P and D components can be set separately A value of 0 deactivates the correspondin
334. rticularly compact in design with an in built line reactor It can be used for example when the power supply connection components such as the main contactor and main circuit breaker with fuses for conductor protection and semi conductor protection are installed in an existing central low voltage distribution unit MCC The advantage here is that the cabinet unit can be sited decentrally and in the immediate vicinity of the motor thereby avoiding the need for long motor cables and additional output filters Line fuses are required for conductor protection VDE 636 Part 10 Line fuses can also be used to protect the semi conductors of the line commutated converter VDE 636 Part 40 EN 60 269 4 The cabinet unit simply comprises a single cabinet with a width of 400 mm 600 mm or 1000 mm Control Unit CU320 A10 Customer terminal block A60 BANNAN MMII Ventilation grilles EUULGAUNLEAL WEAN depending on degree of protection Motor connection X2 Line connection X1 Line reactor L1 FIPTTTTTILIT ATI TTT BALAA RAHAA BARATA AANAAA y g EZZ Fig 2 3 Example of a cabinet unit version C e g 315 kW 690 V 3AC SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Device Overview 2 4 Wiring Principle Wiring principle versions A and C Line connection PE Main circuit breaker optional Main fuses optional Main contactor optional Line reactor Uk 2 lt 5
335. ructions 7 19 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 7 4 3 Speed Controller Description Both closed loop control techniques with and without encoder SLVC VC have the same speed controller structure that contains the following components as kernel e PI controller e Speed controller pre control e Droop function The total of the output variables result in the torque setpoint which is reduced to the permissible magnitude by means of the torque setpoint limitation The speed controller receives its setpoint r0062 from the setpoint channel and its actual value r0063 either directly from the speed sensor speed control with sensor VC or indirectly via the motor model speed control without sensor SLVC The system difference is increased by the PI controller and in conjunction with the pre control results in the torque setpoint When the load torque increases the speed setpoint is reduced proportionately when the droop function is active which means that the single drive within a group two or more mechanically connected motors is relieved when the torque becomes too great Droop injection Y as Pre control Closed loop speed control r0062 speed Speed setpoint controller P Torque g setpoint r1547 1 p gt Actual speed value Only active if pre control is active SLVC p1452 p1470 p1472 p1496 gt 0 Fig 7 10 Speed controller SINAMICS G150 7 20
336. s 06 05 Electrical Installation Item Activity Fulfilled Complete Before the cabinet is operated from an ungrounded supply IT supply the connection bracket for the basic interference suppression device must be removed see Section 4 7 6 O O 10 The type plate can be used to ascertain the date of manufacture If the period from the date of manufacture to initial commissioning or the cabinet unit downtime is less than two years the DC link capacitors do not have to be reformed If the downtime period is longer than two years they must be reformed in accordance with the description in the Maintenance and Servicing section O E 11 With an external auxiliary supply the cable for the 230 V AC supply must be connected to terminal X40 while the cable for the 24 V DC supply must be connected to terminal X9 see Section 4 8 12 Option L15 Sinusoidal filter The filter must be selected during commissioning via STARTER or AOP30 You are advised to check your selection by checking the setting p0230 3 Any required parameterization is carried out automatically see Section 4 10 2 13 Option L19 Connection for external auxiliary equipment To supply auxiliary equipment e g separately driven fan for motor the drive must be properly connected to terminals X155 1 L1 to X155 3 L3 The supply voltage of the auxiliary equipment must match the input voltage of the cabinet un
337. s Better command behavior Shortest settling times when disturbances occur Torque control in a range greater than 01 20 00 AM is required Allows a defined and or variable torque for speeds below approx 5 of the rated motor frequency P0310 to be maintained With regard to setpoint input vector control is divided into Speed control Torque current control torque control SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 4 1 Vector Control Without Sensor Description In vector control without an encoder SLVC Sensorless Vector Control the position of the flux and actual speed must be determined via the electric motor model The model is buffered by the incoming currents and voltages At low frequencies approx 0 Hz the model cannot determine the speed For this reason and due to uncertainties in the model parameters or inaccurate measurements the system is switched from closed loop to open loop operation in this range The switchover is governed by time and frequency conditions p1755 p1756 and p1758 The system does not wait for the time condition to elapse when the setpoint frequency at the ramp function generator input and the actual frequency are below p1755 x 1 p1756 simultaneously f_act lA p1755 1 min Open control loop Closed control loop Fig 7 9 Switchover conditions In open loop operation the actual speed value is the same as the setp
338. s being established RDY Red Steady light At least one fault is present in this component Green red 2 Hz flashing Firmware is being downloaded light Green 2 Hz flashing Component recognition via LED is activated p0144 orange light Note or Both options depend on the LED status when component Red orange recognition is activated via p0144 1 OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside permissible tolerance range Measuring system supply lt 5 V only when ready for operation Orange Steady light Electronics power supply for the measuring system is available OUT gt 5 V Measuring system supply gt 5 V Notice It must be guaranteed that the connected encoder may be operated with a 24 V power supply If an encoder designed for connection to 5 V is connected to 24 V then this can destroy the encoder electronics SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 10 5 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms 06 05 10 2 2 Diagnosis via Parameters All Objects Key Diagnostic Parameters Details in List Manual r0945 Fault code Displays the fault number Index 0 is the most recent fault last fault to have occurred r0949 Fault value Displays additional information about the fault This information is required for detailed fault diagnosis r0948 Time that the fault comes in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the fault occurred r2109 Time that
339. s enabled The LOCAL REMOTE ON green JOG CW CCW INCREASE and DECREASE keys are disabled Parameterization inhibit factory setting no e Yes Parameters cannot be changed unless a password is entered The parameterization process is the same as with the operator input inhibit If you try and change parameters the message Parameterization inhibit no change rights is displayed in the status bar All the control keys can however still be actuated NOTE If you have forgotten your password you can switch off the parameterization inhibit as follows 1 Switch off the power supply 2 Disconnect the RS232 data cable 3 When switching the power supply back on press the key pushbutton and hold down for 20 s 4 Press the Menu key gt Commissioning Service gt AOP settings gt Set Download AOP settings from the drive to No Press the key operated button gt Parameteriz lock gt Enter new password Insert the RS232 data cable Press the Menu key gt Select run up CN OI Press the key operated button 9 Enter the new password 10 Acknowledge Save data in the drive 11 When the key symbol in the top right of the display disappears the access protection function has been reset Access level standard factory setting The different parameters required for this complex application are filtered so that they can be displayed as clearly as possible You select them according to the access l
340. s node Last bus node Bus ae oe Bus terminator From previous bus node To next bus node Fig 6 24 Position of the bus terminating resistors Cable Routing Feed the PROFIBUS cable into the electronics module from above Route the bus cable on the line provided and secure it to the line using cable bindings The cable must be fed through without a bus plug Shield connection Fig 6 25 Cable routing SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 33 Operation 06 05 6 6 2 Control via PROFIBUS 6 6 2 1 General information DP1 PROFIBUS Diagnostics LED The PROFIBUS diagnostics LED is located on the front of the control unit see 6 6 1 Its statuses are described in the following table Table 6 5 Description of the DP1 LED Color Status Description OFF Cyclic communication has not yet taken place Green Continuous PROFIBUS is ready for communication and cyclic communication is running Green Flashing 0 5 Hz Full cyclic communication is not yet taking place Possible causes e The master is not transmitting setpoints Red Continuous Cyclic communication has been interrupted 6 6 2 2 Setting the PROFIBUS Address Two methods are available for setting the PROFIBUS address e The addres
341. s switches DIP switches on the front of the control unit behind the cover plate see 6 6 1 If you use the address switch parameter p0918 is read only and displays the address that is set If the switch is reset the new setting does not become effective until the control unit is switched on e Entering parameter p0918 on the operator panel You can only do this if the address has been set to 0 or 127 using the address switch that is all switches from S1 to S7 are set to ON or OFF In this case changes become effective immediately Table 6 6 PROFIBUS address switches Switch Significance Technical specifications S1 2 1 a 20 91 92 93 24 95 26 ay ae Significance 1 2 4 8 163264 3 a4 on s4 2 8 l OF F eer ON 5 Example se a LANA Ut OFF oe BOA 1 4 32 37 SINAMICS G150 6 34 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 6 2 3 Setting the PROFIBUS Ident Number The PROFIBUS Ident Number PNO ID can be set using p2042 SINAMICS can be operated on PROFIBUS with various identities This allows a PROFIBUS GSD that is independent of the device to be used e g PROF Idrive VIK NAMUR with Ident Number 3AA0 hex e 0 SINAMICS S G e 1 VIK NAMUR A new setting only becomes effective after POWER ON reset or download NOTE The advantages of Totally Integrated Automation TIA can only be utilized when selecting 0 6 6 3 Telegrams and Process Data General information
342. sccnessenctesescncctsscubeetusccnnsesatiasbecoeenedtcecubentieeenede 11 30 11 4 13 Replacing the Fan Type UX 0 cece ceeccceeeeeeeeeee cece seen eeeeaeaeeeeeeesecaeaeeeeesesesenaeeeeeeseeeeeea 11 34 11 4 14 Replacing the Fan Fuses U1 F10 U1 F 11 oo eeceeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeenneeeeneaa 11 38 11 4 15 Replacing the Fuses for the Auxiliary Power Supply A1 F11 A1 F12 eee 11 38 11 4 16 Replacing Fuse AF2 iniseti iiai aieea 11 38 11 4 17 Replacing the Cabinet Operator Panel 0 0 0 eecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeesnneeeeneaa 11 39 11 4 18 Replacing the Backup Battery of the Cabinet Operator Panel nascere 11 39 11 5 Reforming the DC Link Capacitors cee cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaes 11 41 11 6 Messages after replacing DRIVE CLiQ component eeceeeereeeeenees 11 42 11 7 Upgrading the Cabinet Unit Firmware ecccccceeeeeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneaas 11 42 11 8 Loading the new operator panel firmware and database from the PC 11 44 12 Technical Data 12 1 12 1 Chapter Contents arenae nen ia ee ie cs ae eed 12 1 12 2 General Data serrian n ative ieee ide eae nied eave lakes 12 2 12 2 1 Derating Datawcw need aaa SA nein nee ieee eae 12 3 12 2 2 Overload Capability cscs aves ii doce anise 12 7 12 3 Technical Data c sieciciiiii miei itt dint aaa 12 8 12 3 1 Cabinet Unit Version A 380 V 480 V 3AC Q cee ceeececeeeeereeceneeeeeeeceaeeeeneeseaeeeeeeeenaeeeenees 12 9 12 3 2 Cabinet
343. se load current 7 A 80 95 115 Base load current IH A 76 89 107 Maximum output frequency 4 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 1 7 2 1 2 7 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 17 0 17 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 67 68 67 68 67 68 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 50 50 70 AWG MCM 00 00 000 Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 35 50 70 AWG MCM 0 00 000 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x70 2 x 150 2 x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 000 2 x 400 2 x 400 Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 320 320 320 Power block type FX FX FX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Conductor protection with option L26 3NA3 132 6 3NA3 132 6 3NA3 136 6 Rated current A 125 125 160 Size to DIN 43 620 1 1 1 1 Cond semi cond protection without option L26 3NE1 022 2 3NE1 022 2 3NE1 224 2 Rated current A 125 125 160 Size to DIN 43 620 1 00 00 1 1 L19 or B03 2 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 3 cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents i
344. se the following terminal assignment for TM31 free 2 free Q free M Ja Acknowledge fault N10 see ue X522 Ao ov AO 0 p NO AO oc NO ao 1v ty AO 1 sire ao ic N Temp 7 NO Temp 7 NO X541 Jis 1 DI DO 8 Actual speed 0 20mA value Actual current 0 2 value DI DO 9 DI DO 10 DI DO 11 M Enable pulses O No fault Fig 6 1410 TM31 terminal assignment with PROFIBUS default setting Control word 1 The bit assignment for control word 1 is described in 6 6 4 Status word 1 The bit assignment for status word 1 is described in 6 6 5 Switching the Command Source The command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 SINAMICS G150 6 20 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 4 2 TM31 Terminals Default Setting Requirements The TM31 Terminals default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER TM31 Terminals e AOP30 G S150 TM31 Command Sources r0807 Master control active LOCAL REMOTE key REMOTE TM31 LOCAL operator panel Internal control Input terminals A60 TM31 Fig 6 11 AOP30 command sources lt g
345. see Section 4 10 9 21 Option L60 EMERGENCY OFF category 1 stops the drive in a O O EMERGENCY controlled manner With this option it may be necessary OFF category 1 to implement braking units brake chopper and external 24 V DC braking resistors due to the load characteristic and to achieve the required shutdown times No additional wiring is necessary when implemented in conjunction with option L45 If the cabinet unit is integrated in an external safety circuit however the contact must be looped in via terminal block X120 see Section 4 10 10 22 Option L61 L62 The connecting cables and ground for the braking O O 25 50 kW resistor must be connected to terminal block X5 1 2 A braking unit connection must be established between the braking resistor thermostat and customer terminal block A60 The settings for evaluating the thermostat as External Fault 3 must be made see Section 4 10 11 23 Option L83 The PTC thermistor sensors PTC resistor type A must O O Thermistor be connected to the thermistor motor protection motor unit F127 at terminals T1 and T2 for warning see protection unit Section 4 10 12 warning SINAMICS G150 4 4 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installation Item Activity Fulfilled Complete 24 Option L84 The PTC thermistor sensors PTC resistor type A must O O p be connected to the thermistor motor protection Th t tn a unit F125 at terminals T1 and
346. sistance against external electromagnetic disturbances e Noise emission level environmental effects caused by electromagnetic emissions To ensure that the cabinet unit functions satisfactorily in the system the environment subject to interference must not be neglected For this reason special requirements exist regarding the structure and the EMC of the system Operational Reliability and Noise Immunity Measures must be taken by the converter manufacturer and the operator to ensure the greatest possible level of operational reliability and noise immunity within the entire system converters automation systems drive motors and so on Only when all of these measures have been taken are the satisfactory function of the converter and compliance with the legal requirements 89 336 EEC ensured Noise Emissions Product standard EN 61800 3 outlines the EMC requirements for variable speed drive systems It specifies requirements for converters with operating voltages of less than 1000 V Different environments and categories are defined depending on where the drive system is installed Medium voltage network C T I Conduction of I interference Low voltage industrial network Low voltage public network Measuring point for conducted interference Environment 1 Limit of facility Equipment affected by interference Measuring point for emitted interference Fig 4 1 Defin
347. st for the display Defining the operation screen In this menu you can switch between four operation screens You can set the parameters that are to be displayed Define operating screen Operating form Values Operating form Typ 4 values 2 bar r1114 N_SET Setpt after limit Operating form Valu r0024 F_OUT Output frequency Form2 Type 10 values r0032 PACTV Output smoothed Form2 Values r0026 U_DC Vdc smoothed Form2 Not active Help A Back v Back Change Fig 6 28 Defining the operation screen SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 51 Operation 06 05 The following image shows how the entries are assigned to the screen positions OPERATION gt Entry 01 Entry 02 Entry 03 Entry 04 Entry 05 Entry 06 Entry 07 Entry 08 Entry 09 Entry 10 OPERATION gt Entry 01 Entry 03 Entry 05 Entry 07 Entry 09 Entry 02 Entry 04 Entry 06 Entry 08 50 OPERATION gt 12 25 30 S OPERATION gt 12 25 30 S Entry 01 Entry 02 Entry 01 Entry 03 Entry 04 0 50 100 Entry 05 Entry 02 0 50 100 0 50 100 Entry 06 LL w Entry 03 a as a a 0 50 100 0 50 100 Fig 6 29 Position of the entries in the operation screen 6 7 6 4 Lists of Signals for the Operation Screen Vector Object Table 6 15 List of signals for the operation screen vector object Signal Parameter Short name Unit Scaling 100 see Table 6 16 Factory setting entry no Speed setpoint
348. starting work you should also measure the voltage after the 5 minutes have elapsed The voltage can be measured on DC link terminals DCP and DCN DANGER AN When the external power supply for individual options L50 L55 or the external 230 V AC auxiliary supply is connected dangerous voltages are still present in the cabinet unit even when the main circuit breaker is open SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 1 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 2 11 2 1 Maintenance The cabinet unit mainly comprises electronic components Apart from the fan s the unit contains very few components that are subject to wear or require maintenance or servicing Maintenance aims to preserve the specified condition of the cabinet unit Dirt and contamination must be removed regularly and parts subject to wear replaced The following points must generally be observed Cleaning Dust Deposits Dust deposits inside the cabinet unit must be removed at regular intervals or at least once a year by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations The unit must be cleaned using a brush and vacuum cleaner and dry compressed air max 1 bar for areas that cannot be easily reached Ventilation The ventilation openings in the cabinet must never be obstructed The fan must be checked to make sure that it is functioning correctly Cable and Screw Terminals 11 2 Cable and screw terminals must be checked regularly
349. sure that all the files and directories are stored in the same form as on the CompactFlash card If required you can restore the device status after the drive has been commissioned by transferring the stored data to the CompactFlash card NOTE You should only remove the CompactFlash card when the system is switched off If you remove it while the system is switched on warning A1100 CompactFlash Card removed is output Restoring the Saved Configuration To restore the saved configuration you have to delete all the files on the CompactFlash card and transfer the saved copy to the CompactFlash card IMPORTANT When you delete the files on the CompactFlash card the saved drive parameters are permanently lost When re importing the saved files you must ensure that none of the files in the User sub folder on the CompactFlash card has a write protection attribute This can occur for example if the copy of the CompactFlash card was stored temporarily on a CD The CompactFlash card directory must be structured in the same way as before If you move individual files to sub folders you may not be able to use the CompactFlash card SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 41 Commissioning 06 05 5 8 Resetting Parameters to the Factory Settings The factory settings represent the defined original status of the cabinet unit on delivery Resetting the parameters to the factory settings means that all the para
350. switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 SINAMICS G150 6 24 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 4 4 PROF Idrive NAMUR Default Setting Requirements The PROF Idrive NAMUR B04 option has been installed in the cabinet unit The default setting NAMUR was selected when commissioning the drive unit e STARTER PROF Idrive NAMUR e AOP30 G S150 PROF Idrive NAMUR Command Sources 10807 master control active LOCAL REMOTE key 0 REMOTE PROF Idrive NAMUR 1 LOCAL operator panel Internal control Namur terminals X2 Fig 6 15 Command sources AOP30 gt PROF Idrive NAMUR Priority The priority of the command sources is shown in Fig 6 15 NOTE The emergency OFF and motor protection signals are always active regardless of the command source For LOCAL master control all of the supplementary setpoints are de activated SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 25 Operation 06 05 Terminal assignment for the PROFldrive NAMUR default setting The following terminal assignment as for option B04 is obtained when selecting the default setting PROFldrive NAMUR NAMUR terminal strip A1X2 1 S lt M 9 P24 V Interlocking C 15 p OC 19 pav baie from the line I Ko sC 18 A1X3 90 SG PTC sensor Al o zA SC 91 Fig 6 16 Terminal assignment for the default setting PROF Idrive NAMUR Control word 1 The bit
351. t TM31 terminals Priority The priority of the command sources is shown in Fig 6 11 NOTE The emergency OFF and motor protection signals are always active regardless of the command source For LOCAL master control all of the supplementary setpoints are de activated SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 21 Operation 06 05 TM31 Terminal Assignment with TM31 Terminals Default Setting When you choose the TM31 Terminals default setting the terminal assignment for TM31 is as follows ON OFF1 MOPf FSWO MOP FSW1 Acknowledge fault Enable inverter Actual speed 0 20mA 3 value A free 4 free free Actual current o0 20 mA value DI DO 8 2 pido 9 2 Ready to Start Ue free free DI DO 10 free DI DO 11 M Enable pulses O No fault Fig 6 12 TM31 terminal assignment with TM31 Terminals default setting Switching the Command Source The command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 SINAMICS G150 6 22 Operating Instructions 06 05 Operation 6 4 3 NAMUR Default Setting Requirements The NAMUR terminal block option BOO is installed in the c
352. t selection bit 0 e p0821 BI Drive data set selection bit 1 e p0822 BI Drive data set selection bit 2 e p0823 BI Drive data set selection bit 3 e p0824 BI Drive data set selection bit 4 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 13 Operation 06 05 6 3 4 BICO Technology Interconnection of Signals Description Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and internal control variables BICO technology Binector Connector Technology allows the drive to be adapted to a wide variety of conditions Digital and analog signals which can be connected freely by means of BICO parameters are identified by the prefix BI BO Cl or CO in their parameter name These parameters are identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams NOTE The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO technology Binectors BI Binector Input BO Binector Output A binector is a digital binary signal without a unit which can assume the value 0 or 1 Binectors are subdivided into binector inputs signal sink and binector outputs signal source Table 6 2 Binectors Abbreviation and Name Description symbol Binector Input Can be interconnected to a binector output Bh as source Binector Input The number of the binector output must be signal sink entered as a parameter value Binector output Can be used as a source for a bi
353. t to the ground The fixing dimensions are specified on the dimension drawings enclosed Two wall supports for attaching the top of the cabinet to the wall are also supplied for 400 mm wide cabinets to provide extra security Mechanically connecting separately shipped transport units The following cabinets are supplied in the form of two separate transport units e 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 The lefthand sub cabinet has the locator code H A24 and H A49 the righthand sub cabinet has the locator code H A25 and H A50 the cabinet operator panel is also mounted here A series of connectors is provided attached loose with the equipment to mechanically connect the two sub cabinets These connectors should be attached and as far as possible evenly distributed SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Mechanical Installation 3 3 5 Fitting Additional Canopies Option M21 or Hoods Option M23 M54 To increase the degree of protection of the cabinets from IP20 standard to IP21 IP23 or IP54 additional canopies or hoods are supplied These must be fitted once the cabinets have been installed Description The degree of protection can be increased to IP21 by fitting an additional canopy The canopy is flush mounted with the cabinet unit and is fitted using spacers at a distance of 250 mm above the top of the cabinet As a result ca
354. te ecshale E EE wetoeisandiges 5 2 5 2 2 The STARTER User Interface niini ri i 5 3 5 3 Commissioning Using STARTER c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseenaeeeeenaees 5 4 5 3 1 Creating YOur Project ice csccsesescenssgeeceseeheces conte ces terpesstedieeany a aAa tiaL auanei 5 4 5 3 2 Configuritig th Drive Unitari eiia pee sancesesbdnchedesdecssadaasdeee 5 11 5 3 3 Additional and necessary settings for cabinet units with a high power rating 5 28 5 3 4 Starting the Drive Project scchecceicceebecccegteepeceneueceedendhanesenbeeesdhecuenk EEA AEAEE Ra 5 29 5 4 The Operator Panel AOP30 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee erties ee teaser tiieeeeesneeeeeteaa 5 31 5 5 Initial COMMISSIONING aesir RR rA EATARRA RAEE I AKUERE SAA iia Aaa iA 5 32 5 5 1 InitialbRampel psi e a te a a a A 5 32 5 5 2 Basic COMMISSIONING 00 0 eee eee ee eeee ee eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeenneeesenaes 5 33 5 5 3 Additional and necessary settings for cabinet units with a high power rating 5 38 5 6 Status After COMMISSIONING eesin ee enai a ARAE RRETA 5 40 5 7 Datta BAGkUp e EE E E E AA E EN 5 41 5 7 1 Saving the CompactFlash Card Parameter Settings eenenenneeeeeeeerereerereeeeren 5 41 5 7 2 Restoring the Saved Configuration 0 00 ccceccceeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 5 41 5 8 Resetting Parameters to the Factory Settings 00 cc ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneees 5
355. tective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 5 Remove the busbars 12 screws Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 3 plugs oa fF W N Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection 2 plug 7 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the installation device for the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 13 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 5 Replacing the Power Block Type JX Replacing the Left Hand Power Block T i 5 4 3 6 ig ooooL ooo oo ool SO of Sake Ss aay nek an ge 610 OTE OOO e Wo Ol OQ O O ety e or e or or je et 2
356. test possible surface area are recommended for the terminal boxes SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 13 Electrical Installation 06 05 Minimum motor cable lengths for a 12 pulse infeed and connected to a motor with a one winding system 4 7 2 4 14 For a 12 pulse infeed and connected to a motor with a one winding system for the subsequent cabinet units it must be ensured that the motor cable lengths are kept to a minimum if a motor reactor option L08 is not being used Table 4 1 Minimum cable lengths Order No Power kW Minimum cable length m 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 630 30 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 710 25 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 900 20 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 630 30 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 710 25 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 1000 20 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 1000 25 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 1350 20 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 1500 20 Opening and closing the disconnect switch The following cabinet units are equipped with disconnect switches Q98 and Q99 in cabinet field H A25 these disconnect switches can be used to establish or interrupt the connection between the DC links of the sub cabinets connected in parallel e for 3 ph 380 V 480 V AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e for 3 ph 500 V 600 V AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e for 3 ph 660 V 690 V AC
357. the fault has cleared in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the fault was rectified r2124 Alarm value Displays additional information about the alarm This information is required for detailed alarm diagnosis r2123 Time that the alarm came in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the alarm occurred r2125 Time that the alarm has been cleared in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the alarm was rectified CU320 Key Diagnostic Parameters Details in List Manual rd002 Operating display Operating display for the CU r0018 Control Unit firmware version Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit For the display parameters for the firmware version of the other connected components see the parameter description in the List Manual r0721 Digital inputs terminal actual value Displays the actual value at the digital input terminals on the CU This parameter shows the actual value uninfluenced by simulation mode of the digital inputs r0722 Digital inputs status CU Displays the status of the digital inputs on the CU This parameter shows the status of the digital inputs under the influence of simulation mode of the digital inputs SINAMICS G150 10 6 Operating Instructions 06 05 Diagnosis Faults and Alarms r0747 Digital outputs status CU Displays the status of the digital outp
358. the fuse Replacing Fuse A1 F21 1 Open the cabinet 2 Remove the defective fuse 3 Fit the replacement fuse and close the fuse holder 4 Close the cabinet The order numbers for replacing fuses that have blown can be found in the spare parts list WARNING You must carry out the following e Disconnect the auxiliary power supply e Identify the cause of the fault e Replace the fuse SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Maintenance and Servicing 11 4 17 Replacing the Cabinet Operator Panel N DO nO fF W DY Switch off the main circuit breaker Open the cabinet Disconnect the power supply and communications line on the operator panel Release the fastenings on the operator panel Remove the operator panel Install the new operator panel Carry out any other work by reversing the sequence 11 4 18 Replacing the Backup Battery of the Cabinet Operator Panel Table 11 2 Technical specifications for the backup battery Type CR2032 3V lithium battery Manufacturer Maxell Sony Panasonic Rated capacity 220 mAh Maximum permissible charging 10 mA restricted to lt 2 mA in operator panel current Self discharge at 20 C 1 year Service life in backup mode gt 1 year at 70 C gt 1 5 years at 20 C Service life in operation gt 2 years Replacing the Backup Battery 1 2 oOo ON DO fF Switch off the main circuit breaker Op
359. the set access level and the selected parameter group govern which parameters are displayed You can set the access level in the menu for inhibit functions which can be called up using the key button The parameters for access levels 1 and 2 are sufficient for simple applications The default setting is 1 Standard SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 49 Operation 06 05 6 7 5 6 7 5 1 6 7 5 2 6 50 At access level 3 experts you can change the structure of the function by interconnecting BICO parameters For this reason this access level is password protected password 47 The parameter list displays more options than there are function keys You can use the lt lt key to change the function of the keys To return from the second menu press F5 gt gt Once a function is complete the system automatically returns to the main menu F1 Help F2 DS Select and F3 EEPROM are available in the extended menu In the DS Selection menu data set selection you can choose which of the data sets chosen is currently DISPLAYED Data set parameters are indicated by a c d m or e between the parameter number and parameter designator The second line from the top aligned right shows which data sets are currently displayed Fault Memory Alarm Memory Faults Shows which faults are currently present max 8 To select one of the faults choose F2 To call up a description o
360. tial rounding off time Ramp function generator final rounding off time OFF3 ramp down time OFF3 initial rounding off time OFF3 final rounding off time NOTE The effective ramp up time increases when you enter an initial and final rounding off time Effective ramp up time p1120 0 5 x p1130 0 5 x p1131 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 7 3 V f Control Description The simplest solution for a control procedure is the V f characteristic whereby the stator voltage for the induction motor or synchronous motor is controlled proportionately to the stator frequency This method has proved successful in a wide range of applications with low dynamic requirements such as e Pumps and fans e Belt drives e Multi motor drives and other similar processes V f control aims to maintain a constant flux in the motor whereby the flux is proportional to the magnetization current Iu or the ratio of voltage U to frequency f Iu U f The torque M generated by the induction motors is in turn proportional to the product or more precisely the vector product x of the flux and current To generate as much torque as possible with a given current the motor must function using the greatest possible constant flux To maintain a constant flux therefore the voltage must be changed in proportion to the frequency f to ensure a constant magne
361. ting Instructions The PT100 evaluation unit can monitor up to 6 sensors The sensors can be connected using a two wire or three wire system With the two wire system inputs SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 45 Electrical Installation 06 05 Tx1 and Tx3 must be assigned With the three wire system input Tx2 must also be connected x 1 2 6 The limit values can be programmed by the user for each channel A shielded signal cable is recommended If this is not possible however the sensor cables should at least be twisted in pairs In the factory setting the measurement channels are divided into two groups of three channels With motors for example three PT100 can therefore be monitored in the stator windings and two PT100 in the motor bearings Channels that are not used can be masked out using appropriate parameter settings The output relays are integrated in the internal fault and warning train of the cabinet unit The messages can also be picked up by the customer via two spare fault signaling relays Two user programmable analog outputs are also available 0 4 to 20 mA and 0 2 to 10 V for integration in a higher level controller The power for the PT100 evaluation unit is supplied and the evaluation itself carried out within the converter In the event of a fault the external alarm 1 A7850 and external fault 1 F7860 Connection Table 4 36 Terminal block A1 A140 connection for evaluation unit
362. ting Instructions 06 05 Commissioning 5 3 2 Configuring the Drive Unit In the project navigator open the component that contains your drive unit fF STARTER Project _ O xi Project Edit Target system View Options Window Help E Cece et 5 ff ef Ne Set af cle 85 sal al 95 ERIE Va SSS f Project gt Insert single drive fla Drive_unit_o Configure drive unit gt Overview gt Configuration gt Topology Control _Unit Press F1 to open Help display CMT Fig 5 11 Project navigator configuring the drive unit 1 In the project navigator click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you want to configure The plus sign becomes a minus sign and the drive unit configuration options are displayed as a tree below the drive unit 2 Double click Configure drive unit SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 11 Commissioning 06 05 Configure the Drive Unit Configuration Drive_unit_0 Drive unit Options Control structure Drive setting CL Motor Motor holding brake Defaults of the setpoint ODrive functions Important parameters Summary j SAW Configure the drive unit Voltage selection 400 al drive units gt Display filter Drive unit selection Orderno Voltage Rated power Rated current
363. tions Description of Vdc_min Control Kinetic Buffering Vdc Power failure Power restore i ae a ss SS Se ee Be Ga aal 11246 r1286 lt 1 gt Si See ee aa SSS aS et without KIP fault F30003 ov Vdo 1 controller active 0 nsetp regenerative Fig 9 3 Switching Vdc_min control on off kinetic buffering NOTE Kinetic buffering must only be activated in conjunction with an external power supply When Vdc_min control is enabled with p1240 2 3 p1280 it is activated in the event of a power failure when the Vdc_min switch in level r1246 r1286 is undershot In general the regenerative power braking energy of the drive machine generated when the motor speed is reduced is used to support the DC link voltage of the converter in other words when Vdc_min control is active the motor speed no longer follows the main setpoint and can be reduced to a standstill The SINAMICS continues operating until the shutdown threshold of the DC link voltage see Fig 9 3 lt 1 gt is undershot 1 All data in brackets apply for V f open loop control SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 9 9 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 e V f control The Vdc_min controller acts on the speed setpoint path When Vdc_min control is active the drive setpoint speed is reduced so that the drive becomes regenerative e Speed control The Vdc_min controller
364. tization current lu V f characteristic control is derived from these basic premises The field weakening range is above the rated motor frequency where the maximum voltage is reached The flux and maximum torque are reduced as the frequency increases see Fig 7 4 7 pb 4u P Operating point of motor U 7 7 4 gt lt Voltage range _ gt lt Field range f f n max Fig 7 4 Operating areas and characteristic curves for the induction motor with converter supply Several variations of the V f characteristic exist which are listed in the following table SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 7 9 Setpoint Channel and Closed Loop Control 06 05 Table 7 1 p1300 V f characteristics Parameter Meaning Application Property values 0 Linear Standard with variable voltage characteristic boost 1 Linear Characteristic that characteristic compensates for voltage drops V with flux in the stator resistance for V rex current control static dynamic loads flux rooz or RE a BA FCC current control FCC pO304 7 This is particularly useful for aw small motors since they have Load current a relatively high stator ri t dependent resistance 0 p0310 2 Parabolic Characteristic that takes into characteristic account the motor torque curve e g fan pump e Quadratic characte
365. to overvoltage limiters e g RC elements e The cabinet unit must not be operated via a residual current operated device DIN VDE 0160 4 7 1 Connection Cross Sections Cable Lengths Connection Cross Sections The connection cross sections for the input power connection motor connection and cabinet grounding for your cabinet unit are specified in the tables provided in the Technical Data section Cable Lengths The maximum connectable cable lengths are specified for standard cable types or cable types recommended by SIEMENS Longer cables can only be used after consultation The specified cable length represents the actual distance between the cabinet unit and the motor taking into account parallel routing current carrying capacity and the cable laying factor e Unshielded cable e g Protodur NYY max 450 m e Shielded cable e g Protodur NYCWY Protoflex EMV 3 Plus max 300 m NOTE The PROTOFLEX EMV 3 PLUS shielded cable recommended by Siemens is the protective conductor and comprises three symmetrically arranged protective conductors The individual protective conductors must each be provided with cable eyes and be connected to ground The cable also has a concentric flexible braided copper shield To comply with EN55011 regarding radio interference suppression the shield must contact at both ends and with the greatest possible surface area On the motor side cable glands that contact the shield with the grea
366. tor p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 1 TM31 p4039 DO9 TM31 Factory setting p4028 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4040 DO10 TM31 Factory setting p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4041 DO11 TM31 Factory setting p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 Factory setting p2103 17 acknowledge faults A_INF 0 p2104 2 acknowledge faults A_INF r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Parameter Macros Parameter Macros 06 05 Parameter macro p0700 S G150 NAMUR 70007 This macro is used to set the NAMUR terminal block as the command source Table 4 Parameter macro p0700 S G150 NAMUR Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0840 0 ON OFF 1 Vector r4022 0 TM31 DIO TM31 OFF2_1 enable signal p0844 0 missing Vector r4022 4 TM31 Dl4 TM31 OFF2_2 enable signal p0845 0 missing Vector r0722 3 CU DI3 CU OFF3_1 enable signal p0848 0 missing Vector r4022 5 TM31 DI5 TM31 OFF3_2 enable signal p0849 0 missing Vector 1 p0806 LOCAL mode disable Vector 0 Command data set p0810 selection CDS bit 0 Vector 0 p0852 Enable operation Vector 1 p0854 Control from the PLC Vector 1 PROFIBUS PZD telegram Customizable message p0922 selection Vector 999 frame configuration Fixed setpoint selection bit p1020 0 Vector r4022 1
367. tor data p0304 ff e Visualization parameters e g Calculated rated data p0330 ff The parameters that are grouped together in the motor data set are identified in the SINAMICS parameter list by Data Set MDS and are assigned an index 0 n SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 11 Operation 06 05 A separate motor data set is required for each motor that is controlled by the control unit via a power module The motor data set is assigned to a drive data set via parameter p0186 A motor data set can only be changed using a DDS changeover The motor data set changeover is for example used for e Changing over between different motors e Changing over between different windings in a motor e g star delta changeover e Motor data adaptation If several motors are operated alternately on one Power Module a matching number of drive data sets must be created Refer to Chapter 9 2 Drive functions for additional information and instructions on changing over motors NOTICE Only a motor connected to a Power Module can have an encoder all additional motors must be operated without encoder sensorless operation A drive object can manage a max of 16 motor data sets The number of motor data sets in p0130 may not exceed the number of drive data sets in p0180 Copying the Command Data Set CDS Set parameter p0809 as follows 1 p0809 0 number of the command data set to be copied source 2 p0809 1 numb
368. ttached canopy SINAMICS G150 3 8 Operating Instructions 06 05 Mechanical Installation Attaching a Hood to Increase the Degree of Protection to IP23 IP54 Option M23 M54 Remove the crane transport assembly if fitted N Make sure that the perforated top cover is not fitted on the top of the cabinet depending on production requirements this can be fitted at a later stage p For option M54 only Secure the contact surfaces of the hood on top of the cabinet using the sealing tape provided gt A Fit the hood to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified fixing points for the crane transport assembly Insert original hood screws M14 from above Insert the enclosed screws and plain washers M8 from below Additional screw fittings are provided here for wide hoods Fig 3 2 Attaching a hood SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 3 9 Mechanical Installation 06 05 3 3 6 Cable Entry from Above Option M13 Motor Connection from Above Option M78 Cable Entry from Above With options M13 and M78 the cabinet unit is equipped with an additional hood The connection straps for the power cables the clamping bar for mechanically securing the cables an EMC shield bus and a PE busbar are located within the hood The hood adds an extra 405 mm to the cabinet height The busbars for connection from above are fully mounted when the system is delivered For transport reaso
369. uested data set Energize the motor contactor After the feedback signal motor contactor opened for motor contactor 1 the appropriate bit of r0830 is set and motor contactor 2 is energized Enable the pulses After the feedback signal motor contactor closed for motor contactor 2 the bit motor data set changeover active r0835 0 is reset and the pulses are enabled The changeover has been completed SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 5 4 Function diagram e 8565 Drive data set DDS e 8575 Motor data sets MDS 9 2 5 5 Parameters e 10051 e p0130 e p0180 e p0186 e p0819 0 2 e p0820 e p0821 e p0822 e p0823 e p0824 e p0826 e p0827 e p0828 e p0830 e p0831 e p0833 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Drive data set DDS effective Motor data sets MDS number Drive data set DDS number Motor data sets MDS number Copy drive data set DDS BI Drive data set selection bit 0 BI Drive data set selection bit 1 BI Drive data set selection bit 2 BI Drive data set selection bit 3 BI Drive data set selection bit 4 Motor changeover motor number Motor changeover status bit number Motor changeover feedback signal Motor changeover status Motor changeover contactor feedback signal Motor changeover configuration 9 21 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 06 05 9 2 6 Friction characteristic Description
370. uppl setpoint Vector O Vector p1076 Additional setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector Parameter Macros 12 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Parameter Macros Parameter macro p1000 fixed setpoint 100004 This macro is used to set the fixed setpoint as the setpoint source Table 9 Parameter macro p1000 fixed setpoint Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r1024 Effective fixed setpoint Vector p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector p1075 Suppl setpoint Vector 0 Vector p1076 Additional setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Parameter Macros 13 Parameter Macros 06 05 SINAMICS G150 Parameter Macros 14 Operating Instructions
371. upply e Open the cabinet door e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 17 1 Remove the copper bars 8 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 37 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 14 11 4 15 11 4 16 11 38 Replacing the Fan Fuses U1 F10 U1 F 11 The order numbers for replacement fan fuses can be found in the spare parts list WARNING Make sure that the cause of the fault is found before the fuse is replaced Replacing the Fuses for the Auxiliary Power Supply A1 F11 A1 F 12 The order numbers for replacing auxiliary power supply fuses that have blown can be found in the spare parts list in section 8 of the documentation folder WARNING You must carry out the following e Disconnect the auxiliary power supply e Identify the cause of the fault e Replace
372. user friendly AOP30 Operator Panel 6 3 1 1 Parameter Types The following adjustable and visualization parameters are available e Adjustable parameters write read These parameters have a direct impact on the behavior of a function Example Ramp up and ramp down time of a ramp function generator e Display parameter read only These parameters are used to display internal variables Example current motor current Parameter ae read r write read p Pa ae S BICO output normal read BICO input normal write read parameter parameter Fig 6 1 Parameter types All these drive parameters can be read and changed via PROFIBUS using the mechanisms defined in the PROFIdrive profile SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 3 Operation 06 05 6 3 1 2 Parameter Categories The parameters for the individual drive objects see 6 3 2 are categorized according to data sets as follows see 6 3 3 e Data set independent parameters These parameters exist only once per drive object e Data set dependent parameters These parameters can exist several times for each drive object and can be addressed via the parameter index for reading and writing A distinction is made between various types of data set CDS command data set CDS By parameterizing several command data sets and switching between them the drive can be operated with different pre configured signal sources DDS drive data set The drive dat
373. ut current A 330 410 465 Base load current I A 320 400 452 Base load current I A 280 367 416 Maximum output frequency 2 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 5 4 6 9 7 8 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 78 0 78 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 72 75 72 75 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 120 2x 185 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 300 2 x 500 2 x 500 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2x 120 2 x 150 AWG MCM 2 x 4 0 2 x 300 2 x 400 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 600 4 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 2 holes M12 2 holes PE conductor connection Fastening screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Approx weight standard version kg 300 670 670 Power block type GX HX HX Dimensions standard version WxHxD mm 400 x 2000 x600 600x2000x600 600 x 2000 x 600 Recommended protection Cond semi cond protection 3NE1 334 2 3NE1 334 2 3NE1 435 2 Rated current A 500 500 560 Size to DIN 43 620 1 2 2 3 1 L19 or B03 2 3 4 frequency see 9 2 5 for derating data see 12 2 1 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions The currents include 10 A for the external auxiliary equipment as used for example with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s
374. utput CU 1 Output CU p0742 DI DO12 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0743 DI DO13 CU r0899 6 Power on inhibit Vector p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 1 inverted p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0745 DI DO15 CU 12138 7 Acknowledge fault Vector p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU 0 not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU 1 Output CU p2103 i acknowledge faults TM31 r2090 7 PZD 1 Bit 7 Vector p2104 2 acknowledge faults TM31 r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p4031 DO1 TM31 r2139 3 Fault Vector p4038 DO8 TM31 r0899 0 Ready to power up Vector p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 1 Output TM31 p4039 DO9 TM31 0 p4028 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 O p4040 DO10 TM31 0 p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 O p4041 DO11 TM31 0 p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 O p2103 1 gt acknowledge faults A_INF r2090 7 PZD 1 Bit 7 Vector p2104 ae acknowledge faults A_INF r4022 3 TM31 DIS TM31 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Parameter Macros 5 Parameter Macros 06 05 Parameter macro p0700 S G150 terminal block 70006 This macro is used to set customer terminal block TM31 as the command source
375. utput 1 TM31 r0068 value TM31 p4100 Temperature sensor type TM31 O factory setting TM31 TM31 temperature evaluation fault alarm p4102 0 threshold TM31 251 C Message being generated TM31 TM31 temperature evaluation fault alarm p4102 1 threshold TM31 251 C Message being generated TM31 p7003 Winding system Vector 1 Separate winding systems Vector SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Parameter Macros 3 Parameter Macros 06 05 Parameter macro p0700 S G150 PROFIBUS 70005 This macro is used to set the PROFIBUS interface as the command source Table 2 Parameter macro p0700 S G150 PROFIBUS Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0840 0 ON OFF 1 Vector r2090 0 PZD 1 Bit 0 Vector p0844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector r2090 1 PZD 1 Bit 1 Vector p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector r0722 3 CU DI3 CU p0848 0 No OFF3_1 Vector r2090 2 PZD 1 Bit 2 Vector p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector r0722 2 CU DI2 CU p0806 LOCAL mode disable Vector 0 Command data set p0810 selection CDS bit 0 Vector 0 p0852 Enable operation Vector r2090 3 PZD 1 Bit 3 Vector p0854 Control from the PLC Vector r2090 10 PZD 1 Bit 10 Vector PROFIBUS PZD telegram Customizable message p0922 selection Vector 999 frame configuration Fixed setpoint selection bit p1020 0 Vector 0 Fixed setpoint selection bit p1021 1 Vect
376. utput current which in turn reduces losses in the power section No reduction p0290 1 You should choose this option when a reduction in neither pulse frequency nor output current is necessary The converter does not change its operating point once an alarm threshold has been overshot which means that the drive can be operated until it reaches its shutdown values Once it reaches its shutdown threshold the converter switches itself off and the Overtemperature overload fault is output The time until shutdown however is not defined and depends on the degree of overload To ensure that an alarm can be output earlier or that the user can intervene if necessary in the drive process e g reduce load ambient temperature only the alarm threshold can be changed Function Diagram FD 8014 Parameters 9 36 p0290 Power module overload response p0294 Power module alarm with i t overload r0036 Power module overload r0037 Power module temperatures SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 3 Block Protection Description The error message Motor blocked is only triggered if the speed of the drive is below the variable speed threshold set in p2175 With vector control it must also be ensured that the speed controller is at the limit With V f control the current limit must already have been reached Once the ON delay p2177 has elapsed the message Motor blocked an
377. uts for outputting setpoints via current or voltage signals Factory setting e AOO Actual speed value 0 20 mA e AO1 Actual motor current 0 20 mA Signal Flow Diagram AO signal p4071 Actual speed value Smoothingcurrent U I r0063 p4073 r4074 Output current r0068 DC link voltage r0070 Output power r r0082 Scaling Fig 8 1 Signal flow diagram Analog output 0 Function Diagram FD 1840 9572 Parameters e p4071 Analog outputs signal source e p4073 Analog outputs smoothing time constant e 14074 Analog outputs actual output voltage current e p4076 Analog outputs type e p4077 Analog outputs characteristic value x1 e p4078 Analog outputs characteristic value y1 e p4079 Analog outputs characteristic value x2 e p4080 Analog outputs characteristic value y2 Current output AO 0 ref SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 06 05 Output Terminals List of Signals for the Analog Outputs Signal Parameter Unit Scaling 100 see Table 8 1 Speed setpoint upstream of setpoint filter r0060 1 min p2000 Motor speed unsmoothed r0061 1 min p2000 Actual speed after smoothing r0063 1 min p2000 Output frequency r0066 Hz Reference frequency Output current r0068 Aeff p2002 DC link voltage r0070 V p2001 Torque setpoint r0079 Nm p2003 Output power r0082 kW 12004 For diagnostic purposes Speed controller system devi
378. uts on the CU This parameter shows the status of the digital inputs under the influence of simulation mode of the digital inputs r2054 Profibus status Displays the status of the Profibus interface r9976 0 7 System load Displays the system load The individual values computation load and cyclic load are measured over short time slices from these values the maximum the minimum and the average value are generated and displayed in the appropriate indices Further the degree of memory utilization of the data and program memory is displayed Vector Key Diagnostic Parameters Details in List Manual r0002 Operating display The value provides information about the current operating status and the conditions necessary to reach the next status r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed Displays the actual smoothed speed velocity setpoint at the input of the speed velocity controller or V f characteristic after the interpolator r0021 Speed setpoint smoothed Displays the smooth actual value of the motor speed velocity r0026 DC link voltage smoothed Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link r0027 Absolute actual current smoothed Displays the smoothed actual value of the current r0031 Actual torque smoothed Displays the smoothed actual torque r0035 Motor temperature Displays the actual temperature in the motor If neither a temperature sensor n
379. values are initially stored in the volatile memory RAM of the converter An S flashes in the top right of the AOP display until they are saved to a permanent memory This indicates that at least 1 parameter has been changed and not yet stored permanently Two methods are available for permanently saving parameters that have been changed e The parameter list contains additional function key assignments You can use the lt lt key to change the function of the keys In the extended menu you can save the data by choosing F3 EEPROM e When confirming a parameter setting with OK press the OK key for gt 1 s The system displays a message asking you whether the setting is to be saved in the EEPROM If you press Yes the system saves the setting in the EEPROM If you press No the setting is not saved permanently and the S starts flashing In both cases all changes that have not yet been saved permanently are stored in the EEPROM Parameterization Errors If an error occurs while parameters are being read or written this is indicated in the status bar on the operator panel the eighth or lowest line in the operation screen or the seventh line in all other screens The system displays Parameter write error d pxxxx yy 0xnn and a plain text explanation of the type of parameterization error SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 6 63 Operation 06 05 SINAMICS G150 6 64 Operating Instructions Setpoint Channel
380. ve setting Motor Calculation of the rr Motor holding brake Defaults of the setp Drive PROFIBU ANCUONS Motor encoder selection lmportant paramete mar o il i a Encodertype O isdY pe 1024 HTL A B Feat 52144531 1024 TTL A B R at X521 7531 i 2048 HTL 4 B R at x5217x531 1024 HTL A B at x5217x531 aR 1024 TTL A B at X521 4531 we Y al 2048 HTL A B at 521 4X53 oe 2048 TTL A B at X521 4531 1024 HTL B unipolar at x521 x531 x M Readout SM again Fig 5 21 Entering the encoder data 23 In Name enter a name NOTE In the factory setting an HTL encoder is bipolar with 1024 pulses per revolution at terminal X521 X531 24 Click the option field Select standard encoder from list and select one of the available encoders 25 To enter special encoder configurations click the option field Enter data and then Encoder data The following screen is displayed in which you can enter the required data SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 21 Commissioning 06 05 User defined Encoder Data E x Encoder type r Resolution Rotary C Linear Measuring system Incremental pulse HTL ba Encoder evaluation type SMC30 Pulses revolution 1024 e g 2048 periods per revolution paseas ene ed iene gt ea Eoo N 1____ r Encoder connection 521 531 Single ended Differential with
381. ve the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig 11 9 1 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the electronics slide in unit 2 screws When removing the electronics slide in unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 below CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables 5 The control interface board can then be removed from the electronics slide in unit Installation To re install the fan carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in Table 11 1 must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 11 21 Maintenance and Servicing 06 05 11 4 8 Replacing the Control Interface Board Type HX Replacing the Control Interface Board O Oleje 6 9 6 8 FE 0 5 Fig 11 10 Replacing the control interface board type HX SINAMICS G150 11 22 Operating Instru
382. ve units can be connected to the line supply in either a 6 pulse or 12 pulse connection For a 6 pulse connection the following special issues apply The DC links may not be connected with one another the disconnect switch Q98 Q99 must be open Only motors with separate winding systems may be used every motor connection of a sub cabinet must be connected to its own winding system Parameter p7003 winding system must be set to 1 several separate winding systems or motors Edge modulation is not possible For a 12 pulse connection the following special issues apply 2 6 The 12 pulse connection to the line supply is only possible using a double tier transformer with three winding systems or two single transformers with two electrical winding systems on the transformer secondary offset through 30 with respect to one another Transformer vector groups Dy5Dd0 or Dy11Dd0 should be preferably used When using sub windings that are electrically offset with respect to one another the line harmonics are reduced with respect to the 6 pulse infeed The following requirements apply for the transformer The open circuit voltages of the two secondary windings must not differ more than a maximum of 0 5 referred to rated voltage The deviations of the short circuit impedances of the two secondary windings must be less than 5 of the rated value The minimum short circuit impedance of the transformer should be 4 T
383. vel 15 V to 30 V Low signal level 3 V to 5 V DI digital input M2 ground reference M Electronic ground Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 NOTE An open input is interpreted as low To enable the digital inputs to function terminal M1 must be connected This can be done as follows 1 The provided ground reference of the digital inputs or 2 A jumper to terminal M note this removes isolation for these digital inputs X521 2 Analog Inputs Differential Inputs Table 4 12 Terminal block X521 Terminal Designation 1 Technical specifications E 1 Al 0 10 V 10V Ri 70 kQ I 2 Al 0 4 mA 20 mA Sy 3 Al 1 20 mA 20 mA Ri 250 Q J 0 mA 20 mA factory setting ALI 4 Al 1 on TI 5 P10 10 V1 Imax 5 MA s 6 M Reference potential for Al 0 co Y 7 N10 10 V 1 Imax 5 MA 8 M Reference potential for Al 1 DAI analog input P10 N10 auxiliary voltage M Ground reference Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 CAUTION The input current of the analog inputs must not exceed 35 mA when current measurements are performed SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 27 Electrical Installation 06 05 S5 Selector for Voltage Current Al0 Al1 Table 4 13 Selector for voltage current S5 Switch Function Technical specifications 5 0 Selector voltage current AlO Med 5 0 5 1 Sele
384. witched off and the DC link capacitors are discharged CAUTION The braking resistor cables must be laid in such a way that they are short circuit and ground fault proof The length of the connection cables between the cabinet unit and external braking resistor must not exceed 50 m Table 4 31 Terminal block X5 connection for external braking resistor Terminal Functional description 1 Braking resistor connection 2 Braking resistor connection Max connectable cross section 70 mm AWG 000 Recommended cable cross sections e For L61 25 kW 35 mm AWG 0 e For L62 50 kW 50 mm AWG 00 Table 4 32 Installing the thermostat for the external braking resistor in the monitoring train of the cabinet unit Terminal Functional description T1 Thermostat connection connection with terminal X541 1 P24 V T2 Thermostat connection connection with terminal X541 5 D111 Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 Cabinet Unit Settings If the braking resistor thermostat is connected to digital input 11 appropriate settings have to be made so that the drive is brought to a standstill if a fault occurs Once the device has been successfully commissioned you have to make the following changes Setting the Expert on the operator panel lt Key pushbutton gt lt Access level gt Set Expert and confirm enter activation code 47 Expert access level i p2108
385. with options The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 The base load current lH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Section 12 2 2 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output 12 19 Technical Data 06 05 12 3 4 Table 12 20 Version C 500 V 600 V 3AC part 1 Cabinet Unit Version C 500 V 600 V 3AC Category Unit Order no 6SL3710 1GF31 8CA0 1GF32 2CA0 1GF32 6CA0 Rated motor output kW 110 132 160 Rated input voltage V 3 AC 500 V to 600 V 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 201 234 280 Rated output current A 175 215 260 Base load current A 170 208 250 Base load current IH A 157 192 233 Maximum output frequency a Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 3 5 3 9 4 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 69 73 69 73 Line connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 120 2x 70 2x95 AWG MCM 300 2 x 000 2 x 4 0 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 4x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 600 2 x 600 4 x 600 Fastening screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Motor connection Recommended DIN VDE mm 95 120 2x70 AWG MCM 4 0 300 2 x 000 Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x 150 2 x 150 2 x 240 A
386. wly coasts to a standstill as a result of the kinetic energy stored in the drive train example induced draft fan with a high inertia load and a steeply descending load characteristic in the lower speed range Depending on the setting chosen p1200 the flying restart function is activated in the following situations e Once power has been restored and the automatic restart function is active e After a shutdown with the OFF2 command pulse inhibit when the automatic restart function is active e When the ON command is issued NOTE The flying restart function must be used when the motor may still be running or is being driven by the load to prevent shutdowns due to overcurrent F7801 NOTE e lf the value set for parameter p1203 search speed factor is higher the search curve is flatter and as a result the search time is longer A lower value has the opposite effect e In motors with a low moment of inertia the flying restart function can cause the drive to accelerate slightly e In group drives the flying restart function should not be activated due to the different coasting properties of the individual motors SINAMICS G150 9 14 Operating Instructions 06 05 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 4 1 Flying Restart Without Encoder Depending on parameter p1200 the flying restart function is started with the maximum search speed Nsearch max once the de excitation time p0347 has el
387. x connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 4 55 Electrical Installation 06 05 Table 4 45 Terminal block A1 X2 connection for NAMUR control terminal block Terminal Designation Preassignment Comments 10 DI ON dynamic ON OFF static Effective operation can be coded by a wire jumper on terminal A1 400 9 10 11 DI OFF dynamic 12 DI Faster Motorized potentiometer 13 DI Slower Motorized potentiometer 14 DI RESET Acknowledge error 15 DI Interlock OFF2 16 DI CCW rotation 0 signal CW phase sequence 1 signal CCW phase sequence 17 i8 Line disconnection EMERGENCY OFF circuit 30 a Ready Relay output NO contact 32 ah Motor rotates Relay output NO contact 34 DO NO 35 DO COM Fault Relay output two way contact 36 DO NC 50 51 Al 0 4 20 mA Speed setpoint 60 61 AO 0 4 20 mA Motor frequency 62 63 AO 0 4 20 mA Motor current Defaulted with motor current can be reparameterized for other variables Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 Table 4 46 Terminal block A1 X3 connection for motor PTC thermistor detector Terminal Designation Preassignment Comments 90 91 Al Connection for a PTC detector Shutdown if limit value is exceeded Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 SINAMICS G150 4 56 Operating Instructions 06 05 Electrical Installat
388. your hard disk You now have to transfer your project configuration data to the drive unit Transferring the STARTER Project to the Drive Unit To transfer the STARTER project you created offline to the drive unit carry out the following steps Step Selection in toolbar 1 Choose Project gt Connect to target system IE 2 Choose Target system gt Load project to target system 5 l IMPORTANT The project has now been loaded to the drive unit The data is currently only stored in the volatile memory of the drive unit and not on the CompactFlash card To store the project data on the CompactFlash card so that it is protected in the event of a power failure carry out the following step Step Selection in toolbar 3 Choose Target system gt Copy from RAM to ROM 03 NOTE The Copy from RAM to ROM icon is only active when the drive unit is selected in the project navigator SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions 5 29 Commissioning 06 05 Results of the Previous Steps e You have created a drive unit project offline using STARTER e You have saved the project data to the hard disk on your PC e You have transferred the project data to the drive unit e You have saved the project data to the CompactFlash card so that it is protected in the event of a power failure NOTE The STARTER commissioning tool supports complex drive system operations If you ar

Operating Instructions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents